Skip to main content

Full text of "The Princeton Seminary Bulletin"

See other formats


THE 


SEMINARY 

BULLETIN 


“The  Teaching  Office  in  the  Reformed  Tradition”  Ronald  C.  White,  Jr. 

Editorial 

The  Ministry  of  God  Thomas  W.  Gillespie 

Opening  Convocation,  September  18,  1983 

And  He  Called  Them  His  Disciples  Marvin  McMickle 

Opening  Communion  Service,  September  19,  1983 

Education,  the  Gospel,  and  the  Marginal  Craig  Dykstra 

The  Empowering  Gospel:  D.  Campbell  Wyckoff s 

Concept  of  the  Guiding  Principle  Donald  B.  Rogers 

The  Black  Presbyterian  Church  and  Its  Rural 

Ministry  James  H.  Costen 

Emile  Cailliet:  Christian  Centurion  Richard  J.  Oman 

Princetoniana 

Memorial  Tributes 

John  Alexander  Mackay  (1889-1983) 

Norman  Victor  Hope  (1908-1983) 


VOLUME  V,  NUMBER  1 


NEW  SERIES  1984 


PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY 


Thomas  W.  Gillespie 
President 


John  M.  Templeton,  President 


Robert  M.  Adams 
James  F.  Anderson 
Clem  E.  Bininger 
Robert  W.  Bohl 
John  H.  Donelik 
Peter  E.  B.  Erdman 
Rosemary  H.  Evans 
Milton  A.  Galamison 
Sarah  B.  Gambrell 
Francisco  O.  Garcia-Treto 
Helen  H.  Gemmill 
Carl  H.  Geores,  Jr. 
Margaret  L.  Harmon 
Alexandra  G.  Hawkins 
C.  Thomas  Hilton 
J.  Roger  Hull,  Jr. 

Bryant  M.  Kirkland 
Johannes  R.  Krahmer 
Henry  Luce  III 

Eugene  C.  Blake 
J.  Douglas  Brown 
John  G.  Buchanan 
Frederick  E.  Christian 
Allan  M.  Frew 
John  T.  Galloway 
Henry  E.  Hird 


BOARD  OF  TRUSTEES 
David 

Robert  M.  Adams,  Secretary 
William  E.  Lawder,  Treasurer 


TRUSTEES  EMERITI 


James  I.  McCord 
President  Emeritus 


i.  Watermulder,  Vice-President 


Donald  C.  McFerren 
Dale  W.  McMillen,  Jr. 
Earl  F.  Palmer 
George  T.  Piercy 
William  A.  Pollard 
Clifford  G.  Pollock 
William  H.  Scheide 
Laird  H.  Simons,  Jr. 
Frederick  B.  Speakman 
John  M.  Templeton 
William  P.  Thompson 
James  M.  Tunnell,  Jr. 
Karen  L.  Turner 
Jeffrey  R.  Wampler 
Samuel  G.  Warr 
David  B.  Watermulder 
Charles  Wright 
Ralph  M.  Wyman 


Weir  C.  Ketler 
Harry  G.  Kuch 
Raymond  I.  Lindquist 
John  S.  Linen 
J.  Keith  Louden 
Irving  A.  West 


The  Princeton  Seminary  Bulletin 

VOL.  V NEW  SERIES  1984  NUMBER  1 


Ronald  C.  White,  Jr.,  Editor 


J.  J.  M.  Roberts,  Book  Review  Editor 


CONTENTS 


“The  Teaching  Office  in  the  Reformed  Tradition” 

Ronald  C.  White,  Jr. 

V 

Editorial 

The  Ministry  of  God 

Thomas  W.  Gillespie 

1 

Opening  Convocation,  September 

18,  1983 

And  He  Called  Them  His  Disciples 

Marvin  McMickle 

9 

Opening  Communion  Service,  September  19,  198 3 

Education,  the  Gospel,  and  the  Marginal 

Craig  Dyjstra 

J3 

The  Empowering  Gospel:  D.  Campbell  WyckofPs 

Concept  of  the  Guiding  Principle 

Donald  B.  Rogers 

21 

The  Black  Presbyterian  Church  and  Its  Rural 

Ministry 

James  H.  Costen 

28 

Emile  Cailliet:  Christian  Centurion 

Richard  J.  Oman 

33 

Princetoniana 

Memorial  Tributes 

John  Alexander  Mackay  (1889-1983) 

41 

Norman  Victor  Hope  (1908-1983) 

44 

Sermons 

The  Tacit  Dimension  of  Ministry 

Thomas  W.  Gillespie 

46 

Christian  Unity  in  a Wounded  World 

Paul  A.  Crow,  Jr. 

5° 

Spirituality  of  the  Struggle 

John  W.  de  Gruchy 

55 

Bible  Study  on  Peace:  Ephesians  2:11-3:21 

Cullen  I K Story 

59 

Book  Reviews 

The  Faith  of  the  Old  Testament:  A History,  by  Werner  H. 

Schmidt  Ben  C.  Ollenburger  67 

Women  Recounted:  Narrative  Thinking  and  the  God  of  Israel, 
by  James  G.  Williams 


Elizabeth  Gaines  68 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Colossians,  Philemon,  by  Petei  T.  O’Brien 

Otto  Reimherr 

7° 

The  Church,  by  Wolfhart  Pannenberg 

David  J.  Bryant 

71 

Message  and  Existence:  An  Introduction  to  Christian  Theology, 
by  Landon  Gilkey 

Mar\  Kline  Taylor 

72 

Romantic  Idealism  and  Roman  Catholicism:  Schelling  and  the 
Theologians,  by  Thomas  F.  O’Meara 

Walter  Sundberg 

74 

Birth  and  Death:  Bioethical  Decision-Making,  by  Paul  D. 
Simmons 

William  DeVeaux 

76 

Christian-Marxist  Dialogue  in  Eastern  Europe,  by  Paul  Mojzes 

Charles  C.  West 

77 

Pastoral  Theology,  by  Thomas  C.  Oden 

H.  Dana  Fearon  III 

77 

Discovering  the  Church,  by  Barbara  Brown  Zikmund 

William  D.  Howden 

79 

The  Twentieth  Century  Pulpit,  ed.  by  James  W.  Cox 

Donald  Macleod 

80 

Biblical  Preaching:  An  Expositor’s  Treasury,  ed.  by  James  W. 
Cox 

Thomas  G.  Long 

80 

The  Light  Within  You,  by  John  R.  Claypool 

William  D.  Howden 

81 

Stained  Glass  from  Medieval  Times  to  the  Present,  by  James  L. 
Sturm  and  James  Chotas 

Donald  Macleod 

83 

THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 

The  Bulletin  is  published  three  times  annually  by  the  Theological  Seminary 
of  the  United  Presbyterian  Church  at  Princeton,  New  Jersey  08542. 

Each  issue  is  mailed  free  of  charge  to  all  alumni/ae  and  on  exchange 
basis  with  various  institutions.  Back  issues  are  not  available. 

Editor  Book,  Review  Editor 

Ronald  C.  White,  Jr.  J.  J.  M.  Roberts 

All  correspondence  should  be  addressed  to  the  Editor  and  accompanied 
by  a self-addressed,  stamped  return  envelope. 

The  policy  of  the  Bulletin  is  to  publish  lectures  and  sermons  by  Princeton 
Seminary  faculty  and  administration,  and  presentations  by  guests  on  the 
Seminary  Campus;  therefore  we  cannot  accept  unsolicited  material. 

Second  Class  postage  pending  at  Princeton,  New  Jersey  08542. 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016  with  funding  from 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Library 


https  ://arch  i ve . org/detai  Is/pri  ncetonsem  i na51 1 9pri  n_0 


“The  Teaching  Office  in  the  Reformed  Tradition” 


by  Ronald  C.  White,  Jr.,  Editor 

The  Teaching  Office  as  an  integral  ministry  of  the  church  needs  to  be  redis- 
covered and  affirmed.  In  recent  years  many  other  aspects  of  ministry  have  been 
accented.  Emphasis  has  been  placed  on  the  minister  as  enabler  or  administrator. 
There  has  been  increased  interest  in  developing  skills  in  counseling  and  organ- 
izational development.  Interest  in  preaching  is  bursting  out  all  over.  But  where 
have  all  the  teachers  gone? 

Many  have  gone  to  the  academy — colleges,  universities,  and  seminaries.  And 
there  the  good  students  are  spotted  and  encouraged  to  teach — but  in  the  academy, 
not  in  the  church.  This  cloistering  of  the  Teaching  Office  in  an  academic  en- 
vironment has  not  always  been  the  case. 

The  subject  of  the  Teaching  Office  has  special  poignancy  for  those  within  the 
Reformed  family.  In  The  Institutes  of  Christian  Religion  John  Calvin  set  out  four 
offices  for  the  church:  pastors,  doctors,  elders,  and  deacons.  On  returning  from 
his  Strasbourg  sojourn,  Calvin  presented  to  the  Genevan  city  council  a schedule 
of  ecclesiastical  organization  calling  for  a fourfold  public  ministry  of  the  Reformed 
churches.  The  second  order,  the  doctor,  was  charged  with  “teaching  the  faithful 
in  wholesome  doctrine.” 

Despite  this  historical  foundation,  the  second  office  somehow  atrophied  in  the 
intervening  centuries.  It  did  not  die.  One  place  where  it  lived  on  was  in  New 
England.  For  example,  in  1632  the  Boston  First  Church  ordained  John  Cotton 
as  teacher  to  serve  alongside  the  ordained  pastor,  John  Wilson.  The  next  year 
the  newly  organized  Church  of  Cambridge  selected  Thomas  Hooker  as  its  pastor 
and  Samuel  Stone  as  its  teacher.  The  landmark  Cambridge  Platform  of  1648 
included  provisions  for  the  Teaching  Office  based  not  in  the  school  but  in  the 
parish. 

Today  I am  discovering  in  many  places  persons  aware  of  the  tradition  of  both 
Calvin  and  various  followers  and  eager  to  translate  the  Teaching  Office  into 
contemporary  models.  People  are  often  working  creatively  in  their  own  contexts 
but  in  isolation  from  each  other.  These  doctors  of  the  church  may  have  something 
to  say  to  all  of  us. 

I 

It  is  critical  that  we  be  clear  about  what  is  being  commended.  “Teaching 
Office”  can  be  abstract  or  amorphous.  I am  speaking  concretely  about  a teacher. 
The  Association  of  Theological  Schools  sponsored  a series  of  conferences  recently 
on  the  Teaching  Office.  The  ecumenical  dialogue  was  informative  as  we  examined 
the  Teaching  Office  in  the  church,  whether  it  be  resident  in  pope,  bishop,  or 
theologian.  We  talked  a lot  about  the  movement  of  information  from  the  top 
down,  but  we  had  a harder  time  envisioning  teaching  from  the  bottom  up,  with 
the  teacher  hard  at  work  at  the  local  or  parish  level.  Teaching  is  a high  calling; 
but  if  it  is  reserved  only  for  the  higher  ecclesiastical  or  theological  echelons  of 
the  church,  it  will  not  finally  do  the  job  of  “teaching  the  faithful  in  wholesome 
doctrine.” 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


A persistent  problem  is  that  many  conversations  about  education  never  quite 
get  to  the  teacher.  Yes,  it  is  important  to  think  through  educational  philosophy, 
but  we  need  to  set  apart  persons  to  teach.  Yes,  we  need  to  coordinate  Christian 
education  programs,  but  potentially  gifted  teachers  are  often  consumed  in  ad- 
ministrative responsibilities.  In  the  course  of  preparing  this  editorial  I have  talked 
with  numbers  of  able  persons  who  want  to  exercise  a teaching  ministry  but  find 
themselves  hamstrung  by  multiple  other  duties. 

Perhaps  this  Teaching  Office  is  beginning  to  sound  like  a new  elitism.  But  to 
be  set  apart  is  only  to  recognize  the  imperative  of  the  task.  We  so  often  find 
ourselves  apologetic  about  teaching  and  learning.  We  can  count  the  number  of 
people  we  see  in  a busy  afternoon,  so  counseling  and  calling  can  be  measured 
in  terms  of  usefulness,  but  how  can  we  justify  closeting  ourselves  away  in  our 
studies?  To  speak  about  the  Teaching  Office  really  involves  the  redefinition  of 
our  ministries. 

II 

To  learn  more  about  the  teaching  ministry  and  to  encourage  its  practice,  a 
continuing  education  seminar  was  convened  at  Princeton.  Individuals  were  in- 
vited who  were  trying  to  work  out  the  implications  of  the  Teaching  Office  in 
their  various  ministries.  The  group  included  ministers  in  both  single  and  multiple 
staff  churches,  a college  teacher  who  is  a ruling  elder,  a clergy  couple  sharing 
an  educational  ministry,  and  a person  with  teaching  and  training  responsibilities 
in  a paraparochial  youth  ministry.  One  participant  with  the  title  “teaching  minister” 
was  set  free  by  his  congregation  lor  an  extensive  ministry  which  included  Bible 
study  groups  in  the  parish — several  utilizing  Greek  and  Hebrew  exegesis — and 
discussion  groups  for  professionals  in  several  center  city  locations. 

Over  the  course  of  four  days  together  we  probed  the  historical  background 
of  the  Teaching  Office,  shared  in  Bible  study,  explored  the  relationship  between 
preaching  and  teaching,  and  struggled  toward  strategies  for  implementing  a 
teaching  ministry.  Out  of  our  time  together  emerged  a covenant  to  support  each 
other  in  the  teaching  ministry.  One  participant  decided  to  return  and  renegotiate 
his  call  if  the  teaching  ministry  was  to  be  fulfilled  in  his  congregation. 

Finally  the  group  decided  to  meet  again  in  one  year.  In  between  we  set  ourselves 
some  assignments.  In  almost  every  session  we  were  pushed  back  again  and  again 
to  the  nature  and  meaning  of  the  church.  We  realized  that  our  understanding 
of  the  church  will  determine  whether  or  not  learning  and  teaching  are  central 
or  peripheral.  For  the  coming  year  we  decided  to  study  Ephesians  and  several 
theological  studies  on  the  church.  Each  person  will  also  teach  Ephesians  in  his 
or  her  own  context  as  part  of  the  effort  to  work  with  our  people  in  exploring 
both  the  nature  of  the  church  and  the  teaching  ministry.  In  between  our  Princeton 
meetings  we  would  pair  ourselves  by  regions  so  that  we  could  be  accountable  in 
both  our  frustrations  and  accomplishments. 

III 

In  this  second  year  a primary  focus  will  be  on  the  dynamics  of  teaching.  If 
teaching  is  an  office,  it  is  also  a gift.  We  have  all  learned  from  good  teachers. 
But  what  makes  them  good? 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


We  are  convinced  there  is  a dynamic  relationship  between  teacher  and  content. 
If  Phillips  Brooks  defined  preaching  as  “truth  through  personality,”  we  need  to 
keep  in  mind  both  sides  of  the  equation  in  teaching.  There  are  many  personalities 
out  there  who  seem  to  exhibit  more  charisma  than  content.  At  the  same  time, 
who  has  not  come  away  from  a meeting  convinced  that  the  content  was  solid, 
but  the  communication  of  the  material  never  made  it  from  teacher  to  class  or 
congregation.  There  is  a critical  if  difficult  to  define  process  of  transmission  that 
makes  learning  lively.  The  learner  needs  to  trust  the  teacher  both  in  terms  of 
personal  integrity  and  mastery  of  subject  matter. 

We  agreed  that  central  to  the  teaching  ministry  is  biblical  teaching.  For  the 
church  reformed,  the  process  of  re-forming  comes  from  a people  in  intimate 
conversation  with  the  scriptures.  In  our  meetings  we  did  not  want  simply  to  talk 
about  what  we  need  to  do  but  rather  to  do  it.  So  we  began  each  day  with  Bible 
study.  The  format  this  year  promises  to  be  rich  with  the  background  of  our  joint 
teaching  of  Ephesians  as  our  catalyst. 

“Teaching  the  faithful  in  wholesome  doctrine”  is  a high  calling.  The  call  here 
is  not  so  much  to  restore  an  office  as  to  encourage  a ministry.  We  need  a wider 
conversation  about  the  shape  of  that  ministry  in  the  contemporary  tapestry  of 
ministerial  forms.  But  whatever  the  form,  people  are  eager  for  ministers  who 
can  teach  so  that  the  there  and  then  of  Christian  truth  and  love  intersects  the 
here  and  now. 


The  Ministry  of  God 

by  Thomas  W.  Gillespie 


Dr.  Thomas  W.  Gillespie  began  his  tenure 
as  President  of  Princeton  Theological  Semi- 
nary on  September  i,  1983. 


Opening  Convocation,  September  18,  1983 


Dean  Massa,  faculty  colleagues,  ad- 
ministrative associates,  fellow  stu- 
dents, and  honored  guests:  Permit  me 
a personal  word  of  reminiscence. 

The  last  time  I stood  in  this  pulpit, 
I was  preaching  my  Middler  sermon 
here  at  the  Seminary.  The  assigned  text 
was  John  16:33,  * the  world  you  have 
tribulation;  but  be  of  good  cheer,  I have 
overcome  the  world.”  Even  a charitable 
memory  recalls  a homiletical  effort  that 
generated  more  tribulation  than  cheer. 
My  concern  was  to  expound  and  ex- 
plain precisely  how  and  under  what 
conditions  Jesus  had  overcome  the  world. 
The  result  was  accurately  stated  in  the 
critique  which  followed. 

Professor  Macleod  said  to  me:  “Mr. 
Gillespie,  if  your  name  were  not  on  this 
manuscript,  I would  have  sworn  that 
it  had  been  written  by  George  Adam 
Smith  and  preached  to  Queen  Victoria. 
Mr.  Gillespie,  come  down  from  your 
theological  high  horse  and  preach  to 
Aunt  Fannie  in  the  front  pew.” 

That  was  wise  counsel,  and  for  the 
past  thirty  years  I have  tried  to  honor 
it.  Tonight,  however,  it  is  not  Aunt 
Fannie  who  is  sitting  in  the  front  pew 
or,  for  that  matter,  in  any  of  the  pews. 
Given  this  special  congregation  and  oc- 
casion, perhaps  it  is  permissible  for  me 
to  mount  my  horse  again  in  an  en- 
deavor to  speak  theologically  on  the 
theme  of  the  ministry  of  God. 

I 

For  a decade  now  I have  served  as 
a member  of  our  Presbyterian  delega- 
tion to  the  Consultation  on  Church 
Union.  It  has  been  a rich  and  rewarding 


experience.  With  it,  however,  has  come 
a big  surprise.  I have  discovered  that 
the  most  divisive  issue  among  the  par- 
ticipating churches  is  not  our  theology 
of  Scripture  and  Tradition.  Neither  is 
it  our  understanding  of  Creeds  and 
Confessions,  nor  our  theology  of  the 
Sacraments.  It  is  not  even  our  diverse 
liturgical  practices.  The  most  divisive 
issue  among  us  is  the  nature  of  the  min- 
istry in  the  church. 

Traditionally,  in  ecumenical  conver- 
sations and  elsewhere,  this  theme  has 
been  approached  at  the  formal  level  of 
offices,  orders,  and  ordination.  In  Ro- 
man Catholicism,  for  example,  the  point 
of  departure  until  recently  has  been  the 
priesthood  with  its  clerical  and  hier- 
archical orders.  In  our  Reformed  tra- 
dition, despite  its  lip-service  to  the 
priesthood  of  all  believers,  the  starting 
line  has  been  the  ministerial  orders  for- 
mulated by  Martin  Bucer  at  Stras- 
bourg, implemented  by  John  Calvin  at 
Geneva,  and  modified  a century  later 
by  the  Westminster  Assembly  at  Lon- 
don. Thus  when  a Presbyterian  speaks 
of  “the  ministry”  of  the  church,  the 
usual  reference  is  to  our  threefold  ec- 
clesiastical order  of  pastors  and  elders 
and  deacons. 

Let  me  state  categorically  that  the 
traditional  approach  is  the  wrong  ap- 
proach. The  ordained  offices  of  the 
church  are  not  the  proper  point  of  de- 
parture for  a theology  of  the  ministry. 
In  support  of  this  denial,  I submit  to 
you  three  considerations. 

First,  beginning  our  theology  of 
ministry  with  the  offices  of  the  church 
leads  inevitably  to  an  unhealthy  cleri- 


2 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


calism.  The  “clergy”  are  defined  as  that 
group  within  the  church  which  by  or- 
dination has  “a  part”  (Greek:  /{lews)  in 
the  ministry.  The  rest  of  the  church  is 
defined  as  the  “laity”  (Greek:  laos), 
meaning  the  unordained  “people”  who 
have  no  part  in  the  ministry.  The  church 
is  thus  divided  into  two  distinct  classes 
of  believers  it  not  into  two  separated 
castes.  There  are  the  ministers  and  there 
are  those  to  whom  these  ministers  min- 
ister. Where  this  ministry  is  conceived 
in  terms  of  priestly  functions,  the  peo- 
ple of  God  live  in  a two-story  house. 
The  clergy  occupy  the  “upstairs”  and 
the  laity  the  “downstairs.”  A non- 
priestly  version  of  the  ministry,  like  our 
own,  results  in  a “split-level”  living  ar- 
rangement. Here  the  staircase  may  be 
shorter,  but  the  “upstairs/downstairs” 
mentality  remains.  What  is  ironic  about 
all  this  is  the  fact  that  a theology  of 
ministry  is  transformed  into  a sociology 
of  status.  I would  argue  that  any  the- 
ology of  ministry  that  turns  upon  the 
question  of  status  is  by  definition  false 
doctrine. 

The  second  consideration  follows 
from  the  first.  If  beginning  our  theol- 
ogy of  ministry  with  the  offices  of  the 
cburch  is  an  invitation  to  clericalism, 
the  acceptance  of  this  invitation  results 
in  a part  where  only  a few  are  asked 
to  dance.  Without  question,  the  scope 
of  the  church’s  ministry  is  severely  lim- 
ited to  the  work  of  ordained  officers. 
No  matter  how  strongly  we  may  ad- 
vocate a “trickle  down”  philosophy  of 
“Christian  service,”  the  impression  is 
given  that  the  ministry  belongs  to  the 
ordained.  One  layman  put  it  graphi- 
cally, “My  task  in  the  church  is  to  show 
up,  sit  up,  pay  up,  and  shut  up.”  His 
name,  I fear,  is  Legion — for  he  is  many. 
Such  a consequence  “short-stops”  the 
work  of  the  Spirit,  “short-sheets”  the 


work  of  ministry,  and  “short-changes” 
the  laos  of  God  who  are  called  to  this 
task. 

The  third  consideration  is  the  cri- 
terion by  which  the  two  previous  ones 
are  viewed  negatively.  Put  simply,  it  is 
this.  Beginning  our  theology  of  min- 
istry with  the  ordained  offices  of  the 
church  is  not  where  the  Bible  begins. 
Our  traditional  doctrines  of  ministry 
have  certainly  appealed  to  the  scrip- 
tures of  the  New  Testament.  Whether 
Episcopal  or  Presbyterian  or  Congre- 
gational in  commitment,  all  ecclesias- 
tical orders  claim  biblical  warrant.  Cal- 
vin, for  example,  assumed  that  the  New 
Testament  sets  forth  a discernible  pat- 
tern of  offices  that  is  both  unified  and 
binding.  In  order  to  discern  this  unity 
amid  the  bewildering  variety  of  the  tex- 
tual data,  however,  he  was  compelled 
to  engage  in  exegetical  procedures  that 
are  highly  questionable  by  our  present 
standards.  Yet  Calvin  believed  he  had 
faithfully  represented  the  binding  or- 
der established  by  God.  Others  from 
different  traditions  have  shared  Cal- 
vin’s assumption  but  have  drawn  con- 
flicting conclusions.  How  do  we  ex- 
plain this?  New  Testament  scholars 
today  argue  that  the  conclusions  are 
conflicting  because  the  assumption  is 
false.  There  is  no  unified  and  binding 
order  of  ministerial  office  in  the  New 
Testament.  They  point  instead  to  the 
evidence  of  diversity  in  this  area  and 
to  the  traces  of  development  within  the 
period  represented  by  the  canonical 
documents.  In  other  words,  diversity 
and  development  are  the  key  terms  in 
any  consideration  of  ministerial  orders 
and  offices  within  the  canon.  If  we  seek 
unity  and  continuity  in  a theology  of 
ministry,  we  must  begin  where  the  New 
Testament  itself  begins. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


3 


II 

Where  that  is  may  be  stated  clearly. 
The  New  Testament  begins  with  the 
empowering  of  all  believers  by  the  Holy 
Spirit  from  baptism  for  participation  in 
that  ministry  which  belongs  to  the  triune 
God.  It  is  perhaps  a sign  of  the  times 
that  we  find  a growing  ecumenical  con- 
sensus on  this  perspective.  The  two 
Tubingen  theologians,  Hans  Kiing  and 
Jurgen  Moltmann,  may  be  cited  as  evi- 
dence. Kiing,  the  Roman  Catholic,  be- 
gins his  discussion  of  ministry  precisely 
at  this  point  in  his  volume  on  The  Church. 
Moltmann,  the  Reformed  theologian, 
follows  the  same  line  in  his  monograph, 
The  Church  in  the  Power  of  the  Spirit. 
The  ministry  of  the  church  is  grounded 
in  the  ministry  of  God  who  shares  it 
with  the  whole  church  for  the  sake  of 
the  entire  world. 

Let  me  illustrate  the  point  by  some 
exegetical  remarks  on  i Corinthians  12. 
Here,  if  anywhere,  we  have  Paul’s  full- 
est single  treatment  of  ministry  in  the 
church.  The  crux  of  the  matter  is  set 
forth  in  vv.  4-1 1.  I cite  it  from  the  Re- 
vised Standard  Version  (with  a few 
Greek  terms  thrown  in  for  free): 

Now  there  are  varieties  of  gifts  ( cha- 
rismata),  but  the  same  Spirit;  and  there 
are  varieties  of  service  (< iiakpnia ) but 
the  same  Lord;  and  there  are  vari- 
eties of  workings  ( energemata ),  but  it 
is  the  same  God  who  inspires  ( ener - 
gein)  them  all  in  every  one.  To  each 
is  given  the  manifestation  of  the  Spirit 
for  the  common  good.  To  one  is  given 
through  the  Spirit  the  utterance  of 
wisdom,  and  to  another  the  utter- 
ance of  knowledge  according  to  the 
same  Spirit,  to  another  faith  by  the 
same  Spirit,  to  another  gifts  of  heal- 
ing by  the  same  Spirit,  to  another  the 
working  of  miracles,  to  another 


prophecy,  to  another  the  ability  to 
distinguish  between  spirits,  to  an- 
other various  kinds  of  tongues,  to 
another  the  interpretation  of  tongues. 
All  these  are  inspired  ( energein ) by 
one  and  the  same  Spirit,  who  ap- 
portions to  each  one  individually  as 
he  wills. 

The  material  theme  of  this  passage 
is  established  in  verse  7 as  “the  mani- 
festation of  the  Spirit.”  The  question  is 
where  in  the  world  the  Spirit  is  man- 
ifest. Paul’s  answer  is  that  the  Spirit  is 
manifest  in  the  Spirit’s  wor\.  That  is 
why  the  verb  energein  is  used  twice  in 
seven  verses.  The  R.S.V.  translates  it  by 
the  English  word  “inspire,”  but  that  is 
too  weak.  What  the  Greek  verb  means 
literally  is  “to  work,”  that  is,  to  effect 
by  action.  Ministry  is  here  defined  in 
terms  of  the  activity  of  the  Spirit  in  and 
through  the  church. 

But  not  the  Spirit  alone.  This  activity 
is  the  work  of  the  Spirit,  the  work  of 
the  Lord,  and  the  work  of  God.  This 
clear  trinitarian  formulation  anchors 
ministry  in  the  work  of  the  triune  God. 
There  is  no  place  for  a “unitarianism” 
of  the  Spirit  or  of  the  Son  or  of  the 
Father  in  the  apostle’s  understanding 
of  ministry.  For  it  is  grounded  in  the 
action  of  the  triune  God. 

How  Paul  characterizes  this  divine 
activity  is  depicted  by  the  three  Greek 
nouns  that  I gave  you  in  the  reading 
of  this  text.  Consider  them  in  the  re- 
verse order  of  their  appearance.  There 
are  “varieties  of  workings”  {energe- 
mata). Of  course!  Energein  is  mani- 
fested in  its  energemata , the  work  in  its 
workings,  the  act  in  its  activity.  What 
the  apostle  is  telling  us  here  is  that  when 
the  triune  God  ministers  something  ac- 
tually happens.  And  it  happens  because 
God  is  at  work  in  the  world. 


4 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


There  are  also  “varieties  of  service” 
(< diakpnia ).  Here  our  description  of  God’s 
working  in  terms  of  “ministry”  finds 
its  expression.  It  meets  a genuine  hu- 
man need.  And  it  does  so  at  the  price 
of  self-abasement.  That  is  what  the  term 
diakpnia  meant  in  the  first  century.  If 
it  signified  social  status,  it  was  a lowly 
status,  the  status  of  the  servant  who 
waits  on  tables.  Any  theology  of  min- 
istry that  connotes  any  other  kind  of 
status  cannot  claim  to  be  Christian. 
Ministry  that  is  not  diaconic  is  by  def- 
inition not  ministry. 

Finally,  there  are  also  “varieties  of 
gifts”  {charismata).  The  working  of  God 
is  not  only  energetic  and  diaconic.  It 
also  is  charismatic.  Much  mischief  in 
the  church  of  late  has  been  perpetrated 
under  the  banner  of  this  term.  And  it 
has  been  encouraged  by  the  way  cha- 
risma has  been  translated.  Our  English 
term  “gift"  suggests  that  something  is 
given,  turned  over,  or  entrusted  by  one 
person  to  another.  That,  however,  is 
not  the  meaning  of  charisma.  Students 
of  Greek  will  recognize  that  the  word 
is  formed  by  adding  a mu-alpha  suffix 
to  the  term  charis,  the  word  for  “grace.” 
Grammatically,  mu-alpha  suffixes  are 
used  to  convey  the  idea  of  the  actual- 
ization of  something.  Here  it  is  used  to 
signify  the  actualization  of  grace.  That 
is  what  a charisma  is — an  actualization 
of  the  power  of  grace.  In  this  context 
it  means  that  God's  unmerited,  unde- 
served, unearned  love  is  actualized  in 
the  ministry  of  the  triune  God.  And  if 
we  are  to  use  these  three  terms  as  ad- 
jectives, then  they  are  properly  ascrib- 
able  to  God.  It  is  the  triune  God,  ac- 
cording to  Paul,  who  is  energetic, 
diaconic,  and  charismatic  in  ministry  to 
and  through  the  whole  church. 

Yes,  the  whole  church.  The  mem- 
bership becomes  the  medium  ol  God’s 


ministry.  “To  each  is  given  the  mani- 
festation of  the  Spirit  for  the  common 
good”  (12:7).  “All  these  are  worked  by 
one  and  the  same  Spirit,  who  distrib- 
utes to  each  one  individually  as  he  wills” 
(12:11).  Through  this  distribution  of  the 
Spirit’s  ministry,  every  member  be- 
comes a co-worker  with  God.  Every 
member  stands  in  the  service  of  God 
as  a servant  to  the  others  in  the  church. 
And  every  member  needs  the  ministry 
of  the  others.  For  this  distribution  of 
ministry  in  the  freedom  of  the  Spirit 
clearly  implies  that  the  Spirit  works 
everything  through  no  one  person  or 
group.  If  the  apostle’s  vision  of  ministry 
can  be  reduced  to  a slogan,  surely  it  is 
this:  “To  each  for  the  sake  of  all.” 

Ill 

This  raises,  of  course,  a crucial  ques- 
tion. Does  such  a theology  of  ministry 
eliminate  the  need  for  orders  and  of- 
fices of  ministry  ? Not  according  to  Paul. 
For  he  proceeds  in  this  passage  to  ground 
his  theology  of  ministry  in  his  theology 
of  the  church.  The  text  continues: 

For  just  as  the  body  is  one  and  has 
many  members,  and  all  the  members 
of  the  body,  though  many,  are  one 
body,  so  it  is  with  Christ.  For  by  one 
Spirit  we  were  all  baptized  into  one 
body — Jews  or  Greeks,  slaves  or 
tree — and  all  were  made  to  drink  of 
one  Spirit  (12:12-13). 

Paul’s  point  is  that  the  context  of  the 
ministry  of  God  is  the  church  as  the 
Body  of  Christ.  The  basis  ot  this  met- 
aphor is  the  reality  of  the  human  body, 
a reality  constituted  by  the  unity  of  its 
diverse  members.  Each  member  serves 
a different  function  in  the  body  and 
thereby  serves  the  body  as  a whole.  The 
coordination  of  these  diverse  functions 
Paul  attributes  to  the  genius  of  the  body's 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


5 


Creator.  “For  God  has  arranged  the 
organs  of  the  body,  each  one  of  them, 
as  he  chose”  (12:18). 

The  Greek  verb  translated  here  as 
“arranged”  is  tithemi,  and  it  is  not  ac- 
cidental that  it  appears  again  in  the 
summary  statement  of  this  chapter 
where  the  reality  of  the  human  body  is 
applied  analogically  to  the  reality  of  the 
church: 

Now  you  are  the  body  of  Christ  and 
individually  members  of  it.  And  God 
has  appointed  ( tithemi ) in  the  church 
first  apostles,  second  prophets,  third 
teachers,  then  workers  of  miracles, 
then  healers,  helpers,  administrators, 
speakers  in  various  kinds  of  tongues 
(12:27-28). 

In  other  words,  as  God  has  ordered  the 
organs  of  the  human  body  in  the  free- 
dom of  his  creative  activity  so  also  he 
has  ordered  the  ministry  of  the  church 
in  his  redemptive  activity. 

The  order  envisioned  here  gives  a 
certain  priority  to  the  work  of  apostles, 
prophets,  and  teachers.  The  use  of  or- 
dinals (first  . . . , second  . . . , third  . . .) 
make  that  clear.  The  other  ministries 
are  important  but  follow  in  no  partic- 
ular order  of  importance.  Why  this 
should  be  so  is  evident  from  the  com- 
mon task  of  apostles,  prophets,  and 
teachers.  They  all  share  in  the  ministry 
of  the  Word,  of  the  Gospel  that  creates 
the  church  and  continues  to  create  it. 
No  doubt  the  apostles,  prophets,  and 
teachers  enjoyed  a certain  status  in  the 
primitive  Christian  communities,  but 
the  emphasis  here  as  elsewhere  falls  upon 
their  function  (their  “ministry”)  rather 
than  upon  their  person.  Like  the  vital 
organs  of  the  human  body,  they  are  the 
vital  organs  of  the  Body  of  Christ.  But 
a vital  organ  has  no  status  apart  from 


its  function.  Its  service  to  the  body  is 
what  makes  it  vital. 

Now  this  embryonic  ministerial  or- 
der of  First  Corinthians  undergoes  de- 
velopment in  the  New  Testament  pe- 
riod. Ephesians  declares  that  “grace  was 
given  to  each  of  us  according  to  the 
measure  of  Christ’s  gift”  (4:7).  Specif- 
ically, however,  “his  gifts  were  that  some 
should  be  apostles,  some  prophets,  some 
evangelists,  some  pastors  and  teachers, 
to  equip  the  saints  for  the  work  of  min- 
istry, for  building  up  the  body  of  Christ” 
(4:11-12).  Here  the  initial  threefold  or- 
der of  apostles  and  prophets  and  teach- 
ers has  been  expanded  to  include  evan- 
gelists and  pastors.  Those  who  are 
convinced  of  the  deutero-Pauline  au- 
thorship of  Ephesians  would  go  fur- 
ther. Noting  that  the  author  speaks 
honorifically  of  “the  holy  apostles  and 
prophets”  (3:5),  they  argue  that  by  this 
time  the  apostles  and  prophets  are  ac- 
tually a memory  of  the  past.  The  func- 
tioning order  is  now  that  of  the  evan- 
gelists, pastors,  and  teachers.  However 
you  may  judge  that  opinion,  two  points 
are  indisputable.  Here  we  have  a de- 
velopment of  ministerial  orders,  and  here 
again  the  orders  arise  out  of  the  grace 
given  to  the  entire  community  of  faith 
and  serve  “to  equip  the  saints  for  the 
work  of  ministry.” 

A more  dramatic  change,  at  least  in 
terminology,  appears  in  the  Pastoral 
Epistles.  Tbe  author  of  the  two  Letters 
to  Timothy  and  the  one  to  Titus  speaks 
no  longer  of  the  apostles,  prophets, 
evangelists,  pastors,  and  teachers.  He 
speaks  rather  of  bishops,  elders,  and 
deacons.  Moreover,  these  functions  are 
now  clearly  offices  that  require  filling 
when  vacated.  We  are  looking  in 
through  the  Pastorals  at  that  transi- 
tional period  which  New  Testament 
scholars  refer  to  as  “early  Catholicism.” 


6 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


For  here  the  foundation  is  laid  for  that 
division  of  official  labor  in  the  church 
which  became  the  classical  model  in  the 
second  and  third  centuries.  Roman  Ca- 
tholicism built  its  orders  of  bishops, 
priests,  and  deacons  upon  this  foun- 
dation. And  it  was  this  development 
which  was  reinterpreted  in  the  six- 
teenth century  by  the  Reformed  Church 
in  terms  of  pastors,  elders,  and  deacons. 

Such  developments  should  neither 
surprise  nor  dismay  us.  For  it  is  the 
nature  of  bodies  to  develop.  Change  is 
the  order  of  life  in  the  body.  What  mat- 
ters is  not  the  continuation  of  certain 
descriptive  titles  of  offices,  but  the 
maintenance  of  those  functions  which 
are  vital  to  the  life  of  the  body.  Thus 
Moltmann  writes  of  “special  charges  as- 
signed by  the  community  and  directed 
toward  it,”  special  charges  that  “are 
necessary  and  of  essential  importance.” 
Without  order  of  precedence  or  value, 
he  lists  the  following: 

(i)  The  charge  to  proclaim  the  gos- 
pel; (ii)  the  charge  to  baptize  and 
celebrate  the  Lord’s  supper;  (iii)  the 
charge  to  lead  the  community’s  as- 
semblies; (iv)  the  charge  to  carry  out 
charitable  work. 

In  other  words,  “What  are  essential  for 
the  community  are:  \erygma,  kpinonia, 
and  diakpnia.  For  these  the  congrega- 
tion needs  preachers,  presbyters,  and 
deacons”  {The  Church  in  the  Power  of 
the  Holy  Spirit , p.  307). 

But  if  the  ministerial  orders  of  the 
church  are  variable,  both  historically  and 
situationally,  the  theology  of  ministry 
which  informs  those  orders  remains 
constant.  The  ministry  of  the  church, 
properly  speaking,  belongs  to  the  triune 
God  who  distributes  the  work  of  the 
Spirit  to  each  and  every  member  of  the 
Christian  community.  Where  God  or- 


ders certain  functions  of  that  ministry 
for  the  sake  of  the  Body  of  Christ,  the 
resultant  “special  charges”  represent  the 
ministry  of  the  whole  church  and  serve 
to  make  the  whole  church  effective  in 
ministry.  But  where  this  ordering  of 
ministry  results  in  a class  or  caste  sys- 
tem, where  it  divides  the  community 
into  “clergy”  and  “laity,”  where  it  sep- 
arates those  who  have  “a  part”  in  the 
ministry  from  those  who  have  no  part 
in  it,  there  the  theology  of  ministry  au- 
thorized by  the  New  Testament  is  for- 
saken. 

IV 

What  then  is  the  significance  of  or- 
dination within  such  a vision  of  the 
ministry?  The  answer  to  this  question, 
I think,  is  twofold.  On  the  one  hand, 
ordination  has  no  significance  with  re- 
gard to  prestige.  On  the  other  hand,  it 
has  great  significance  with  regard  to  the 
promise  of  God.  Let  me  explain. 

The  term  “ordination”  does  not  oc- 
cur in  the  New  Testament  with  any 
reference  to  our  understanding  of  it  as 
an  ecclesiastical  rite.  What  we  do  find 
in  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles  and  in  the 
Pastoral  Epistles  are  a few  references 
to  “the  laying  on  of  hands”  in  connec- 
tion with  the  undertaking  of  certain 
tasks  and  the  assuming  of  certain  of- 
fices. Two  of  the  relevant  verses  in  the 
Pastorals  do,  however,  provide  us  with 
a theological  connection  between  this 
rite  that  we  now  call  ordination  and 
the  theology  of  ministry  set  forth  by 
Paul  in  1 Corinthians.  One  is  1 Tim- 
othy 4:14. 

Do  not  neglect  the  gift  {charisma)  you 
have,  which  was  given  you  by  pro- 
phetic utterance  when  the  council  of 
elders  laid  their  hands  upon  you. 

The  other  is  2 Timothy  1:6-7. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


7 


Hence  I remind  you  to  rekindle  the 
gift  of  God  {charisma)  that  is  within 
you  through  the  laying  on  of  my 
hands;  for  God  did  not  give  us  a 
Spirit  of  timidity  but  a Spirit  of  power 
and  love  and  self-control. 

Here  the  Spirit’s  empowering  for  min- 
istry is  associated  with  the  ancient  Jew- 
ish practice  of  “the  laying  on  of  hands” 
as  an  act  of  authorization  for  ministry. 
The  question,  however,  is  whether  the 
rite  confers  the  charisma  or  rather  con- 
firms the  evident  work  of  the  Spirit. 

Calvin  appears  to  be  ambivalent  on 
this  point.  On  the  one  hand,  he  says: 

It  is  clear  that  when  the  apostles  ad- 
mitted any  man  to  the  ministry,  they 
used  no  other  ceremony  than  the  lay- 
ing on  of  hands.  I judge  that  this  rite 
derived  from  the  custom  of  the  He- 
brews, who,  as  it  were,  presented  to 
God  by  the  laying  on  of  hands  that 
which  they  wished  to  be  blessed  and 
consecrated.  . . . The  apostles,  ac- 
cordingly, signified  by  the  laying  on 
of  hands  that  they  were  offering  to 
God  him  whom  they  were  receiving 
into  the  ministry  (. Institutes , IV,  III, 
1 6). 

On  the  other  hand,  he  follows  this  by 
stating: 

However,  they  used  it  also  with  those 
upon  whom  they  conferred  the  vis- 
ible graces  of  the  Spirit  (Ibid.). 

What  Calvin  means  by  this  “confer- 
ring” of  “the  visible  graces  of  the  Spirit” 
comes  to  expression  in  a very  surprising 
passage  late  in  the  Institutes.  There  he 
designates  ordination  as  an  extraordi- 
nary sacrament.  Yes,  I said  a sacrament. 
Here  are  his  words: 

The  imposition  of  hands,  which  is 
used  at  the  introduction  of  the  true 


presbyters  and  ministers  of  the 
Church  into  their  office,  I have  no 
objection  to  consider  as  a sacrament; 
for,  in  the  first  place,  that  ceremony 
is  taken  from  the  Scripture,  and,  in 
the  next  place,  it  is  declared  by  Paul 
to  be  not  unnecessary  or  useless,  but 
a faithful  symbol  of  spiritual  grace. 
I have  not  enumerated  it  as  the  third 
among  the  sacraments,  because  it  is 
not  ordinary  or  common  to  all  be- 
lievers, but  a special  rite  for  a par- 
ticular office  (IV,  XIX,  28). 

Calvin’s  definition  of  a sacrament  should 
be  remembered  at  this  point:  a divine 
promise  of  spiritual  grace  confirmed  by 
a visible  sign.  Quite  evidently  he  views 
“the  laying  on  of  hands”  as  the  sign 
which  confirms  “the  grace  of  the  Holy 
Spirit”  that  God  promises  to  those  whom 
he  calls  to  ministry. 

To  the  extent  that  we  permit  Calvin 
to  influence  our  understanding  of  the 
Reformed  theological  tradition,  we  rec- 
ognize a very  high  view  of  ordination 
here.  But  what  exalts  this  view  is  the 
conviction  of  Calvin  that  ordination  is 
“a  faithful  symbol  of  spiritual  grace” 
for  the  work  of  ministry.  Its  purpose  is 
not  to  convey  the  ordained  person  a 
special  status  within  the  community  of 
faith  but  to  confirm  to  the  ordained 
person  a special  promise  of  the  Spirit’s 
power  for  the  ministry  to  which  he  or 
she  has  been  called. 

The  reason  why  even  such  a high 
view  of  ordination  confers  no  special 
status  upon  the  ordained  is  the  simple 
fact  that  our  only  status  as  Christians 
has  already  been  conferred  on  us  in 
baptism.  Jurgen  Moltmann  puts  it  this 
way: 

Even  ordination,  which  takes  place 
once  and  for  all  and  determines  the 
whole  of  life,  makes  no  difference 


8 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


here,  for  the  “call”  event  of  baptism 
is  already  once  and  for  all  and  de- 
termines the  whole  of  life.  Ordina- 
tion, with  its  conferring  of  a partic- 
ular charge,  cannot  enter  into 
competition  with  baptism  and  can- 
not outdo  it  (Ibid.,  p.  308). 

Another  way  of  saying  it  that  is  faith- 
ful to  the  Pauline  language  tradition  is 
that  our  lives  are  justified  by  grace 
through  faith.  Therein  lies  both  our 


identity  and  our  status.  “The  Spirit  bears 
witness  to  our  spirits  that  we  are  the 
children  of  God”  (Romans  8:16).  Be- 
cause our  identity  and  status  are  given 
to  us  through  our  believing,  we  do  not 
need  to  seek  either  through  our  min- 
istering. In  our  ministry  we  are  free  to 
serve  the  other.  For  this  ministry  be- 
longs to  God  who  is  at  work  in  the 
world  through  lives  that  are  open  to 
the  power  and  presence  of  the  Spirit. 


The  Rev.  Marvin  McMicfle,  a native  of 
Chicago,  has  received  degrees  from  Aurora 
College  and  Union  Theological  Seminary,  and 
is  currently  enrolled  in  a D.Min.  program.  He 
is  pastor  of  St.  Paul’s  Baptist  Church  in  Mont- 
clair, New  Jersey,  and  is  also  a Visiting  Pro- 
fessor of  Preaching  at  Princeton  Seminary.  He 
has  taught  New  Testament  and  Blac\  The- 
ology, and  preaches  frequently  in  area  semi- 
naries. This  sermon  was  given  at  the  Opening 
Communion  Service  for  the  1983-84  school 
year. 

Opening  Communion  Service,  September  19,  1983 

Text:  “ In  these  days  he  went  out  into  the  hills  to  pray;  and  all  night  he  continued 
in  prayer  to  God.  And  when  it  was  day,  he  called  his  disciples,  and  chose  from 
them  twelve,  whom  he  named  apostles;  Simon,  whom  he  named  Peter,  and 
Andrew  his  brother,  and  James  and  John,  and  Philip,  and  Bartholomew,  and 
Matthew,  and  Thomas,  and  James  the  son  of  Alphaeus,  and  Simon  who  was 
called  the  Zealot,  and  Judas  the  son  of  James,  and  Judas  Iscariot,  who  became 
a traitor."  (Luke  6:12-16) 

I want  to  suggest  to  you  today  that 
we  can  learn  much  about  the  will  of 
God  for  the  nature  and  composition  of 
the  church  in  this  country  and  around 
the  world  by  being  attentive  to  the  con- 
figuration of  personalities  among  the 
twelve  disciples  of  Jesus.  In  a good  many 
instances,  our  perceptions  about  those 
twelve  men  are  quite  limited  and  nar- 
row. Many  of  us  might  have  difficulty 
even  remembering  who  they  were.  We 
would  know  Peter,  James,  and  John. 

We  might  know  Judas  and  Thomas 
and  Andrew.  But  beyond  that  our 
knowledge  becomes  rather  vague. 

When  we  think  of  them,  we  think 
of  a group  of  fishermen  who  lived  in 
the  same  region,  shared  the  same  life- 
style, and  looked  out  upon  the  world 
from  the  same  perspective.  The  fact  is 
that  the  group  assembled  by  Jesus  was 
not  a homogeneous  unit  that  was  sim- 
ilar in  vocation  or  values  or  viewpoint. 

It  was  a group  with  wide  diversity.  And 
at  two  points,  that  diversity  was  literally 


scandalous  and  startling.  As  we  ex- 
amine that  diversity  among  the  earliest 
followers  of  Jesus,  we  are  challenged  to 
give  a new  shape  to  the  church  in  our 
day;  all  the  way  from  denominational 
programs  and  personnel  to  the  com- 
position of  our  local  congregations. 

The  first  disciple  I want  us  to  meet 
is  a man  named  Matthew.  His  nation- 
ality is  Jewish  and  his  vocation  is  tax 
collector.  Meet  a man  who  serves  as  an 
agent  for  the  Roman  Empire,  perform- 
ing a task  that  has  earned  him  the  hatred 
and  contempt  of  the  Jewish  people. 
Matthew  gathered  tax  money  from  the 
Jews  that  was  used  primarily  to  support 
the  Roman  army  that  was  occupying 
the  land  of  Palestine.  Other  Jews  looked 
upon  Matthew  as  a collaborator — one 
who  contributed  to  the  oppression  of 
his  own  people  at  the  hands  of  Rome. 

There  was,  of  course,  another  reason 
why  Matthew  and  men  like  him  were 
objects  of  scorn  among  the  people  of 
Israel.  Tax  collectors  worked  with  an 


And  He  Called  Them 
His  Disciples 

by  Marvin  McMickle 


10 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


extra-ordinary  incentive.  Each  tax  col- 
lector was  responsible  for  gathering  a 
certain  amount  of  revenues  from  each 
district.  Anything  he  was  able  to  gouge 
out  beyond  that  amount  was  his  to  keep. 
Therefore,  it  was  to  Matthew’s  personal 
benefit  to  be  as  ruthless  and  relentless 
as  possible  in  gathering  the  taxes.  So  in 
the  eyes  of  other  Jews,  Matthew  was 
not  simply  contributing  to  their  oppres- 
sion at  the  hands  of  Rome,  he  was  get- 
ting rich  in  the  process.  It  was  for  this 
reason  that  tax  collectors  like  Matthew 
were  a hated  and  despised  group. 

Yet,  Matthew  was  one  of  the  men 
that  Jesus  chose  to  be  one  of  his  dis- 
ciples. What  a scandalous  selection  that 
was.  The  average  Jew  would  have  no 
association,  public  or  private,  with  a tax 
collector.  For  the  average  Jew,  a tax 
collector  was  Persona  non  Grata  in  the 
synagogue,  in  the  home,  at  all  social 
gatherings.  For  the  average  Jew,  tax 
collectors  were  always  unwanted  and 
unwelcome.  And  yet,  Jesus  calls  a tax 
collector  to  be  one  of  his  disciples. 

This  raises  a serious  problem.  Once 
you  select  a man  that  everybody  hates, 
who  else  can  you  get  to  work  and  walk 
by  his  side?  What  self-respecting  Jew 
in  all  of  Palestine  would  follow  Jesus 
if  he  knew  it  meant  walking  along  with 
Matthew  the  tax  collector?  According 
to  Luke’s  Gospel,  Jesus  did  find  some- 
body who  would  work  along  with  Mat- 
thew: Simon  the  Zealot.  What  an  un- 
likely pair  of  co-workers  they  were: 
Matthew  the  tax  collector  and  Simon 
the  Zealot.  After  all,  a zealot  was  a 
fanatical,  left-wing,  revolutionary  who 
opposed  anyone  and  anything  having 
to  do  with  the  Roman  Empire,  and  I 
would  imagine  that  a tax  collector  would 
be  high  on  that  list.  Hundreds  of  Ro- 
man soldiers  had  been  killed  by  zealots, 
and  hundreds  of  zealots  had  been  cru- 


cified throughout  Palestine  as  a result 
of  their  attacks  upon  Roman  authority. 
And  now  Jesus  calls  his  disciples,  and 
among  them  are  Matthew  the  tax  col- 
lector and  Simon  the  Zealot.  And  the 
miracle  is  not  just  that  Jesus  called  them, 
but  that  they  came  together,  and  worked 
together,  and  stayed  together,  and  turned 
the  world  upside-down  together. 

Why  would  Jesus  settle  upon  this 
pattern  of  personalities  among  his  twelve 
disciples?  It  is  like  having  members  of 
the  Black  Liberation  Army  and  the 
Weather  Underground  become  co- 
workers with  Jerry  Falwell  and  the  John 
Birch  Society.  Jesus  surely  knew  how 
wide  the  socio-political  gap  was  be- 
tween Matthew  and  Simon,  but  he  asked 
them  to  bridge  that  gap,  to  come  to- 
gether despite  all  of  their  outward  dif- 
ferences, and  to  be  his  disciples.  I am 
sure  it  required  a lot  of  patience  and 
forgiveness  and  love  for  Matthew  and 
Simon  to  build  that  new  relationship. 
And  yet  they  did  it,  because  that  is  what 
Jesus  asked  them  to  do.  And  may  I now 
suggest  to  you  that  Jesus  is  asking  no 
less  from  you  and  me  today.  He  is  call- 
ing upon  his  church  to  set  aside  all  of 
the  man-made  and  self-imposed  socio- 
political divisions  among  us,  to  take  one 
another  by  the  hand,  and  make  every 
phase  of  the  church  today  just  as  di- 
verse in  its  composition  as  it  was  when 
Jesus  called  his  first  disciples,  among 
whom  were  Matthew  and  Simon. 

It  is  to  the  everlasting  shame  of  the 
Christian  community  that  we  stand  as 
one  of  the  most  segregated  and  ho- 
mogeneous institutions  in  society.  The 
phrase  from  Liston  Pope  remains  true 
after  all  of  these  years:  Eleven  o’clock 
on  Sunday  morning  is  the  most  seg- 
regated hour  of  the  week  in  this  coun- 
try. In  90%  of  the  cases,  at  least,  when 
Christians  gather  to  worship  and  pray 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


they  do  so  comfortably  and  conven- 
iently clustered  around  a homogeneous 
racial,  cultural,  or  economic  group.  In 
my  own  town  of  Montclair  we  have  40 
churches.  All  of  them  are  structured 
around  one  homogeneous  unit  that  rep- 
resents at  least  95%  of  the  congregation. 
The  only  exceptions  are  a handful  of 
blacks  who  have  left  black  churches  and 
joined  white  congregations  for  one  rea- 
son or  another.  In  my  years  in  that 
town,  it  has  never  occurred  in  reverse 
order,  with  a white  person  seeking  to 
join  a predominantly  black  congrega- 
tion. And  the  way  it  is  in  Montclair  is 
the  way  the  church  is  structured  all 
across  this  nation.  People  gathering  to 
serve  God  in  the  company  of  those  who 
look  like  them,  live  like  them,  think 
like  them.  But  is  that  the  will  of  him 
who  established  the  church  and  who 
called  his  disciples  and  chose  Matthew 
the  tax  collector  and  Simon  the  Zealot? 

I know  that  Peter  Wagner  and  Don- 
ald McGavran  are  saying  that  the  key 
to  church  growth  is  homogeneity:  ra- 
cial and  cultural  sameness.  I know  that 
they  say  that  people  like  to  come  to 
church  without  having  to  cross  over  too 
many  lines  of  social  divisions.  But  do 
you  hold  the  Church  Growth  Move- 
ment to  be  in  tune  with  the  will  of 
God?  Is  God  pleased  when  you  have  a 
large  black  congregation  here  and  a large 
white  congregation  there,  who  are  out 
of  touch  with  one  another?  Is  God 
pleased  when  some  congregations  are 
little  more  than  extensions  of  the  coun- 
try club  and  the  corporate  boardroom, 
while  others  are  composed  of  people 
who  meet  each  other  during  the  week 
in  the  unemployment  lines  and  welfare 
offices?  Is  God  pleased  when  we  offer 
our  endless  round  of  excuses  and  apol- 
ogies for  our  continuing  segregation  in 
the  life  of  the  church?  Of  course,  we 


11 

all  sing  with  much  energy:  “In  Christ 
there  is  no  east  or  west,  in  him  no  soutn 
or  north,  but  one  great  fellowship  of 
love  throughout  the  whole  wide  earth.” 
But  virtually  every  time  we  sing  that 
song,  we  are  standing  in  a sea  of  racial 
and  cultural  homogeneity.  What  a far 
cry  that  is  from  that  early  fellowship 
that  included  Matthew  the  tax  collector 
and  Simon  the  Zealot. 

If  only  Jesus  had  just  called  Peter, 
James,  John,  and  Andrew.  They  were 
all  from  the  same  town,  had  the  same 
job,  spoke  in  the  same  accent.  And  if 
Jesus  had  meant  for  the  church  to  be 
parcelled  out  along  homogeneous  lines, 
then  he  would  have  called  only  those 
who  had  much  in  common.  But  the 
church  was  never  meant  to  be  an  in- 
stitution shaped  along  the  lines  of 
“Walton’s  mountain”  where  everybody 
is  a carbon  copy  of  the  mind  and  ex- 
perience and  perspective  of  everybody 
else.  Jesus  declared  that  clearly  when 
he  picked  that  homogeneous  unit  of 
Peter,  James,  John,  Andrew,  and  added 
to  them  Matthew  the  tax  collector  and 
Simon  the  Zealot. 

What  is  it  that  1 am  asking  of  the 
Christian  church  in  America?  I am 
calling  for  the  full  and  final  integration 
of  the  church  in  every  phase  of  her  life 
and  work,  and  especially  at  the  level  of 
local  congregations.  I am  not  calling  for 
any  more  Brotherhood  Sundays  or  pul- 
pit exchanges  or  symposiums  on  the 
black  church.  Those  things  may  be  con- 
structive, but  they  are  not  conclusive. 
They  are  like  a temporary  cease-fire 
during  a prolonged  war.  For  a short 
period  of  time  the  shooting  stops,  but 
not  the  war.  After  a time,  the  hostilities 
resume,  the  fighting  continues,  and  the 
list  of  casualties  steadily  grows.  Instead, 

I am  calling  upon  the  church  to  join 
hands  across  all  of  our  man-made  social 


12 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


divisions  and  to  tear  down  the  remain- 
ing forms  of  institutional  racism  and 
economic  injustice  and  sexual  discrim- 
ination that  continue  to  frustrate  the 
will  of  God  for  his  creation  and  for  the 
church.  I am  asking  you  to  be  faithful 
to  Jesus  Christ.  The  will  of  God  was 
declared  by  Jesus  in  Luke’s  Gospel  in 
two  places.  In  Luke  4,  Jesus  was  lit- 
erally thrown  out  of  the  synagogue  in 
Nazareth,  not  because  he  claimed  to  be 
the  Messiah,  but  because  he  declared 
that  in  the  days  of  Elijah  and  Elisha 
God’s  love  did  not  remain  within  the 
borders  of  Israel,  but  in  the  days  of 
Elijah  and  Elisha  it  extended  to  a widow 
in  Phoenicia  and  a leper  in  Syria.  In 
Luke  18,  the  will  of  God  was  again 
made  known  when  Jesus  said  that  peo- 
ple would  enter  the  Kingdom  of  God 
from  the  north  and  the  south,  the  east 
and  the  west. 

Shouldn’t  the  church  be  as  bold  and 
courageous  as  the  larger  society  around 
us?  NASA  is  sending  black  men  into 
space.  General  Motors  put  a black  man 
in  charge  of  all  of  their  legal  affairs. 
Why,  even  the  Miss  America  Pageant 
has  discovered  that  “Black  is  Beauti- 
ful.” Meanwhile  we  Christians  con- 
demn segregation  in  South  Africa  from 
churches  that  are  just  as  segregated  as 
South  African  society,  in  fact,  if  not  by 
law. 

I know  how  hard  a task  this  now 
seems  to  appear.  Many  black  Christians 
are  not  anxious  about  serving  God  in 
an  integrated  congregation.  Their  at- 
titudes are  based  upon  history.  There 
would  have  been  no  black  church  at 
all,  if  white  Christians  had  not  turned 


away  our  ancestors  at  the  door  of  their 
churches.  And  over  the  years,  black 
churches  have  become  havens  of  rest, 
relief,  and  renewal  from  an  oppressive 
white  American  society.  Many  black 
Christians  see  the  church  not  as  a place 
to  work  with  white  people,  but  as  a 
place  to  escape  from  them.  I know  how 
hard  the  job  now  appears.  White  rac- 
ism has  not  abetted,  and  as  a result 
black  insecurity  about  their  place  in  so- 
ciety is  also  high. 

So  here  we  are  with  many  white 
churches  that  are  dangerously  close  to 
the  words  of  Harry  Emerson  Fosdick: 
“Rich  in  things  and  poor  in  soul.”  And 
with  most  black  churches  effectively 
isolated  from  the  life  and  work  of  the 
majority  of  Christians  in  this  country. 
What  shape  will  we  give  to  the  church 
in  this  generation?  Will  it  be  integra- 
tion at  every  level  of  the  life  of  the 
church  or  another  25-40  years  of  iso- 
lation? Will  we  be  informed  by  the  so- 
cio-political currents  of  this  society,  or 
by  the  bold  and  decisive  example  of 
Jesus  who  defied  socio-political  divi- 
sions and  distinctions  and  numbered 
among  his  disciples  Matthew  the  tax 
collector  and  Simon  the  Zealot? 

Let  me  close  with  this  paraphrase  of 
a line  from  William  Shakespeare:  “To 
be  the  faithful  church  of  Jesus  Christ 
or  not  to  be.  That  is  the  question. 
Whether  ’tis  nobler  in  the  mind  to  suf- 
fer the  slings  and  arrows  of  outrageous 
fortune,  or  to  take  arms  against  a sea 
of  troubles,  and  by  opposing  end  them?  " 
It  is  this  question  that  confronts  the 
church  in  the  days  to  come. 


Education,  the  Gospel, 
and  the  Marginal 

by  Craig  Dykstra 


I would  like  to  organize  this  essay 
around  two  texts.  The  first  comes  from 
Cam  Wyckoff  s book,  The  Gospel 
and  Christian  Education  (Philadelphia: 
Westminster  Press,  1959),  where  he  says 
that  “the  aim  of  education  is  that  we 
may  become  persons  who  see  things  as 
they  are  and  who  come  to  grips  with 
life”  (p.  54).  The  second  is  a quotation 
of  Rabbi  Hanokh  that  is  used  by  Dor- 
othee  Soelle  in  her  book,  Choosing  Life 
(Philadelphia:  Fortress  Press,  1981).  The 
quotation  is:  “The  real  exile  of  Israel 
in  Egypt  was  that  they  had  learned  to 
endure  it”  (p.  1).  Soelle  amplifies  this 
by  saying  that  “the  real  exile  of  Chris- 
tians in  the  First  World  is  that  we  have 
learned  to  put  up  with  . . . exile”  (p.  1). 

In  Choosing  Life,  Soelle  provides  what 
seems  to  me  to  be  a very  illuminating 
(and  frightening)  cultural  analysis  of  our 
condition  as  Christians  in  an  affluent 
society: 

We  do  not  look  on  our  life  in  the 
affluent  society  as  if  we  were  in  Egypt. 
On  the  contrary,  we  have  adapted 
ourselves  to  it  to  such  an  extent  that 
in  the  very  midst  of  Egypt  ...  we 
feel  quite  at  home.  We  Christians  in 


The  following  two  articles  were  delivered 
as  part  of  a colloquium  to  honor  Professor 
D.  Campbell  Wyckoff  in  May  1983.  Dr. 
Wyc\off  retired  as  Thomas  W.  Synnott  Pro- 
fessor of  Christian  Education  on  August  31, 
198^. 

A native  of  Grosse  Point,  Michigan,  Dr. 
Craig  Dykstra  is  currently  Associate  Professor 
of  Christian  Education  at  Louisville  Theo- 
logical Seminary.  He  completed  his  under- 
graduate work  at  the  University  of  Michigan 
and  received  the  M.Div.  and  Ph.D.  from 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary.  His  books 
include  Vision  and  Character  (Paulist  Press, 
1981).  In  1984,  Dr.  Dykstra  will  join  the 
faculty  of  Princeton  Seminary  as  Thomas  W. 
Synnott  Professor  of  Christian  Education. 

the  First  World  have  adapted  our- 
selves to  the  Egyptian  way  of  life, 
and  we  have  taken  over  the  Egyp- 
tians’ fundamental  outlook — the  as- 
sumption, for  example,  that  individ- 
ualism is  the  highest  stage  of  human 
development;  or  the  assumption  that 
history  is  a senseless  seesaw;  some- 
times one  group  is  up;  sometimes — 
after  a revolution,  perhaps — it’s  an- 
other. We  have  learnt  very  success- 
fully to  endure  our  exile — so  suc- 
cessfully that  as  Christians  we  no 
longer  see  ourselves  as  being  in  exile 
at  all,  or  as  strangers  in  a foreign 
country.  In  fact  we  are  more  con- 
cerned to  Egyptianize  the  whole 
world.  . . . The  Egyptian  way  of  life 
seems  to  us  the  natural  one.  We  don’t 
remember  that  once  upon  a time  there 
were  people  who  preferred  the  des- 
ert to  our  cities,  and  conflict  to  our 
peace;  that  they  chose  hunger  instead 
of  the  meat  we  eat — meat  produced 
from  the  corn  which  the  hungry  lack. 

In  the  First  World  we  have  learnt 
to  put  up  with  exile,  and  that  means 
that  we  have  even  forgotten  the  thirst 
for  justice  and  righteousness.  We  have 
become  one  with  the  objective  cyn- 


«4 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


icism  of  the  prevailing  culture  (pp. 
1-2). 

Soelle  goes  on  to  describe  the  “Egyp- 
tian" lifestyle  as  one  which  is  centered 
in  what  she  calls  “hedonistic  fascism" 
or  "consumismo.  This  means  that 
meaning  in  life  is  essentially  derived 
from  our  consumption  of  goods — goods 
which  we  do  not  need  in  any  primary 
sense,  but  which  we  are  brought  to  need 
only  secondarily  by  a technological  so- 
ciety whose  ultimate  goal  is  simply  to 
keep  the  cycle  of  production  and  con- 
sumption moving  at  whatever  cost  for 
the  sake  of  profit.  Such  a culture  man- 
ifests itself  in  the  routinization  and 
trivialization  of  work,  competition, 
estrangement  from  one  another, 
achievement  compulsion,  militarism, 
pleasure  and  enjoyment  only  through 
having,  exploitation  of  the  nature  world, 
and  finally  mistrust  of  self  and  other 
and  fear  of  life.  Our  fear  of  life  can  be 
seen  most  clearly  in  our  desperate  de- 
sire to  escape  suffering — which,  of 
course,  cannot  really  be  done  if  we  are 
really  to  be  alive. 

To  avoid  suffering  has  advanced  to 
the  position  of  a major  strategy  in 
the  consumer  culture,  whether  phys- 
ically by  means  of  diversion,  or  po- 
litically through  blindness.  We  have 
developed  techniques  of  all  kinds  in 
order  to  avoid  suffering,  but  what 
we  are  really  avoiding  is  life  itself. 

. . . Apathetic  freedom  from  suffer- 
ing, from  privation,  from  pain,  and 
from  involvement  has  advanced  to 
the  position  of  highest  value. . . . Pre- 
venting, avoiding,  pushing  away, 
getting  out  of  the  way  are  becoming 
the  essential  activities  of  life  (pp.  16- 

*7)- 

This,  for  Soelle,  is  what  life  in  exile 
involves.  And  the  tragedy  is  that  for 


the  most  part,  we  do  not  know  it.  We 
have  become  so  accustomed  to  it  that 
we  think  this  is  the  only  possibility. 
Nonetheless,  we  do  not  find  this  form 
of  existence  fulfilling.  We  feel  it  as  a 
kind  of  living  death.  But  not  really  be- 
lieving that  there  is  any  other  way,  we 
have  surrendered  to  cynicism.  In  exile, 
we  are  all  cynics. 

There  is,  in  fact,  another  way,  how- 
ever. There  is,  in  fact,  life.  And  the  life 
of  faith  is  most  fundamentally  choosing 
life:  “ ‘Choose  life’  presupposes  that  ‘life’ 
in  this  emphatic  and  absolute  sense  really 
exists,  and  that  we  can  choose  it  and 
lay  hold  of  it,  or  can  throw  it  away  or 
miss  it  completely.”  “Choosing  life  in 
the  face  of  death  means  chiming  in  with 
the  great  ‘Yes’  to  life.”  It  is  “a  ‘Yes’ 
without  any  conditions.  It  applies  in 
sickness  and  dying  as  well.  It  applies 
above  all  to  the  people  who  have  felt 
themselves  to  be  denied  and  without 
dignity  for  so  long  that  they  have 
come  to  terms  with  the  situation.  . . . 
[Cjhoosing  life  is  the  very  capacity  for 
not  putting  up  with  the  matter-of-course 
destruction  of  life  surrounding  us,  and 
the  matter-of-course  cynicism  that  is  our 
constant  companion.”  “Choosing  life  is 
what  the  Christian  tradition  calls  ‘faith'  ” 

(p.  7)- 

Now  w'hat  does  this  have  to  do  with 
Wyckoff  s definition  of  the  aim  of  ed- 
ucation and  his  theory  of  Christian  ed- 
ucation as  he  lays  it  out  in  The  Gospel 
and  Christian  Education ? Without 
wanting  to  impute  to  Wyckoff  Soelle’s 
rather  despairing  analysis  of  contem- 
porary first  world  culture,  I do  want  to 
maintain  that  Wyckoff s theory  of 
Christian  education  has  significant 
compatibility  with  Soelle’s  understand- 
ing of  the  place  and  function  of  Chris- 
tian faith  in  relation  to  our  culture. 

Recall  that  Wyckoff s book  begins 
with  a rather  extensive  analysis  of  “the 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


!5 


process  and  condition  of  culture.”  His 
analysis  of  the  present  culture  con- 
cludes that  ours  is  a pluralistic,  dy- 
namic, complex,  secular,  and  scientific 
culture. 

It  is  pluralistic  in  that  there  are  no 
generally  agreed  on  foundations  and 
values  undergirding  it.  It  is  dynamic, 
however,  since  it  is  in  search  of  such 
foundations  and  values.  Because  this 
search  for  unity  of  spirit  is  far  from 
consummation,  the  fabric  of  society 
is  held  together  by  a highly  complex 
organizational  structure,  a sort  of 
culture-substitute  which  perhaps 
should  be  recognized  realistically  as 
all  the  common  culture  we  have.  The 
very  fact  of  this  complex  organiza- 
tional structure  as  the  symbol  of  our 
culture  makes  it  clear  why  as  far  as 
we  have  a prevailing  authority  it  is 
secular,  and  why  as  far  as  we  have 
a prevailing  hope  it  lies  in  science 
(p.  27). 

Wyckoff  describes  both  the  positive  and 
negative  sides  of  this  cultural  situation, 
but  he  does  not  miss  our  alienation  from 
nature,  the  fragmentation  of  the  world 
community,  “the  manipulation  of  small 
nations  by  the  larger  powers,  cynicism 
in  human  relations,  and  an  assumption 
that  the  good  life  can  be  organized  into 
existence”  (p.  22).  All  in  all,  his  reading 
of  at  least  the  negative  side  of  our  cul- 
ture is  very  much  akin  to  that  of  Soelle. 
He  does  not  see  it  as  “a  situation  to  be 
bewailed,”  as  Soelle  clearly  does,  but 
one  “to  be  seen  for  what  it  is,  and  dealt 
with  for  what  it  is”  (p.  27).  Nonetheless, 
it  is  a culture  basically  alienated  from 
the  gospel  (p.  45),  and  one  “that  is  in 
many  ways  hostile  to”  the  Christian  life 
(p.  46). 

For  Wyckoff,  the  aim  of  all  educa- 
tion is  that  we  may  become  persons 
who  see  things  as  they  are  and  who 


come  to  grips  with  life.  And  what  he 
calls  technical,  liberal,  and  moral  and 
religious  education  are  all  necessary  for 
this.  But  really  seeing  things  as  they  are 
and  coming  to  grips  with  life  (can  we 
understand  this  now  in  what  Soelle  calls 
the  “emphatic  and  absolute  sense”?)  are, 
for  Wyckoff,  terribly  difficult  and  ul- 
timately impossible  outside  of  Christian 
faith.  He  asks,  rhetorically,  “is  this  pos- 
sible except  from  a fully  Christian  per- 
spective?” (p.  54).  His  answer  is  clearly, 
“No!” 

Seeing  things  as  they  are  implies 
realism — realism  in  viewing  history 
and  its  meaning,  realism  in  viewing 
the  contemporary  scene,  realism  in 
self-understanding.  (These  are  so  easy 
to  say,  yet  so  unbearable  to  the  hu- 
man spirit  in  many  of  their  impli- 
cations.) The  realism  of  seeing  things 
as  they  are  means  the  recognition  of 
God’s  sovereignty  and  judgment;  the 
recognition  of  man’s  freedom,  sin, 
responsibility,  and  need;  the  recog- 
nition of  the  significance  of  revela- 
tion and  redemption;  the  recognition 
of  and  the  incontrovertibihty  of  hope. 
Seeing  things  as  they  are  leads  to 
clarity  of  idea  and  attitude,  and  to 
the  clear  motivation  of  completely 
realistic  intention. 

Coming  to  grips  with  life  implies 
man’s  action  within  the  context  of 
things  as  they  are,  within  the  context 
of  his  culture.  It  means  the  acquisi- 
tion of  the  personal  and  social  skills 
needed  for  full  and  responsible  par- 
ticipation in  the  work  of  the  church 
and  the  world  at  every  level.  . . . 

Education  with  such  aims  inevi- 
tably implies  a fully  Christian  per- 
spective. To  avoid  a Christian  per- 
spective leads  on  the  one  hand  to  the 
substitution  of  secular  religious  val- 
ues, whose  fate  is  to  stand  outside 


i6 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


the  door  of  Biblical  faith  yearning 
for  what  lies  within  but  unwilling  to 
enter.  Or  it  leads,  on  the  other  hand, 
to  limitation  of  aim  and  even  to  bit- 
terness and  cynicism  (pp.  54-55). 

The  fundamental  question,  then,  for 
Christian  education  for  Wyckoff  is  the 
question  of  how  it  is  we  are  to  come 
to  see  what  is  going  on  in  us  and  around 
us  realistically  given  a culture  which  in 
many  ways  blinds  or  distorts  our  vision, 
and  of  how  we  can  come  to  grips  with 
life.  Put  in  Soelle’s  terms  this  is  the 
question  of  how  we  can  come  to  rec- 
ognize when  we  are  in  exile  and  have 
become  so  adapted  to  it  we  do  not  know 
that  we  are,  and  of  how  we  can  choose 
life  instead  of  death.  For  neither  Wyck- 
off nor  Soelle  is  there  an  option  of  es- 
caping culture.  For  both,  the  question 
concerns  “the  redeemed  life — the  life 
transformed  by  . . . God”  (Wyckoff,  p. 

53)- 

If  this  is  the  task,  its  enormity  and 
difficulty  become  immediately  appar- 
ent. Wyckoff  lays  his  finger  on  one  part 
of  the  problem  when  he  says  that 
“Christian  education  reflects  the  nature 
of  the  culture  as  it  has  affected  both 
the  church  and  education”  (p.  42).  The 
church  “is  a social  institution,  and  . . . 
as  such  it  always  tends  to  mirror  its 
culture”  (p.  43).  Our  problem  is  that 
our  theologies  tend  to  be  theologies  of 
what  Walter  Brueggemann  calls  “royal 
rationality” — a rationality  based  in  the 
presumptive  life-world,  vested  inter- 
ests, social  structure,  and  authority  hi- 
erarchy of  the  dominant  culture  (cf.  The 
Creative  Word  [Philadelphia:  Fortress 
Press,  1982],  ch.  3).  And  our  problem 
is  also  that  our  educational  processes 
tend  to  be  processes  that  are  themselves 
consumeristic,  technological,  competi- 
tive, and  specialistic  (cf.  Wyckoff,  p. 


42).  In  other  words,  both  in  what  we 
believe  and  in  the  way  we  communicate 
it,  we  are  in  danger  in  the  church  and 
in  its  educational  ministry  of  simply 
saying  what  the  culture  says  in  the  same 
way  in  which  the  culture  says  it.  And, 
as  Wyckoff  warns,  “Any  education,  re- 
ligion, or  religious  education  that  the 
culture  devises  and  uses  in  this  situation 
is  not  only  a party  to  that  sin,  but  suc- 
ceeds in  compounding  it”  (p.  49). 

Wyckoff  s answer  to  this  difficulty  is 
to  argue  that,  even  so,  the  church  is  still 
the  church  and  it  has  a gospel  to  pro- 
claim. The  church,  he  says,  “is  the  body 
of  Christ,  and  as  such  tends  to  resist 
cultural  inroads  and  to  work  for  the 
redemption  of  culture”  (p.  47).  The  gos- 
pel, defined  as  “God’s  redeeming  ac- 
tivity in  Jesus  Christ”  (p.  98),  is  the 
“heart  and  point  of  God’s  Word” — a 
message  given  to  us  for  us  to  proclaim, 
our  clue  to  the  meaning  of  history  and 
of  existence,  and  the  reason  for  and 
power  of  the  church’s  existence  (see  pp. 
98-108).  The  work  of  the  teaching  min- 
istry of  the  church  is  to  deliver  the  gos- 
pel message,  help  people  prepare  for 
response  to  it,  show  them  how  to  re- 
spond, and  help  them  to  see  and  work 
out  the  fullness  of  its  implications  (see 
p.  108).  So  long  as  the  church  carries 
out  this  ministry,  we  can  trust  that  we 
will  not  be  entirely  overcome  by  the 
culture  and  that  the  way  to  redeemed 
life  will  remain  open. 

I believe  that  all  of  this  is  true,  but 
I am  not  sure  that  it  goes  far  enough. 
The  gospel,  as  Wyckoff  makes  plain,  is 
good  news.  But  what  happens  to  it  in 
a church  where  it  is  no  longer  really 
news ? What  happens  when  the  story 
and  the  message  have  been  told  so  often 
and  have  become  so  domesticated  that 
the  gospel  can  no  longer  be  heard  as 
gospel , as  something  new  at  all?  Fred 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


7 


Craddock  points  to  this  problem  in  his 
book,  Overhearing  the  Gospel  (Nash- 
ville: Abingdon  Press,  1978),  where  he 
discusses  at  great  length  Kierkegaard’s 
dictum:  “There  is  no  lack  of  infor- 
mation in  a Christian  land;  something 
else  is  lacking.”  It  is  true,  of  course, 
that  it  is  impossible  to  say  that  ours  is 
a Christian  land  in  any  deep  sense.  But 
it  is  also  true  that  much  of  the  Christian 
message  has,  at  least  on  its  surface,  been 
proclaimed,  told,  taught,  preached.  Why 
then  is  our  culture  still  so  blind — and 
more,  the  church  still  so  captive? 

Almost  everyone  in  the  church  knows 
the  story  of  Abraham  and  Sarah  and 
the  journey  of  the  household.  In  the 
fall  quarter  of  1982-83,  a unit  on  Abra- 
ham and  Sarah  appears  in  the  curric- 
ulum material  for  young  children  that 
is  sponsored  by  the  Presbyterian  churches 
and  other  denominations.  The  key  verses 
are  Genesis  11:29-12:2.  The  children 
are  told  the  story  of  Abraham’s  and 
Sarah’s  journey.  The  session  is  devel- 
oped by  asking  the  children  how  they 
feel  when  they  are  moving  (family  trips, 
moving  to  a new  house,  etc.),  and  then 
about  how  they  think  Abraham  and 
Sarah  might  have  felt.  Finally,  the  chil- 
dren take  a simulated  trip  through  the 
church — a “long”  journey — until  they 
reach  their  destination,  set  up  a tent, 
talk  over  the  journey,  sing  a song  they 
have  learned,  and  thank  God  for  caring 
for  them. 

What  is  going  on  here?  It  seems  quite 
innocent.  Abraham  and  Sarah  moved. 
What  better  way  to  help  the  children 
understand  this  story  than  by  getting 
them  to  recall  their  own  experiences  of 
moving  and  by  simulating  a trip?  But 
there  is  a problem.  The  problem  is  that 
this  story  becomes  a story  about  mov- 
ing. I move,  you  move,  we  all  move — 
even  Abraham  and  Sarah.  It  is  a com- 


mon human  experience.  And  the  gospel 
in  it  is  that  we  can  depend  upon  God 
to  grant  us  safe  journey  in  whatever 
kind  of  move  we  make.  God  loves  us 
and  cares  for  us — so  if  you  have  to  move, 
do  not  be  afraid. 

Unfortunately,  the  biblical  story  is 
not  about  this  at  all.  Abraham  and  Sarah 
are  not  just  anybody  moving.  They  are 
immigrants  called  to  a frightening 
journey,  not  only  physically  but  cul- 
turally. They  are,  from  the  point  of 
view  of  the  Yahwist  writer,  writing  in 
Jerusalem  to  a people  who  have  suc- 
cumbed to  urban,  royal  culture,  the 
progenitors  of  Israelite  faith  who  dare 
to  walk  right  straight  out  into  the  wil- 
derness',  right  straight  out  of  their  own 
settled  life,  on  the  basis  of  a call  and  a 
promise  from  God.  What  has  happened 
in  this  lesson  is  that  a gospel  which  calls 
us  to  risk  the  desert  rather  than  suc- 
cumb to  cultural  death  has  been  do- 
mesticated into  a “gospel”  of  trust  in  a 
God  who  will  care  for  us  wherever  we 
move.  It  speaks  to  little  children  who 
are  moved  around  from  one  place  to 
another  year  after  year  because  their 
parents  are  transferred  by  corporations 
that  care  not  one  wit  for  family  roots 
and  the  building  up  of  personal  and 
social  networks  so  that  communal  life 
can  be  sustained  and  nourished.  It  tells 
them  that  all  this  is  all  right,  when  in 
fact  it  may  not  be;  that  God  will  com- 
fort them,  and  that  the  turmoil  they 
feel  each  time  they  have  to  leave  their 
best  friends  and  home  should  be  suf- 
fered quietly  and  forgotten  when  in  fact 
God’s  word  may  be  a word  of  protest 
against  this  whole  pattern  of  life. 

My  point  in  all  of  this  is  that  it  is 
very  hard  to  proclaim  the  gospel  in  a 
cultural  situation  which  turns  that  gos- 
pel toward  a justification  of  its  own 
ways.  When  we  tell  the  story,  we  too 


8 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


often  tell  a different  story  using  the 
narratives  of  the  Bible  to  do  so.  And 
we  see  so  little  of  this  when  we  do  it. 
It  seems  to  me  that  if  the  gospel  is  to 
be  proclaimed  and  heard,  it  will  depend 
not  only  on  what  is  proclaimed,  and  on 
how  it  is  proclaimed,  but  also  upon  the 
context  in  which  it  is  proclaimed.  And 
that  context,  I want  to  argue,  cannot 
be  the  context  of  the  predominant  cul- 
ture. It  will  have  to  be  at  the  margins 
of  that  culture. 

Brueggemann  provides  us  some  as- 
sistance here  in  his  discussion  of  the 
prophetic  dimension  of  the  church’s  ed- 
ucational task: 

The  prophet  speaks  God’s  alterna- 
tive word,  which  stands  free  from 
and  over  against  the  dominant  com- 
munity. That  free  word,  however,  is 
better  understood  as  reflective  of  a 
community  not  fully  contained  by 
the  royal  rationality.  There  is  a sur- 
prising affinity  between  the  word  of 
Yahweh  and  the  community  of  the 
marginal  ones  in  which  the  prophet 
lives  and  from  which  he/she  speaks. 

This  is  a most  important  resource 
for  education.  Though  it  may  be  ed- 
ucationally difficult,  an  important 
implication  is  that  the  texts  we  re- 
gard as  authoritative  and  canonical 
are  in  fact  marginal  in  their  origins 
and  claims.  Education  may  require 
reexperiencing  that  kind  of  margin- 
ality  both  in  terms  of  social  power 
and  in  terms  of  rationality  (p.  50). 

What  does  this  suggest  for  Christian 
education?  It  suggests  that  the  gospel 
is  most  likely  to  be  proclaimed  and  ap- 
propriated in  those  contexts  in  which 
the  enculturation  processes  have  bro- 
ken down.  It  suggests  that  Christian 
education  which  enables  us  to  see  things 
as  they  are  and  come  to  grips  with  life 


must  lead  people  to  and  raise  their  con- 
sciousness of  the  culturally  marginal  in 
social  and  personal  life  in  order  for  the 
gospel  proclamation  to  have  its  re- 
demptive power. 

There  is  such  a thing  as  unsuccessful 
enculturation.  This  happens  in  the  cases 
of  “social  outcasts.”  One  may  be  a social 
outcast  for  biological  reasons.  One  may 
be,  for  example,  physically  “deformed” 
or  mentally  “retarded.”  Or  one  may  be 
outcast  because  one  has  broken  signif- 
icant social  norms.  In  all  cases,  the  so- 
ciety will  label  such  persons — give  them 
a marginal  place  in  the  social  structure 
and  a self-conception  against  which  there 
is  virtually  no  subjective  defense.  He 
or  she  is  what  he  or  she  is  supposed  to 
be,  to  him-  or  herself,  to  significant 
others,  and  to  the  community  as  a whole. 
To  be  sure,  one  may  react  to  this  fate 
with  rage  or  resentment,  but  it  is  as  an 
inferior  and  marginal  being  that  one 
resents  and  rages. 

But  suppose  that  such  outcasts  begin 
to  congregate  in  enduring  groups.  And 
suppose  a new  counter-reality  is  offered 
to  them  which  they  begin  mutually  to 
affirm.  In  this  case,  counter-definitions 
of  reality  and  self-identification  now 
begin  to  arise,  and  persons  in  that  group 
may  come  to  discover  “hidden  depths” 
within  themselves  that  they  never  re- 
alized before.  Who  am  I?  Society  says 
that  I am  a “nigger,”  an  “idiot,”  a “crip- 
ple,” a “drunk” — but  that  is  essentially 
wrong.  No,  what  I really  am  is  a child 
of  God,  a disciple.  When  this  happens 
a cleavage  appears  between  “appear- 
ance and  reality”  in  the  individual’s  and 
in  the  group’s  self-apprehension.  She  is 
no  longer  what  she  is  supposed  to  be. 
She  looks  like  and  acts  like  a “cripple,” 
but  really  she  is  a child  of  the  covenant. 
When  this  claim  begins  to  be  made 
known  in  the  larger  social  structure, 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


!9 


disequilibrium  begins  to  take  place  and 
the  set  of  cultural  definitions  begins  to 
be  upset.  In  the  end,  such  cultural  def- 
initions become  permanently  unstable 
for  it  is  no  longer  possible  to  “nail  down” 
everybody’s  place  and  identity — even 
one’s  own.  After  all,  if  it  is  possible  for 
“cripples”  to  refuse  to  be  what  they  are 
supposed  to  be,  it  is  possible  for  anyone 
to  make  that  refusal. 

In  this  light,  it  is  extremely  impor- 
tant to  underscore  Brueggemann’s  point 
that  our  canonical  texts  emerged  from 
situations  like  this.  Christianity  began 
as  a religion  of  the  socially  marginal 
and  of  those  who  were  not  so  marginal 
but  who  were  for  some  reason  willing 
to  make  common  cause  with  the  mar- 
ginal. Now,  of  course,  it  is  possible  to 
re-enculturate  all  the  new  language  so 
that  “Christian”  comes  to  mean  a mem- 
ber of  the  church,  understood  primarily 
as  a social  organization,  “disciple”  be- 
comes one  who  performs  certain  roles 
in  certain  institutions,  and  in-groups  and 
out-groups  form  all  over  again.  What 
I am  arguing,  however,  is  that  the  place 
where  really  new  seeing  may  very  well 
take  place  is  in  the  “cracks”  of  the  en- 
culturation  process — ever  transform- 
ing it,  ever  renewing  it,  ever  upsetting 
it — and  not  so  much  in  it  or  as  a result 
of  it. 

Furthermore,  one  does  not  have  to 
be  a member  of  a socially  outcast  group 
in  order  to  have  this  kind  of  experience. 
There  are  always  elements  of  our  per- 
sonal, subjective  lives  which  have  not 
been  socialized,  or  which  have  been  re- 
pressed or  controlled  for  the  purposes 
of  maintaining  ourselves  in  the  cultural 
system,  but  which  keep  returning  to  us 
and  haunting  us  nonetheless.  Subjec- 
tive life  is  not  completely  enculturated. 
Every  person  can  and  does  often  ap- 
prehend himself  or  herself  as  being  both 


inside  and  outside  the  culture.  This 
means  that  even  when  the  world  of 
everyday  life  retains  its  massive  and 
taken-for-granted  reality,  it  is  threat- 
ened by  the  marginal  situations  of  or- 
dinary human  experience  that  cannot 
be  completely  handled  culturally.  One 
of  the  most  crucial  such  marginal  ex- 
periences, one  which  can  never  be  com- 
pletely socialized  because  we  must  ul- 
timately face  it  alone,  is  our  own  death. 
But  there  are  others:  intense  suffering, 
physical  isolation,  and  even  such  strange 
experiences  as  the  shock  of  non-rec- 
ognition of  one’s  own  face  in  front  of 
the  mirror,  the  unsettling  suspicion  that 
one’s  spouse  and  children  are  myste- 
rious strangers,  or  the  dreams  and  fan- 
tasies we  dare  not  reveal  to  anyone. 

There  are  two  ways  of  handling  such 
situations.  One  is  to  return  as  quickly 
as  possible  to  the  everyday  social  reality 
of  firm  and  culturally  approved  roles 
and  identities.  But  the  other  is  to  stay 
in  and  with  such  experiences  long 
enough  to  allow  the  question  to  arise 
as  to  whether  there  is  some  other  way 
of  experiencing  and  seeing  reality  than 
the  one  our  present  culture  gives  us. 

The  gospel  becomes  “news,”  I think, 
at  points  of  marginality.  For  those  of 
us  who  live  in  the  “royal  household” 
as  effective,  respected,  accepted  mem- 
bers in  the  dominant  culture,  that  mar- 
ginality may  first  be  experienced  only 
at  the  point  of  our  internal  “strange- 
ness” to  ourselves.  But  if  this  inner 
“strangeness”  is  met  by  the  gospel,  it 
has  the  potential  of  opening  one  to  the 
estranged  other — the  stranger,  the  one 
who  is  marginal  to  my  own  culture  or 
the  one  who  lives  in  another  culture 
altogether. 

In  the  case  of  the  Bible  study  de- 
scribed above,  it  may  be  that  children’s 
powerless  but  natural  protests  against 


20 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


being  uprooted  time  and  again  for  the 
sake  of  economic  mobility  provide  clues 
to  more  fundamental  meanings  of  the 
wilderness  journeys  than  our  own  rather 
optimistic  interpretations.  Farley  ar- 
gues that  one  of  the  characteristics  of 
redemptive  existence  is  “the  trans- 
formed status  of  the  stranger.”  Here 
the  stranger  is  seen  for  what  he  or  she 
is:  not  primarily  as  threat,  but  as  “fel- 
low-sufferer and  potential  participant 
in  redemptive  existence”  ( Ecclesial  Man 
[Philadelphia:  Fortress  Press,  1975],  p. 
170).  When  the  stranger  is  thus  under- 
stood, it  becomes  clear  that  “no  type  of 
human  being  is  excludable,  no  race, 
lifestyle,  age  group  is  excluded”  (p.  171). 
Indeed,  it  may  easily  be  that  precisely 
the  stranger,  the  one  who  comes  from 
the  margins  of  my  dominant  culture, 
is  the  one  who  can  most  help  me  to  see 
the  meaning  of  the  gospel.  As  Fred- 
erick Herzog  tells  us,  “It  was  the  poor 
with  the  Bible  in  their  hands  who  taught 
us  liberation  theology  in  the  South” 
(Justice  Church  [Maryknoll,  NY:  Orbis 
Books,  1980],  p.  3). 

When  one  makes  actual  contact  with 
the  “stranger,”  the  culturally  marginal 
other,  and  begins  to  learn  from  him  or 
her,  then  something  else  may  begin  to 
happen.  Because  of  one’s  identification 
with  the  stranger,  one  actually  becomes 
in  some  senses  culturally  marginal.  One 
begins,  in  at  least  some  small  degree, 
to  suffer  with  the  stranger  the  suffer- 
ings which  social  marginality  brings. 
One  begins  oneself  to  feel  the  power  of 
the  dominating  culture  as  alien  through 
this  suffering.  As  a result — and  again 
through  the  power  of  the  gospel — one 
may  begin  to  resist  the  authority,  vision, 
images,  language,  and  power  of  the 
dominant  culture.  And  in  this  activity 
of  resistance,  the  clarity  and  life-giving 


power  of  the  gospel  becomes  most  ap- 
parent and  most  needful.  For  here,  if 
we  are  to  see  and  live  at  all,  it  will  only 
be  because  of  the  vision  which  the  gos- 
pel gives  us  and  the  power  that  the 
redemptive  activity  of  God  in  Jesus 
Christ  provides.  The  power  and  vision 
of  the  culture  will  not  do,  because  we 
now  stand  over  against  it. 

The  teaching  ministry  of  the  church, 
understood  as  the  work  of  enabling 
people  to  see  things  as  they  are  and 
come  to  grips  with  life  from  the  per- 
spective of  the  gospel,  is  done,  then,  in 
contexts  where  we  sense  our  inner 
“strangeness,”  where  we  make  contact 
with  others  who  are  strangers  to  us  by 
virtue  of  their  cultural  marginality, 
where  we  suffer  with  and  for  the  other, 
and  where  we  engage  in  resistance  to 
the  suffering  that  the  dominating  cul- 
ture brings.  As  Brueggemann  pointed 
out,  educationally  this  may  all  be  very 
difficult.  Nonetheless,  it  means  that 
Christian  education  can  no  longer  really 
be  done  in  highly  parochial,  culturally 
segregated  enclaves.  The  educational 
ministry  must  break  open  the  doors  of 
its  congregations  to  bring  its  people  into 
contact  with  people  who  are  different 
from  themselves — politically,  econom- 
ically, socially,  linguistically,  racially, 
even  religiously.  Furthermore,  even 
within  our  congregations,  those  who  are 
mentally  “retarded,”  physically  “de- 
formed,” “enfeebled”  by  age,  “imma- 
ture” in  their  youth,  or  otherwise  so- 
cially deviant  can  no  longer  be  kept 
separated  from  the  rest  of  us.  In  the 
context  of  contact  with  these  “others," 
there  is  a chance  that  the  gospel  may 
be  proclaimed  and  heard,  that  we  may 
see  things  as  they  are,  come  to  grips 
with  life,  and  choose  it. 


The  Empowering  Gospel: 
D.  Campbell  Wyckoff  s 
Concept  of  the  Guiding 
Principle 

by  Donald  B.  Rogers 

Michael  Cardew  talked  with  hands 
and  voice  as  he  shared  with  the 
workshop  potters  gathered  around  him 
the  knowledge  gained  from  years  of 
making  stoneware  pottery  in  England 
and  Africa.  He  had  spent  a long  career 
exploring  the  intricasies  of  clay  and  glaze 
and  fire,  and  the  subtle  relationship  be- 
tween function  and  form  and  beauty. 
A workshop  participant,  hearing  a 
comment  on  stoneware  glazing,  asked 
if  that  would  also  be  true  of  porcelain. 
Cardew  replied,  “Ah,  that  I do  not  know. 
You  see,  porcelain  is  another  lifetime.” 
The  years  of  that  famous  potter  had 
been  spent  mastering  one  area  of  the 
larger  field.  His  technical  knowledge  is 
immense,  but  the  persistent  problem, 
the  enduring  challenge  was  to  produce 
cups,  pitchers,  tea  pots,  and  the  like  that 
served  their  intended  purpose.  That  did 
not  allow  him  time  to  learn  porcelain, 
too.  The  task  of  the  potter  is,  to  Car- 
dew, to  penetrate  through  the  mastery 
of  technique  to  the  wedding  of  form 
and  function.  He  commented,  “I  am 
not  very  good  at  making  coffee  mugs 
because  I drink  tea  from  cups.”' 

Danielle,  blond  and  proud,  stands 
comfortably  before  a group  of  stran- 
gers, adults,  in  an  unfamiliar  setting, 
and  plays  Schumann’s  “The  Two 
Grenadiers”  on  the  violin.  When  asked 
to  play  she  had  responded,  “What  would 
you  like  to  hear?”  She  knows  the  first 

1 Michael  Cardew,  Pioneer  Pottery  (London: 
Longman  Group  Ltd.,  1969).  Cf.  chapter  12, 
“The  Product,”  pp.  237-254. 


Professor  Donald  B.  Rogers  is  a native  of 
Colorado.  He  received  a B.A.  from  the  Uni- 
versity of  Colorado  and  both  the  M.A.  and 
Ph.D.  degrees  from  Princeton  Theological 
Seminary.  Dr.  Rogers  currently  serves  as  Pro- 
fessor of  Christian  Education  at  United  Sem- 
inary in  Dayton,  Ohio.  He  is  the  author  of 
In  Praise  of  Learning  ( Abingdon , 1980). 

26  pieces  of  the  repertoire.  Her  mother 
and/or  father  will  be  watching  with  in- 
terest when  she  plays.  They,  although 
not  violinists,  have  been  her  teachers 
along  with  Connie  Rogers,  her  primary 
teacher. 

Danielle  has  been  playing  the  violin 
for  4 years.  She  is  now  7 years  old.  She 
will  have  completed  the  standard  rep- 
ertoire of  the  Talent  Education  Method 
in  about  8 more  years  if  her  current 
progress  continues  at  the  same  rate. 

She  is  not  a prodigy.  She  does  not 
work  under  the  pressure  of  pushy  par- 
ents. She  works  at  her  own  pace  with 
enjoyment,  knows  her  progress,  plays 
with  excellent  technique,  makes  music. 
Her  tone  is  rich  and  full.  She  is  not 
unusual  for  there  are  thousands  like  her 
all  around  the  world.  She,  like  those 
thousands  and  thousands,  have  been  for 
many  years  the  debtors  to  Sinichi  Su- 
zuki, the  founder  of  the  method. 

With  a few  simple  assumptions  at 
his  feet,  Sinichi  Suzuki  has  added  to 
the  lives  of  many  children  and  their 
parents,  as  he  worked  to  help  them  know 
the  enriching  quality  of  beautiful  mu- 
sic. One  such  assumption  is  that  the 
natural  process  by  which  the  mother- 
tongue  is  taught  and  learned  is  a sound 
model  for  many  other  educational  tasks.2 

The  Talent  Education  Method  re- 

2 Cf.  Sinichi  Suzuki,  Ability  Development  from 
Age  Zero  (Athens,  OH:  Ability  Development 
Associates,  1981).  Cf.  also  Sinichi  Suzuki,  Nur- 
tured by  Love:  A New  Approach  to  Education 
(Smithtown,  NY:  Exposition  Press). 


22 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


quires  teachers  to  understand  the  tech- 
nique of  playing  the  instrument  so  well 
that  the  curriculum  can  move  in  simple 
steps  from  a variation  on  a Mozart  tune 
(Twinkle,  Twinkle)  to  the  Mozart  D 
Major  Violin  Concerto.  The  method 
requires  such  a mastery  of  technical 
knowledge  that  technique  becomes  the 
quiet  servant  of  the  music,  the  teaching 
of  musical  ability,  the  enhancement  of 
life. 

“Thus  Christian  education  reflects 
the  culture  in  which  it  lives.  But  Chris- 
tian education  is  also  concerned  with 
the  culture  creatively. . . . Christian  ed- 
ucation participates  in  rebuilding  the 
culture  in  which  it  lives.”  This  point  is 
that  of  D.  Campbell  Wyckoff  writing 
in  1959  in  his  book  The  Gospel  and 
Christian  Education A The  analysis  of 
culture  proceeds  as  four  questions  are 
raised,  questions  which  cover  the  areas 
of  foundation  and  values,  way  of  life, 
authority,  and  source  of  hope.3 4 

At  that  point  in  time  Wyckoff  s own 
analysis  is  put  in  a summary  form  in 
these  words: 

[Our  culture]  is  pluralistic  in  that  there 
are  no  generally  agreed  on  founda- 
tions and  values  undergirding  it.  It 
is  dynamic,  however,  since  it  is  in 
search  of  such  foundations  and  val- 
ues. Because  the  search  for  unity  of 
spirit  is  far  from  consummation,  the 
fabric  of  society  is  held  together  by 
a highly  complex  organizational 
structure,  a sort  of  culture-substitute 
which  perhaps  should  be  recognized 
realistically  as  all  the  common  cul- 
ture we  have.  The  very  fact  of  this 
complex  organizational  structure  as 

3 D.  Campbell  Wyckoff,  The  Gospel  and  Chris- 
tian Education  (Philadelphia:  Westminster  Press, 
1959),  pp.  13-14. 

4 Ibid.,  p.  21. 


the  symbol  of  our  culture  makes  it 
clear  why  as  far  as  we  have  a pre- 
vailing authority  it  is  secular,  and 
why  as  far  as  we  have  a prevailing 
hope  it  lies  in  science.5 

The  relevancy  of  that  analysis  is  ex- 
trapolated in  the  later  work  of  William 
Barrett,  The  Illusion  of  Technique:  A 
Search  for  Meaning  in  a Technological 
Civilization .6  That  work,  too  complex 
to  summarize  in  brief  fashion,  arrests 
our  attention.  He  addresses  a fear.  “We 
can  thus  imagine  a technical  society  of 
the  future  that  had  conquered  its  ma- 
terial problems  but  was  afflicted  with 
a loss  of  meaning  that  its  own  technical 
thinking  left  it  unable  even  to  grasp.”7 
He  speaks  of  a reliance  on  technique 
among  philosophers,  one  that  has  largely 
waned  today,  but  then  says,  “Yet  the 
belief  in  the  decisive  role  of  technique 
has  not  vanished;  it  has  passed  from 
the  philosophers  into  the  culture  at  large. 
It  has  become  a general  faith,  wide- 
spread even  when  it  is  unvoiced,  that 
technique  and  technical  organization 
are  the  necessary  and  sufficient  condi- 
tions for  arriving  at  truth;  that  they  can 
encompass  all  truth;  and  that  they  will 
be  sufficient,  if  not  at  the  moment  then 
shortly,  to  answer  the  questions  that  life 
thrusts  upon  us.”8 

Wyckoff  asks  if  we  must  not  mirror 
and  critique  our  culture.  Barrett  asks 
us  to  see  a fascination  with  technique 
as  a major  cultural  entity.  The  next 
question  seems  to  be,  have  not  we  in 
Christian  education,  thought  and  prac- 
tice included,  mirrored  the  technical 
fascination  without  sufficient  aware- 

5 Ibid.,  p.  27. 

6 William  Barrett,  The  Illusion  of  Technique 
(Garden  City,  NJ:  Anchor  Press/Doubleday, 

•978)- 

7 Ibid.,  p.  xix. 

8 Ibid.,  p.  8. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


23 


ness  of  the  danger  there  involved  and 
without  adequate  attention  to  the  mov- 
ing beyond  technique  in  the  practice  of 
creative  nurture? 

We  are  helped  by  Barrett  in  the  anal- 
ysis of  technique.  In  its  strictly  tech- 
nological sense,  he  says,  it  involves  two 
factors,  “(i)  There  must  be  a clear  and 
distinct  separation  of  the  subjective  and 
objective  components  in  any  situation 
in  order  for  us  to  take  rational  hold  of 
the  problem.  (2)  The  objective  problem, 
thus  isolated,  is  to  be  dealt  with  by  a 
logical  procedure  that  seeks  to  resolve 
it  into  a finite  number  of  steps  or  op- 
erations.”9 

Dr.  Wyckoff  has  helped  many  in  the 
field  of  Christian  education  to  engage 
in  orderly  thought  about  the  tasks  of 
developing  theory,  curriculum,  evalu- 
ation, and  practice.  He  has  brought  ob- 
jectivity and  logical  procedure  to  the 
field.  A major  continuity  of  reference, 
both  explicit  and  implicit  to  his  work, 
is  through  the  use  of  his  carefully  stated 
categories.  In  the  vein  of  this  paper  the 
received  contribution  of  this  major  fig- 
ure in  the  field  has  been  one  of  assisting 
the  process  of  thought  at  the  level  of 
technique.  He  has  called  for  and  dem- 
onstrated the  need  for  careful  thought 
in  the  responsible  intertwining  of  the 
contributions  of  the  foundation  disci- 
plines and  the  development  of  a full 
and  comprehensive  set  of  principles  in 
coherent  theory.  He  has  fostered  giving 
studious  attention  to  the  implications 
for  practice  as  well  as  the  implications 
of  practice  for  the  development  of  the- 
ory and  the  questioning  exploration  of 
the  foundation  disciplines. 

Wyckoff  demonstrates  the  technical 
thought  process  in  his  article  “Christian 
Education  Redefined.”  Note  this  proc- 

9  Ibid.,  p.  22. 


ess  description:  “This  preliminary  def- 
inition is  treated  analytically  and  com- 
paratively, and  criticized  historically, 
educationally,  theologically,  and  behav- 
iorally,  and  in  terms  of  Christian  ed- 
ucation theory.  The  intention  is  to  bring 
out  possible  alternatives,  and  to  provide 
a basis  for  deciding  among  them.  The 
definition  is  then  reformulated  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  results  of  the  eval- 
uation, with  comment  on  its  technical 
adequacy  as  a definition.”10 

His  contribution  to  the  ongoing 
process  of  Christian  education  has,  in 
a similar  fashion,  placed  him  in  the  role 
of  consultant  to  curriculum  developers, 
to  the  efforts  to  state  and  re-state  the 
objective  for  theory,  and  to  other  theory 
and  program  efforts  in  a wide  variety 
of  denominations  and  ecumenical 
groups.  What  is  not  as  evident  is  the 
manner  in  which  his  technical  precision 
responds  to  the  Barrett  thesis  and  moves 
the  enterprise  beyond  technique. 

The  usage  of  Wyckoff  s work  is  not 
unlike  the  cultural  tendency  that  can 
be  seen  in  the  response  to  Cardew,  the 
level  of  interest  in  Suzuki,  and  the  pro- 
liferation of  efforts  among  Christian 
educators  in  recent  decades  to  look  for 
technical  assistance  and  little  more.  It 
appears  to  be  reflected  in  the  attraction 
of  Christian  educators  to  human  sci- 
ence data,  to  social  science  models,  and 
the  patterning  of  education  on  technical 
scaffolds  of  theology.  In  this  we  see 
Christian  education  reflecting  the  cul- 
tural inclinations  laid  bare  by  Barrett. 

Yet  in  Wyckoff s own  work,  in  its 
fullness,  lies  the  impetus  to  move  be- 
yond technique  to  the  rooting  of  the 
education  task  in  what  lies  before, 

10  D.  Campbell  Wyckoff,  “Christian  Educa- 
tion Redefined”  in  George  Johnston  and  Wolf- 
gang Roth,  The  Church  in  the  Modem  World 
(Toronto:  Ryerson  Press,  1967),  pp.  203-204. 


*4 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


within,  and  beyond  technical  thought 
and  technologically  informed  models  of 
practice.  That  impetus  is  seen  in  his 
development  of  the  concept  of  the 
Guiding  Principle. 

This  concept  is  described  in  these 
words: 

The  guiding  principle,  in  differen- 
tiation from  all  of  the  other  princi- 
ples of  theory,  would  suggest,  infuse, 
and  steer  the  whole  matter:  it  would 
be  at  the  heart  of  the  setting  of  ob- 
jectives; it  would  guide  and  check 
every  procedure  and  method  em- 
ployed in  the  curriculum;  it  would 
serve  as  a guide  to  the  selection  of 
curriculum  content;  it  would  suggest 
how  Christian  education  should  be 
set  up,  run,  and  improved;  it  would 
serve  as  a guide  to  pruning  out  any 
administrative  system  and  device  that 
was  not  really  germane  to  the  church’s 
faith,  life,  and  work." 

The  criteria  for  such  a principle  are 
then  detailed: 

it  should  be  theologically  adequate, 
educationally  adequate,  integral  to 
the  elements  that  make  up  Christian 
education,  at  the  heart  of  the  process 
of  coming  to  grips  with  the  Christian 
faith,  at  the  heart  of  the  teaching 
process,  simple  and  clear.12 

The  power  of  the  Gospel  in  this  cen- 
tered fashion  in  Wyckoff  s life  and  work 
is  kin  to  the  intensity  of  the  words  of 
William  Gayley  Simpson,  quoted  in  the 
curriculum  text  To  Know  God  which 
Wyckoff  wrote  for  publication  in  1972, 
“But  here  you  have  an  exquisite  sense 
of  value  by  which  you  know  intuitively 

" Wyckoff,  The  Gospel  and  Christian  Educa- 
tion, p.  86. 

11  Ibid.,  pp.  87-88. 


what  is  light  for  you  and  darkness;  what 
food  and  what  poison;  what  true  and 
beautiful,  strengthening,  enlarging,  and 
full  of  life  and  what  is  false  and  ugly, 
fettering,  narrowing,  and  deadening. 
Here  is  your  central  sun,  illuminating 
for  you  all  that  you  look  out  upon,  re- 
vealing it  at  its  true  worth;  and  around 
it  your  whole  life  is  meant  to  swing” 
(from  Toward  the  Rising  Sun).li  (In  this 
curriculum  piece  Wyckoff  illustrates  the 
manner  in  which  the  Gospel  as  Guid- 
ing Principle  is  translated  into  practice.) 
Another  demonstration  of  the  manner 
in  which  the  Guiding  Principle  informs 
the  task  of  Christian  education  can  be 
seen  in  Wyckoff s text  for  missionary 
education  for  senior  high  youth.14 

It  is  in  this  conceptual  contribution 
where,  within  his  contribution  to  the 
technical,  Wyckoff  moves  beyond  tech- 
nique in  a manner  instructive  to  Chris- 
tian educators  today.  The  particular 
statement  concerning  the  gospel  as 
guiding  principle  may  be  moot.  What 
is  not  dismissable  is  the  need  to  find 
the  means  by  which  we  can  cling  to  the 
standards  of  technical  excellence  he  ad- 
vocates, be  it  in  theory  or  practice,  with- 
out losing  ourselves  and  the  church’s 
primary  educators,  the  laity,  in  a mael- 
strom of  complexities  or  a retreat  into 
simplistic  refuges. 

The  echoing  of  Cardew  and  Suzuki 
is  in  this  respect.  Neither  of  these  two 
ignores  the  contribution  of  excellence 
in  technological  matters. 

Cardew  knows  his  craft.  He  has 
committed  himsell  to  a life-long  explo- 
ration of  technique.  Yet,  he  sits  at  the 
wheel  anew  each  time  to  fashion  one 

15  D.  Campbell  Wyckoff,  To  Know  God  (St. 
Louis:  Christian  Board  of  Publication,  1972),  p. 
98. 

M D.  Campbell  Wyckoff,  In  One  Spirit  (New 
York:  Friendship  Press,  1958),  pp.  16-22. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


25 


of  the  basic  raw  materials  of  our  earth 
into  the  objects  of  everyday  life.  His 
attention  is  riveted  on  the  delicate  shap- 
ing that  changes  the  clay  in  every  di- 
mension to  the  useful  product.  The  end 
result  is  not  only  functional  adequacy, 
but  beauty  and  a certain  intuitive  en- 
riching of  one  who  uses  the  piece  in 
everyday  life. 

Suzuki,  likewise,  by  his  attention  to 
the  detail  of  technique,  in  matters  that 
range  from  the  placement  of  the  feet 
and  holding  the  bow  to  the  understand- 
ing of  the  music  and  the  joyful  inter- 
action of  teacher  and  student,  frees 
teachers  and  students  alike  to  the  ex- 
perience of  the  beauty  of  the  great  com- 
posers of  the  ages. 

The  functioning  of  something  very 
similar  to  the  guiding  principle  for 
learning  is  described  by  W.  T.  Jewkes 
as  the  contribution  of  critic  Northrop 
Frye.  “In  order  for  a student  to  grasp 
an  intellectual  subject,  there  must  be  a 
point  of  view  from  which  he  can  see 
the  whole  subject  as  one  thing.  There 
is  enormous  value  for  him,  once  he  has 
seen  his  subject  in  that  way,  in  being 
able  to  relate  everything  he  studies  in 
it  thereafter  to  the  subject  as  a whole. 
It  is  this  perspective  that  has  been  so 
sadly  lacking  in  the  subject  of  criticism 
until  now,  and  it  is  Frye  who  has  pro- 
vided us  with  a way  to  do  it.  It  is  this 
kind  of  approach  that  makes  criticism 
centripetal  rather  than  centrifugal.”'5 

None  of  these  is  simplistic,  none  of 
these  is  content  with  technique.  Wyck- 
off  completes  the  group  by  joining  in 
their  ability  to  keep  technique  firmly 
before  us  without  making  the  technical 

15  W.  T.  Jewkes,  “Mental  Fight:  Northrop 
Frye  and  the  Teaching  of  Literature”  in  The 
Journal  of  General  Education  XXVII,  4 (Winter 
1976)  Pennsylvania  State  University  Press,  p. 
293- 


thought  process  or  the  technique  of  ed- 
ucational practice  an  end  in  itself. 

The  context  in  which  Wyckoff  in- 
troduces the  concept  of  the  Guiding 
Principle  is  that  of  being  responsible 
communicators  to  the  laity.  It  is  all  well 
and  good,  even  admirable,  for  Chris- 
tian educators  to  engage  in  sophisti- 
cated thought.  It  is  appropriate  to  wres- 
tle with  the  refinements  of  language 
that  allow  direct  conversation  with  the 
doings  of  the  scholars  in  the  relevant 
fields.  In  short,  a commitment  to  tech- 
nique in  Barrett’s  sense  is  more  than 
an  unknowing  capitulation  to  a cultural 
inclination.  It  is  desired.  Christian  ed- 
ucators can  be  criticized,  in  fact,  for 
moments  of  superficial  appropriation  of 
the  current  fad  in  a related  field  with- 
out a true  disciplinary  understanding 
of  the  technical  refinements  of  that  field. 

Wyckoff  s model  presses  for  a broad 
and  responsible  technical  conversation 
for  the  sake  of  making  the  best  possible 
theory,  grounded  on  the  best  possible 
principles  understood  as  precisely  and 
objectively  as  can  be.  But  just  as  firmly, 
Wyckoff  requires  that  the  end  result  of 
that  technical  conversation  and  con- 
struction be  placed  in  the  hands  of  the 
bulk  of  Christian  education  practition- 
ers without  degrading  the  theory  in  im- 
proper simplification.  It  is  the  Guiding 
Principle  which  maintains  the  tension. 

An  emphasis  similar  to  this  appears 
in  Wyckoff s unpublished  article  on 
“Religious  Teaching — Art  or  Sci- 
ence?” He  says,  “We  have  a clear  re- 
sponsibility for  planning,  conducting, 
and  evaluating  our  work  as  knowl- 
edgeably and  intelligently  as  possible. 
For  us,  in  this  sense,  religious  education 
can  be  a science.  At  the  same  time  we 
are  dealing  at  profound  levels  with  feel- 
ing, belief,  and  commitment.  We  are 
religious,  in  ways  that  require  the 


26 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


expression  of  these  feelings,  beliefs,  and 
commitments  through  the  creativities 
of  music,  speech,  literature,  drama,  ar- 
chitecture, and  the  other  arts.  For  us, 
in  this  sense,  religious  education  can  be 
an  art.”'6 

Cardew’s  adoption  of  the  form-func- 
tion principle  serves  potters  in  this  way. 
If  one  will  think  through  the  intended 
use  of  a pitcher,  then  one  will  know 
how  to  sift  through  the  array  of  tech- 
nical knowledge  about  clay  and  throw- 
ing and  glazing  and  firing  to  produce 
a good  pitcher.  Is  this  to  transport  and 
deliver  lemonade  to  tall  glasses  on  a hot 
summer’s  day?  Is  this  to  trickle  out  rich 
cream  into  a cup  of  coffee?  Size,  weight, 
handle  placement,  throat,  lip,  texture, 
and  even  color  begin  to  “have  reasons.” 
Even  the  potter  who  must  ask  the  stu- 
dio teacher  for  the  final  answers  to  each 
question  is  empowered  by  knowing  the 
questions. 

Suzuki’s  use  of  the  mother-tongue 
model  serves  the  Talent  Education 
Method  in  the  same  way.  The  novice 
teacher,  the  parent,  eventually  the  stu- 
dent, can  become  conscious  of  the  nat- 
ural rhythms  of  teaching  the  language 
and  begin  to  see  through  the  refine- 
ments of  musical  and  educational  the- 
ory the  answers  to  questions  about 
modeling,  hearing,  repetition,  affir- 
mation, stepped  progression,  and  never 
ending  refinement.  In  this  instance,  too, 
the  assistance  of  the  trained  teacher  will 
be  needed  to  flesh  out  the  implications 
of  theory,  the  development  of  the  rep- 
ertoire, the  mysteries  of  technique,  but 
the  empowerment  of  the  non-technical 
participant  occurs. 

As  far  as  I know  Wyckoff  does  not 
talk  of  empowerment,  but  it  would  ap- 

,6  D.  Campbell  Wyckoff,  “Religious  Teach- 
ing— Art  or  Science?”  unpublished,  pp.  7-8. 


pear  that  such  a phrase  is  consonant 
with  his  intent  for  the  Guiding  Prin- 
ciple. The  gospel  is  a viable  candidate 
for  Christian  education  theorists  be- 
cause it  is  at  the  center  of  Christian 
experience.  It  is  central  to  all  levels  of 
knowledge  of  the  Bible,  to  all  levels  of 
theological  reflection.  It  is  unique  to  the 
Christian  faith  and  yet  open  to  the 
variation  of  interpretation  that  is  char- 
acteristic of  the  whole  of  the  Christian 
community.  It  will  not  in  a trite  and 
simplistic  manner  supply  all  of  the  an- 
swers to  the  questions  of  Christian  ed- 
ucation. The  Guiding  Principle  is  not 
intended  to  do  that.  The  resources  of 
the  trained  educator  will  still  be  needed. 
But  it  will  serve  the  novice  teacher,  the 
parent,  and  the  technician  as  common 
ground  for  raising  the  appropriate 
questions,  and  it  will  do  so  in  a manner 
that  enhances  a conversation  among 
peers. 

The  concept  of  the  Guiding  Princi- 
ple is  a technical  solution  to  the  prob- 
lem of  overcoming  the  limitations  of 
technical  concentration.  It  is  a step  to- 
ward the  simplification  of  the  technical 
for  the  sake  of  enhancing  communi- 
cation and  empowering  the  laity.  The 
Gospel  as  guiding  principle  extends  that 
empowerment  as  we  take  Paul’s  words 
to  heart  (Romans  1:16)  and  see  that  the 
Gospel  is  not  a witness  to  God’s  power, 
nor  a descriptive  reminder  of  the  ex- 
ercise of  that  power  in  the  redemptive 
event,  Jesus  Christ,  but  is  the  power  of 
God.  Thus  the  empowerment  that  arises 
Irom  Wyckoff s choice  for  Guiding 
Principle  is  simultaneously  an  empow- 
erment of  “technical  excellence  made 
available”  and  an  openness  to  the  pro- 
found presence  of  God  in  the  education 
ministry  of  the  church. 

While  this  is  not  a return  to  Pesta- 
lozzi’s  Gertrude,  it  is  an  attitude  that 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


27 


would  appreciate  the  intent  of  that  1 8th- 
19th  century  educator.  We  can  sense 
the  “rightness”  of  a simple  mother  being 
the  bearer  of  wisdom  as  she  says,  . . 
it  is  all  well  and  good  for  them  to  learn 
something,  but  the  really  important  thing 
is  for  them  to  be  something — for  them 
to  become  what  they  are  meant  to  be. 
. . .”‘7 

In  a time  when  cultural  patterns 
threatened  dehumanization,  an  edu- 
cator called  his  culture  into  question. 
Is  this  Pestalozzi?  Yes,  as  he  sensed  the 
impact  of  the  industrial  revolution.  Su- 

17  Johann  Pestalozzi,  Leonard  and  Gertrude 
(New  York:  Garden  Press,  1977  edition),  p.  152. 


zuki?  Yes,  as  he  sensed  the  impact  on 
the  children  of  Japan  of  the  Second 
World  War.  Cardew?  Yes,  as  he  sensed 
the  state  of  mind  as  well  as  economy 
of  an  African  people  who  had  lost  their 
craft  inheritance  and  needed  to  become 
again  the  potters  they  once  had  been. 
Wyckoff?  Yes,  as  he  has  faced  in  quiet 
resolution  the  cultural  chaos  of  our  time 
and  with  his  deep  commitment  to  peace 
and  justice  and  steady  humility  reached 
for  scholarly  excellence  and  practical 
relevance  through  his  own  commit- 
ment to  and  search  for  the  implications 
of  the  redeeming  action  of  God  in  Jesus 
Christ  for  the  education  ministry  of  the 
Christian  Church. 


The  Black  Presbyterian 

Church  and 

Its  Rural  Ministry 

by  James  H.  Costen 


Before  beginning  a discussion  of  the 
rural  Black  church  and  its  ministry, 
especially  the  Presbyterian  church,  we 
need  to  be  aware  of  those  qualities  and 
historical  features  that  have  made  the 
Black  church  the  unique  institution  that 
it  is  today. 

Gayrand  S.  Wilmore,  in  his  book 
Blac\  Religion  and  Blacky  Radicalism,  has 
written,  “The  religious  beliefs  and  rit- 
uals of  any  people  are  inevitably  and 
inseparably  bound  up  with  the  material 
and  psychological  realities  ot  their  daily 
existence.”  This  is  a true  statement.  The 
experiences  of  Black  persons  in  this  na- 
tion have  been  unlike  that  of  any  other 
group  or  race.  Stripped  of  an  ancient 
heritage,  divested  of  family  and  root- 
age, dehumanized  by  the  heinousness 
of  slavery,  and  systematically  brutal- 
ized by  discrimination — the  Black  per- 
son has  had  to  run  a treacherous  ob- 
stacle course  toward  full  personhood, 
full  humanity. 

The  Black  experience  in  America  has 
been  one  of  slavery  and  oppression, 
prejudice  and  injustice,  racism  and  the 
denial  of  basic  rights.  It  has  been  an 
experience  of  toilsome  and  burdensome 
labor.  Though  victimized,  the  victim  is 


In  September  198 3 Princeton  Seminary 
hosted  a Conference  on  the  Small  Church. 
This  paper  was  delivered  by  James  H.  Costen 
on  September  13. 

A native  of  Omaha,  Nebraska,  the  Rev. 
James  H.  Costen  is  an  alumnus  of  Johnson  C. 
Smith  College  and  Seminary  in  Atlanta,  where 
he  later  served  as  Dean.  On  December  1,  he 
became  president  of  the  Interdenominational 
Theological  Center  in  Atlanta.  He  has  served 
on  committees  at  the  Presbytery  and  Synod 
levels,  and  most  recently  was  Moderator  of  the 
194th  General  Assembly  (UPCUSA).  Mr. 
Cos  ten’s  experience  with  the  small  church  in- 
cludes having  organized  the  Church  of  the 
Master  in  Atlanta  in  1965. 

now  called  upon  to  bear  the  weight  of 
society’s  inhumanity.  And  yet,  in  the 
midst  of  such  a dehumanizing  experi- 
ence the  slave,  and  generations  of  his 
ancestors,  developed  a faith  that  gave 
strength  and  courage  for  the  struggles 
of  each  stage  of  the  journey  and  un- 
relenting hope  for  the  future. 

The  Black  church,  then,  is  unique 
because  of  the  uniqueness  of  the  Black 
experience  in  America  which  shaped  it. 
Any  human  life  may  be  thought  of  as 
a story,  a sequence  of  experiences  in 
which  a person  lives  out  his  being  as 
fully  human  within  a world  of  other 
people  and  things.  To  isolate  a self  from 
its  experiences  is  as  impossible  as  iso- 
lating the  core  of  an  onion  from  its 
layers.  Therefore,  in  order  to  truly  un- 
derstand the  Black  church  and  its  min- 
istry, one  must  first  of  all  know  some- 
thing about  the  Black  experience  in  this 
land.  Such  experiences  as  Blacks  have 
gone  through  can  never  be  abstracted 
from  a history  of  meaning  which  shapes 
them  and  lends  them  their  particular 
significance.  Thus,  in  addition  to  un- 
derstanding God  as  holy  love,  seeking 
to  redeem  man  from  his  fallen  state 
through  the  grace  of  Jesus  Christ,  the 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


29 


Black  church  images  God  as  the  Lib- 
erator who  sets  his  people  free  from  all 
kinds  of  captivity  and,  indeed,  as  the 
One  who  stands  on  the  side  of  those 
who  are  oppressed.  Thus,  the  Old  Tes- 
tament stories  of  liberation  are  basic  to 
the  life  of  the  Black  witnessing  com- 
munity. 

From  its  inception  the  Black  church 
has  endeavored  to  remain  faithful  to 
the  gospel  of  Jesus  Christ  through  its 
articulation  of  the  meaning  and  pur- 
pose of  Jesus’  life.  It  has  closely  iden- 
tified itself  with  the  “servant”  image  of 
Jesus  Christ,  and  sees  Jesus,  the  “Suf- 
fering Servant,”  as  having  identified 
himself  with  the  hopes  and  aspirations 
of  oppressed  people.  Having  identified 
itself  in  such  a way  has  greatly  influ- 
enced the  Black  church’s  style  and  tech- 
nique in  ministry.  Thus,  the  Black 
church  is  temple  and  academy,  gym- 
nasium of  spirit  and  body,  sanctuary 
for  the  learning  of  God’s  love  and  cen- 
ter for  dispensing  that  love.  Its  mission 
and  ministry  defy  easy  sacred-secular 
labels.  Life  there  is  not  codified  in  such 
ways. 

The  focal  point  for  ministry  in  the 
Black  rural  church,  like  that  of  the  Black 
urban  or  city  church,  has  been  the  gos- 
pel of  Jesus  Christ.  This  genesis  point 
has  informed  the  ministry  of  these 
churches,  often  when  the  realities  of  life 
in  America  made  such  loyalty  to  Christ 
hard  to  imagine  and  irrational. 

Active  worship  among  slaves  was 
generally  prohibited  by  slavemasters. 
Large  gatherings  were  denied  because 
of  the  fear  of  insurrection  such  as  that 
with  Nat  Turner.  In  spite  of  the  refusal 
to  allow  for  the  worship  of  the  slaves, 
ways  were  found  to  get  around  these 
restrictions.  Spirituals  and  other  uniquely 
Black  songs  of  that  period  are  replete 
with  the  code  words  for  gatherings  to 


nurture  the  spiritual  life  in  this  strange 
and  alien  land.  Some  of  these  spirituals 
were  “Steal  Away  to  Jesus”  and  “There’s 
a Meeting  Here  Tonight.”  Distant  fields, 
riversides,  and  brush  arbors  were  em- 
blazoned with  God’s  glory  and  became 
places  fit  for  worship. 

During  the  years  following  the 
emancipation  proclamation,  the  Black 
rural  church  played  a pivotal  role  in 
helping  newly-freed  slaves  adjust  to  their 
new  status.  Made  up  primarily  of  poor 
people,  landless  people,  and  those  with- 
out basic  personal  resources,  the  Black 
church,  from  its  inception,  encouraged 
cooperation,  including  the  founding  of 
mutual  aid  and  burial  societies.  Out  of 
these  societies  came  the  great  Black 
banks  and  insurance  companies  which 
still  exist  today. 

The  purpose  of  these  societies  was  to 
help  the  church  member  through  crises 
of  life — such  as  sickness  and  death.  In 
writing  about  these  benevolent  societies 
which  grew  out  of  Black  rural  churches 
in  the  late  1800’s,  E.  Franklin  Frazier, 
in  his  classic  book  The  Negro  Church  in 
America , states: 

They  were  supported  by  the  pennies 
which  the  Negroes  could  scrape  to- 
gether in  order  to  aid  each  other  in 
time  of  sickness,  but  more  especially 
to  ensure  themselves  of  a decent 
Christian  burial. 

Historians  will  long  applaud  the  work 
of  kindly,  benevolent,  White  Presby- 
terian benefactors  who  came  to  the  ru- 
ral South  following  the  Civil  War  and 
helped  establish  schools  and  churches 
among  freedmen.  Coupled  with  the  ef- 
forts of  many  unlettered  but  deter- 
mined former  slaves,  the  wonderful 
balance  of  educating  both  head  and  spirit 
was  begun,  a process  that  has  grown  to 
enormous  proportions.  The  Presbyte- 


3° 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


rian  church  became  known  for  its  work 
among  rural  Blacks  in  the  South.  Al- 
though the  Congregational,  Baptist, 
Episcopal,  and  other  mainline  White 
denominations — including  the  Catho- 
lics— were  at  work  in  the  South,  the 
Presbyterian  church  made  the  greatest 
and  most  diverse  contribution.  Inez 
Parker,  in  her  book  The  Rise  and  De- 
cline of  a Program  of  Education  Among 
Blacks  in  the  Presbyterian  Church , ver- 
ifies that  at  one  time  there  were  one 
hundred  fifty -eight  schools  in  the  South 
associated  with  the  Presbyterian  church. 
These  were  colleges,  seminaries,  sec- 
ondary, and  elementary  schools,  all  de- 
signed to  advance  the  cause  of  the  re- 
cently freed  Black  man. 

These  schools  grew  out  of  a ministry 
envisioned  by  the  small  Black  Presby- 
terian congregation  in  a given  com- 
munity. The  minister’s  wife  quite  often 
was  head  mistress.  These  institutions 
were  highly  respected.  The  pastor  and 
the  school  personnel  exerted  tremen- 
dous influence  in  most  communities. 
Role  models  for  effective  leadership,  in- 
cluding ministerial  leadership,  was 
gained  in  these  settings.  It  is  no  accident 
that  an  overwhelming  percentage  of 
Black  leadership  in  the  Presbyterian 
church  today  came  out  of  these  South- 
ern rural  churches  and  schools.  Addi- 
tionally, a significant  number  of  Amer- 
ica’s past  Black  leadership  in  all  fields 
came  from  this  Presbyterian  back- 
ground. Carter  G.  Woodson,  a preem- 
inent historian,  felt  that  the  masses  of 
Black  people  were  repelled  by  the  wor- 
ship and  order  of  the  Presbyterian  church 
but  drawn  by  the  quality  of  its  edu- 
cation, often  the  only  educational  op- 
portunity available  in  many  commu- 
nities. 

It  was  the  leadership  provided  by  the 
minister  that  lifted  the  sights  of  Black 


sharecroppers  in  the  South  to  become 
land  and  home  owners,  to  register  and 
vote,  to  educate  themselves  and  their 
children,  thereby  influencing  their  own 
destinies.  Organizations  of  farm  work- 
ers were  initiated  and  land  ownership 
was  encouraged.  By  1920,  925,000  Black 
persons  operated  farms  in  the  South. 
In  1978  this  number  had  dwindled  to 
58,000 — a loss  of  94%.  At  stake  here, 
according  to  a resolution  from  the  Ad- 
visory Council  on  Church  and  Society 
to  the  last  meeting  of  the  General  As- 
sembly, is: 

1)  the  survival  of  Black-owned  land 
and  the  future  participation  of 
Blacks  in  agriculture; 

2)  the  survival  of  what  has  been  the 
longest  single  equity  resource  in 
minority  hands  in  the  South,  and 
the  possibility  of  utilizing  minor- 
ity-owned land  as  a foundation 
for  greater  participation  in  the 
dramatic  development  activities 
occurring  in  the  Southern  region, 
the  Sun  Belt. 

The  Black  rural  church,  while 
undergoing  some  significant  demo- 
graphic changes,  still  maintains  many 
of  its  historic  characteristics.  While 
having  to  compete  with  television,  the 
availability  ot  the  automobile  and  the 
nearness  of  city  life,  the  breakup  of 
family  solidarity,  among  many  other 
features,  it  still  maintains  a hub  rela- 
tionship with  significant  numbers  of  its 
members.  Much  of  their  social,  politi- 
cal, and  religious  life  still  evolves  around 
the  church.  Many  of  these  churches  have 
strong  youth-oriented  programs.  They 
have  vibrant  church  and  Vacation  Bible 
Schools.  Many  of  them  still  retain  or- 
ganizations such  as  Westminster  Fel- 
lowship. In  fact,  many  predominantly 
Black  presbyteries  in  the  South  still 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


31 


sponsor  youth  rallies,  a feature  which 
we  had  developed  to  a science  as  a de- 
nomination and  then  dismantled. 

A demographic  change  that  has  given 
the  rural  ministry  a shift  in  direction 
is  the  availability  of  industrial  jobs  within 
easy  driving  range  of  most  communi- 
ties. Few  congregations  would  still  have 
a majority  of  farmers  within  their 
membership.  They  work  for  the  grow- 
ing number  of  industries  that  are  mov- 
ing South.  Those  who  continue  to  farm, 
however,  have  a median  income  of 
$7,584  as  compared  to  $17,323  for  com- 
parably situated  White  farmers.  Re- 
cently, the  Census  Bureau  reported  that 
for  the  first  time  this  century  the  ma- 
jority of  persons  who  moved  were  mov- 
ing South  rather  than  to  the  North  or 
West.  Many  of  these  persons  have  re- 
tired and  are  returning  to  their  land 
and  to  their  roots.  It  remains  to  be  seen 
what  opportunities  and  challenges  this 
will  present  the  Black  rural  church  in 
the  years  ahead.  I contend  it  has  po- 
tential for  tremendous  membership 
growth. 

The  concerns  of  Blacks  who  live  in 
rural  areas  today  are  much  the  same  as 
those  who  live  in  urban  areas.  Unem- 
ployment, poor  housing,  crime,  drugs, 
economic  inequities,  poor  and  inade- 
quate education  are  problems  that  call 
for  and  demand  the  church’s  attention. 
The  response  is  mixed  as  to  the  effec- 
tiveness with  which  churches  have  met 
these  needs. 

Some  of  these  churches  have  activi- 
ties going  on  seven  days  a week.  In 
addition  to  Sunday  School,  Sunday 
worship,  Bible  study,  Vacation  Bible 
School,  youth  fellowship,  and  camping 
programs  which  are  geared  primarily 
toward  one’s  spiritual  growth,  other 
programs  include  tutorial  projects  which 
attempt  to  increase  the  reading  and  math 


skills  of  elementary  and  high  school 
students.  Many  churches  have  estab- 
lished senior  citizens  centers  and  neigh- 
borhood service  centers,  using  their  ed- 
ucational units  or  other  church-owned 
facilities.  These  centers  give  the  rural 
elderly  a place  to  go  and  engage  in  ed- 
ucation and  leisure  time  activities.  Nu- 
trition programs  for  the  elderly  provide 
balanced  meals  for  those  who  are  shut- 
ins,  handicapped,  or  living  alone.  Food 
and  clothes  closets  provide  emergency 
assistance  for  individuals  and  families 
in  need.  Black  rural  churches  were  some 
of  the  pioneers  in  day  care  centers  in 
the  South.  In  some  areas  rural  churches 
have  facilitated  the  efforts  of  Black 
farmers  and  vegetable  growers  to  form 
agricultural  cooperatives.  Like  their 
ministerial  predecessors,  many  Black 
ministers  are  the  primary  motivators  to 
start  youth  thinking  about  a college  ed- 
ucation. 

It  must  also  be  said  that  where  Black 
rural  churches  are  engaged  in  viable 
ministries,  the  leadership  has  made  the 
difference.  Those  churches  that  employ 
full-time  pastoral  leadership  are  the  ones 
that  have  developed  relevant  and  ex- 
citing ministries.  Traditionally,  most 
Black  rural  churches  have  not  been  able 
to  support  a full-time  minister.  The 
majority  of  these  churches  have  a pastor 
who  is  also  the  pastor  of  one  or  more 
additional  churches.  In  the  1930s  and 
1940s  the  presbyteries  sought  to  address 
the  problem  of  small,  clustered  rural 
churches  by  organizing  larger  parishes 
for  the  sharing  of  personnel  and  the 
better  development  and  utilization  of 
lay  leadership.  This  parish  model  is  no 
longer  in  vogue  and  yet  nothing  has 
emerged  to  take  its  place. 

Finding  a way  to  address  the  lead- 
ership needs  of  these  small  rural  churches 
is  a frontier  for  the  church  in  the  years 


S2 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


ahead.  With  the  reunion  of  the  two 
largest  Presbyterian  bodies,  there 
are  about  475  predominantly  Black 
churches.  Approximately  two  thirds  of 
these  churches  are  in  the  South,  mostly 
in  small  towns  and  rural  hamlets.  About 
100  of  these  churches  are  too  small  and 
isolated  to  justify  the  calling  of  a full- 
time minister,  assuming  one  were 
available.  They  vary  in  size  from  five 
or  six  members  to  seventy  or  eighty. 
Their  members  are  often  quite  active 
in  presbytery  and  pillars  of  the  local 
community.  A plan  to  address  this  need 
is  one  of  the  glaring  opportunities  we 
will  face  in  the  very  near  future. 

Ministry  among  Blacks  in  the  rural 
South  will  prove  to  be  the  modern  fron- 
tier of  the  Presbyterian  church.  To  meet 
this  challenge  we  will  have  to: 

1)  Increase  the  number  of  theolog- 
ically educated  men  and  women 
w’ho  can  provide  visionary  lead- 
ership in  the  pulpits,  classrooms, 
and  community  circles.  They  need 
to  be  a selfless  variety. 

2)  Move  away  from  a cultural  ori- 
entation that  places  the  minister 
at  the  center  of  church  life  to  one 
that  fosters  the  minister’s  role  as 
being  the  enabler  of  ministry. 
While  still  significant  as  a role 
model,  the  image  has  shifted 
slightly  and  power  and  authority 


is  gained  through  selfless  ser- 
vanthood. 

3)  Create  a climate  where  lay  people 
are  aware  of  their  need  to  be  ed- 
ucated for  their  ministries  and  are 
willing  to  sacrifice  to  attain  the 
necessary  training. 

4)  Return  to  a value-oriented  life- 
style in  which  standards  are  once 
again  emphasized,  an  environ- 
ment where  community  expec- 
tations are  high  and  where  people 
are  lovingly  helped  to  attain  high 
goals. 

Historically,  the  Black  rural  church 
was  a cocoon-like  community.  There 
was  nurture  there.  There  was  a great 
deal  of  love  and  encouragement.  There 
was  a willingness  to  allow  for  an  oc- 
casional fall,  but  an  intolerance  toward 
sanctioning  wallowing  in  the  mud. 

There  was  a mirror  for  viewing  one- 
self realistically,  yet  there  was  also  a 
reflector  pointing  toward  what  one 
might  become. 

There  was  a deeply  rooted,  deeply 
understood  biblical  base  that  informed 
all  its  activities.  God’s  love  and  grace, 
made  manifest  in  Jesus  Christ,  was  cen- 
tral, sustaining  when  all  else  failed. 

This  is  the  church  that  challenges  me 
today.  These  are  the  qualities  I would 
like  to  see  developed  further  for  the 
good  of  those  still  to  come. 


Emile  Cailliet: 
Christian  Centurion 

by  Richard  J.  Oman 


The  eminent  writer  and  teacher, 
Emile  Cailliet,  has  left  the  Church 
and  the  world  a legacy  of  practical,  in- 
spirational, and  learned  books.  While 
he  was  perhaps  best  known  for  his  au- 
thoritative Pascalian  studies,  his  mind 
and  pen  roamed  the  Christian  land- 
scape of  reality  from  science  to  litera- 
ture, from  philosophy  to  theology. 

Dr.  Cailliet  was  born  at  Dampierre 
(Marne),  France,  on  December  17,  1894. 
Following  service  on  the  faculty  of  the 
University  of  Pennsylvania  (1926-31), 
he  held  professorships  at  Scripps  Col- 
lege and  the  Claremont  Graduate  School, 
Claremont,  California  (1931-41);  the 
Graduate  School  of  Arts  and  Sciences, 
University  of  Pennsylvania  (1941-45); 
Wesleyan  University,  Middletown, 
Connecticut  (1945-47);  and  at  Prince- 
ton Theological  Seminary  (1948-59), 
where  he  was  Stuart  Professor  of  Chris- 
tian Philosophy. 

A layman,  Dr.  Cailliet  had  pursued 
advanced  studies  in  anthropology  and 
philosophy,  and  received  doctorates  from 
both  the  Universite  de  Montpellier  (1926) 
and  the  Universite  de  Strasbourg  (1938). 
He  died  in  Santa  Monica,  California, 
on  June  4,  1981. 

It  was  my  privilege  to  be  his  student, 
colleague,  and  friend  for  over  thirty 
years.  Without  question  he  was  the  one 


An  alumnus  of  Macalester  College,  the 
University  of  Minnesota,  Princeton  Theolog- 
ical Seminary,  and  New  College,  Edinburgh, 
Dr.  Richard  J.  Oman  is  currently  the  Howard 
C.  Scharfe  Professor  of  Homiletics  and  In- 
terim Director  of  the  D.Min.  Program  at 
Pittsburgh  Theological  Seminary.  He  is  the 
author  of  several  articles  and  is  a member  of 
the  Academy  of  Homiletics  and  the  North 
American  Academy  of  Liturgy.  While  at 
Princeton,  Dr.  Oman  served  as  Dr.  Cailliet' s 
Teaching  Fellow,  and  later  spent  three  years 
as  his  staff  instructor. 

person  who  held  the  greatest  influence 
over  my  own  life,  shaping  my  thinking 
and  ministry.  The  debt  I owe  this  mar- 
velous and  unique  man  can  never  be 
measured  or  weighed  in  merely  human 
terms. 

Dr.  Cailliet  had  described  the  “cen- 
turion type  of  Christian”  as  a Christian 
with  but  one  concern — “to  do  the  Lord’s 
will  in  joy  and  simplicity  ot  heart.  . . . 
It  is  a life  of  love  and  power,  because 
it  is  a completely  surrendered  life,  and 
therefore  a life  in  line  with  the  will  of 
God.  As  such  it  abides  forever”  ( The 
Beginning  of  Wisdom  [New  York: 
Fleming  H.  Revell,  Co.,  1947],  p.  182. 
Cf.  journey  Into  Light  [Grand  Rapids: 
Zondervan  Publishing  Co.,  1968],  p.  98). 
No  better  words  could  depict  the  life 
journey  of  this  contemporary  pilgrim. 

Following  in  the  footsteps  of  his  be- 
loved Blaise  Pascal,  Cailliet,  too,  wres- 
tled with  such  questions  as  the  nature 
of  man,  the  source  of  authority  in  re- 
ligion, the  seeming  hiddenness  of  God, 
the  relation  between  faith  and  reason. 
In  both  prophetic  and  practical  ways, 
he  spoke  to  many  of  the  issues  which 
plague  and  perplex  the  lives  of  count- 
less moderns,  both  within  and  without 
the  Church. 

In  a world  increasingly  broken  and 
fragmented,  Cailliet  sought  to  bring  to- 


34 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


gether  a viewpoint  which  sees  life  as  a 
whole.  Three  examples  serve  to  illus- 
trate his  search  for  meaning. 

I 

Philosophy  in  Relation  to  Theology 

Every  human  being  is,  in  fact,  a phi- 
losopher. If  we  think  of  philosophy  as 
a meditation  upon  life,  then  each  per- 
son has  some  outlook  on  life  which  mo- 
tivates us  whether  we  realize  it  or  not. 

The  question  is:  Are  we  Christian 
philosophers?  Cailliet  observed  that 
“Christian  philosophy  appears  when- 
ever and  wherever  a Christian  begins 
to  think.  The  possible  alternatives  to 
this  could  only  be  either  a thinker  who 
was  not  a Christian  at  all,  or  a Christian 
wrho  did  not  think  at  all.  And  then  it 
should  be  of  uttermost  concern  to  the 
Church  to  have  people  think  as  Chris- 
tians, and  to  see  to  it  that  Christians 
actually  think,  and  do  think  as  Chris- 
tians” ( The  Christian  Approach  to  Cul- 
ture [Nashville:  Abingdon-Cokesbury, 
!953]>  P-  59)- 

This  means  that  there  is  a Christian 
view  of  nature,  a Christian  outlook  on 
history,  a Christian  approach  to  psy- 
chology— and  “a  Christian  epistemol- 
ogy  preparing  the  way  for  constructive 
Christian  metaphysics”  (Ibid.,  p.  77). 

Because,  as  Cailliet  observed,  philos- 
ophers are  impatient  by  nature,  in  their 
anxiety  to  solve  problems  they  pre- 
maturely cease  debate,  and  are  often 
tempted  to  fill  in  the  unknown  by 
“spinning  out  of  their  mind  some  on- 
tological entity”  (Ibid.,  p.  177). 

Theology  Cailliet  defined  as  “that 
scientific  discipline  which  concerns  it- 
self with  the  human  aspects  of  both 
general  and  special  revelation”  (Ibid., 
p.  262).  Theology  deals  with  the  theme 
of  the  light  going  out  into  the  world. 


while  Christian  philosophy  deals  with 
the  theme  of  the  world  going  to  the 
light.  Philosophy  in  this  sense  is  the 
servant  of  theology,  hopefully  a helpful 
one. 

In  examining  the  long  history  of  the 
relationship  between  philosophy  and 
theology,  Dr.  Cailliet  singled  out  Im- 
manuel Kant  and  Karl  Barth  as  being 
representative  of  influential  thinkers  in 
the  making  of  the  modern  religious 
mind. 

Kant’s  views  stand  like  pyramids  on 
our  horizon,  casting  their  shadows  upon 
all  our  thinking.  Much  of  our  philo- 
sophical and  theological  reflection  re- 
mains a running  commentary  on  Kant. 
He  is  a great  divider  in  the  history  of 
human  thought,  for  better  or  for  worse. 

The  point  of  departure  for  Kant  was 
the  knowing  mind.  When  we  look  at 
the  universe  or  ourselves  or  think  of 
God,  what  we  are  doing  in  fact  is  put- 
ting with  our  minds  an  imprint  of  the 
reality  we  perceive.  We  never  get  to 
know  things  as  they  are;  higher  realities 
are  definitely  beyond  our  reach.  Met- 
aphysics are  ultimately  impossible.  In 
placing  such  a ceiling  on  our  thinking, 
and  making  us  prisoner  of  our  own 
minds,  no  wonder  that  some  called  Kant 
“the  greatest  disaster  that  ever  hap- 
pened in  philosophy.” 

But  if  we  live  in  the  long  shadow  of 
Kant,  the  atmosphere  for  philosophy 
was  further  clouded  by  the  work  of 
Karl  Barth.  “No  one  has  ever  chal- 
lenged the  relevance,  validity,  and  even 
the  advisability  of  Christian  philosophy 
as  has  Karl  Barth  in  our  day”  (Ibid.,  p. 
50).  He  would  have  theologians  turn 
away  from  any  philosophical  approach 
to  theology.  There  is  no  need  to  study 
philosophy,  for  these  are  the  arguments 
of  a darkened  mind. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


35 


Cailliet  acknowledged  that  we  owe 
an  eternal  debt  to  Barth  for  restoring 
the  perspective  that  true  thinking  must 
begin  with  God — His  sovereignty,  His 
Word.  But  Barth  intervened  at  a time 
of  tremendous  crisis,  and  as  is  often  the 
case,  like  a pendulum,  he  went  to  ex- 
tremes. The  image  of  God  was  not  to 
be  found  in  persons  at  all. 

For  Cailliet,  the  ultimate  question 
became:  In  our  thinking  should  we  give 
priority  to  what  is,  or  to  our  knowledge 
of  it?  The  answer  to  this  particular 
question  holds  the  key  to  theology  and 
philosophy.  The  “or”  part  of  the  ques- 
tion is  the  special  burden  of  modern 
philosophy. 

It  was  Augustine  who  had  laid  his 
finger  on  what  Cailliet  felt  was  the 
greatest  truth  of  Christian  philosophy: 
Nostra  Philosophia.  “I  believe  so  that  I 
may  understand” — this  insight  points 
to  nothing  short  of  a scriptural  notion 
of  truth:  when  everything  has  been  said 
and  done,  truth  proceeds  from  the 
trustworthiness  and  reliability  of  God. 
To  Augustine,  the  way  to  understand 
the  world  of  nature  and  of  man  is  to 
view  it  in  the  light  of  general  revelation 
(God-bathed)  as  a means  of  leading  to 
special  revelation;  to  view  time  as  du- 
ration with  meaning  under  God.  Cail- 
liet later  confessed  that  he  had  lost  in- 
terest in  the  distinction  between  general 
and  special  revelation— for  where,  in- 
deed, should  the  dividing  line  be  drawn? 
Better  that  the  view  of  Christian  phi- 
losophy be  that  of  a seamless  robe— 
i.e.,  be  seen  as  a whole. 

Cailliet’s  judgment  of  what  he  learned 
from  Pascal  is  germane  to  the  issue: 
“That  Christianity  is  essentially  a mat- 
ter of  commitment;  that  theology  is  a 
matter  of  authority;  and  that  in  the  last 
analysis  the  supreme  authority  in  the- 


ology is  that  of  the  Incarnate  Son,  the 
Supernatural  Christ”  ( Pascal : Genius  in 
the  Light  of  Scripture  [Philadelphia:  The 
Westminster  Press,  1945],  p.  363). 

II 

Science  and  Religion 

Cailliet  was  very  much  at  home  in 
the  arenas  of  scientific  inquiry.  In  his 
writings  he  sought  to  provide  the  world 
view  suggested  by  science  in  our  day, 
against  the  broad  picture  of  the  rise  of 
scientific  research  as  a background,  with 
special  attention  to  the  present  day  need 
for  a Christian  recovery  of  a sense  of 
purpose. 

While  inspired  by  a candid  intellec- 
tual honesty,  at  the  same  time  Dr.  Cail- 
liet approached  the  question  of  a 
philosophy  of  science  in  a constant 
awareness  that  by  birth  and  by  right 
our  Reformed  tradition  is  called  upon 
to  develop  a good-neighbor  policy  with 
the  new  science.  In  so  doing  without 
appeasement  or  compromise,  Cailliet 
was  convinced  that  the  churches  and 
institutions  of  learning  issuing  from  the 
Reformation  would  keep  in  touch  with 
the  world  which  is  their  mission  field. 
They  would  be  in  a better  position  to 
speak  to  the  condition  of  contemporary 
men  and  women.  By  the  same  token 
theology  and  Christian  philosophy 
would  gather  from  scholars  of  science 
a great  deal  of  information,  with  ref- 
erence to  both  methods  and  subject 
matter,  that  would  prove  useful  at  a 
time  when  “reconstruction”  is  the  or- 
der of  the  day. 

A word  used  often  by  Cailliet  was 
“mystery.”  A mystery,  as  he  saw  it,  was 
an  invitation  to  pilgrimage — to  study, 
explore,  search  for  meaning — and 
should  never  be  allowed  to  degenerate 
into  a mere  problem. 


36 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Such  an  approach  to  mystery  he  at- 
tested to  be  the  attitude  of  the  true  sci- 
entist, “this  expectant  faith,  this  spirit 
of  submission  to  fact  coupled  with  a 
readiness  to  proceed  upon  the  resulting 
situation,  however,  perplexing  it  may 
be"  (Journey  Into  Light , p.  51).  Such  an 
attitude  was  bound  to  “expose  the  de- 
ception of  all  attempts  on  the  part  of 
New  Testament  Christianity  to  save  its 
life  by  sacrificing  its  objectivity,  or  even 
satisfy  its  imagination  at  the  expense  of 
a committed  intellect”  (Ibid.,  p.  49). 

What  makes  for  the  greatness  of  the 
modern  scientific  method  at  the  same 
time  proves  its  stumbling  block!  Sci- 
ence today  is  characterized  by  brilliancy 
of  achievement  and  obscurity  of  un- 
derstanding. The  consequence  of  all  this 
is  that  the  scientist  is  lost  in  a maze  of 
facts — and  facts  need  interpretation. 

Can  science  produce  the  necessary 
faith  principle?  Cailliet  was  aware  of 
two  ever-present  dangers  in  approach- 
ing this  question.  One  was  the  danger 
of  reductionism,  always  evident  in  our 
age  of  specialization.  The  second  dan- 
ger was  the  false  faith-principle  of  ide- 
ology. Ideologies  are  subtle  and  dan- 
gerous because  as  a rule  they  appear  at 
the  apex  of  a scientific  or  philosophical 
quest,  and  become  in  fact  substitute  re- 
ligions. 

To  Cailliet  the  universe  of  science  is 
not  the  universe  of  creation.  The  con- 
fusion between  these  two  is  responsible 
for  a great  deal  of  our  trouble.  We  are 
not  observing  two  universes  on  the  same 
scale.  It  is  the  scale  of  observation  which 
creates  phenomena. 

Thus,  the  universe  of  science  may  be 
seen  as  a construction  of  the  human 
mind,  and  the  question  becomes,  how 
much  does  this  construction  have  to  do 
with  the  actual  world  of  God’s  crea- 
tion? Cailliet  believed  there  was  no  basic 


conflict  between  science  (construction) 
and  religion  (interpretation),  that  the- 
ology should  not  be  afraid  of  science 
per  se,  and  that  when  the  scientist  re- 
covers his/her  humanity,  it  makes  all 
the  difference  whether  the  scientist  is 
a Christian  or  not. 

When  the  core  of  truth  touches  hu- 
man situations,  it  immediately  raises 
questions  of  a scientific  nature.  The  key 
to  keeping  the  truth  whole  is  to  be  found 
in  the  distinction  between  the  “actual 
world  of  creation”  and  the  “construc- 
tion” which  the  scientist  puts  upon  in- 
vestigation. The  former  is  the  perennial 
proclamation;  the  latter,  the  hierarchy 
of  sciences. 

Theology,  in  the  realm  of  the  sci- 
ences can  do  much  for  the  scientist  as 
a scientist  and  as  a person:  it  can  dem- 
onstrate how  the  fact  of  “construction” 
needs,  and  actually  calls  for,  a “higher.” 

Sciences,  as  constructions,  are  always 
changing.  Reality  (truth)  is  rooted  in 
the  very  nature  of  the  Divine:  God’s 
reliability. 

Ill 

Presence  and  Purpose  In  the  Midst 
of  Solitude 

Following  his  retirement  from  active 
teaching  in  1959,  Dr.  Cailliet  devoted 
a considerable  amount  of  his  thinking 
and  writing  to  one  of  the  most  pressing 
issues  of  modern  life,  loneliness — and 
its  Christian  antithesis,  a transfigured 
solitariness.  Intimations  of  this  concern, 
of  course,  are  scattered  throughout  many 
of  his  earlier  works,  but  his  retirement 
years  became  the  crucible  for  reflective 
meditation,  culminating  in  his  volume. 
Alone  At  High  Noon  (Zondervan:  Grand 
Rapids,  1971). 

“Thou,  O Lord,  hast  made  me  pow- 
erful and  solitary.”  These  words  serve 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


as  pointers  to  the  nature  of  the  life  of 
a servant  of  God.  Such  a life  is  one  of 
power  and  one  of  solitude.  Solitude  it- 
self is  a state  of  mind  and  of  soul. 

To  Cailliet,  there  was  a world  of  dif- 
ference between  being  alone  and  being 
solitary.  While  being  alone  or  living 
alone  is  neither  good  nor  bad  in  itself, 
aloneness  can  become  painful,  even  vi- 
olent. Like  a disease,  it  threatens  to  in- 
vade and  destroy  our  true  self.  “A  di- 
vided soul  soon  turns  into  a lonely  soul 
. . .”  (Ibid.,  p.  35). 

The  answer  to  such  an  enervating 
possibility?  To  capture  a sense  of  the 
Presence  of  God  and  to  recover  a sense 
of  cosmic  Purpose  in  life. 

In  words  reminiscent  of  Pascal’s  great 
“Fire  in  the  Night”  experience,  Cailliet 
pointed  to  his  first  encounter  with  a 
Bible  at  the  age  of  twenty-three,  his 
plunge  into  its  depths,  and  his  emerg- 
ing from  beyond  the  words  to  the  Word, 
the  Living  Word,  Jesus  Christ.  It  was 
this  Christ  who  now  became  alive  to 
him.  This  event  proved  to  be  his  ini- 
tiation to  “the  notion  of  Presence  which 
later  would  prove  crucial  to  my  theo- 
logical thinking”  (Journey  Into  Light , p. 
18). 

Note  that  Cailliet  here  is  not  talking 
about  the  existence  of  God — a question 
he  called  “a  metaphysical  matter  ulti- 
mately beyond  verification”  (Ibid.,  p. 
88).  The  Presence  refers  to  the  in- 
dwelling of  the  spirit  of  the  living  Christ 
in  power.  It  is  that  indwelling  Presence 
which  brings  certitude  to  the  believer, 


37 

“certitude”  being  that  which  endures, 
things  which  do  not  change,  the  abid- 
ing things  of  God.  Such  a person  in  the 
midst  of  solitude  finds  oneself  moving 
in  the  direction  of  both  sanctity,  which 
is  health  of  spirit,  and  sanity,  which  is 
health  of  intellect. 

Those  who  would  know  with  cer- 
titude are  persons  in  position  to  do  the 
truth— which  brings  Cailliet  to  the 
problems  involved  in  the  recovery  of  a 
sense  of  purpose  in  life.  Lack  of  purpose 
according  to  him  is  at  the  root  of  sol- 
itude. How  many  persons,  for  example, 
use  the  phrase  “killing  time”  as  evi- 
dence of  the  fact  of  a loss  of  purpose? 
If  we  are  to  reach  any  meaningful  con- 
clusion regarding  the  meaning  of  sol- 
itude, it  is  by  coming  to  grips  with  the 
issue  of  Cosmic  Purpose.  Here  is  the 
clue  to  the  solitary  life.  Authenticity  in 
solitude  demands  the  sense  of  reality 
which  purpose  makes  possible. 

As  the  Presence  enters  the  human 
soul,  so  the  Promethean  departs,  the 
Promethean  being  that  which  is  finally 
responsible  for  the  loss  of  purpose  in 
every  being. 

Personality  as  the  crown  of  life  finds 
its  fulfillment,  receives  its  full  stature, 
when  a person  becomes  an  act  of  God. 
Such  a person  truly  learns  to  live  and 
savor  life  at  its  fullest.  And  physical 
death — when  it  comes — may  be  com- 
pared to  the  blinking  of  the  eye  which 
does  not  interrupt  the  vision.  So  it  was, 
I believe,  for  this  Christian  centurion, 
Emile  Cailliet. 


Memorial  Tributes 


John  Alexander  Mackay 

1889-1983 

The  Faculty  and  Administrative  Staff  of  Princeton  Theological  Seminary, 
meeting  in  regular  session,  wish  to  pay  tribute  in  this  Memorial  Minute  to 
our  former  President,  John  A.  Mackay,  who  died  June  9,  1983,  in  his  ninety- 
fourth  year.  With  gratitude  to  God,  we  here  record  our  esteem  and  admiration 
for  our  colleague’s  life  among  us  and  his  witness  to  the  whole  church  of  Jesus 
Christ  throughout  the  world. 

John  Alexander  Mackay  was  born  in  Inverness,  Scotland,  May  17,  1889,  and 
like  a true-blue  Highlander  was  graduated  from  the  University  of  Aberdeen 
with  First  Class  Honors  in  Philosophy.  “A  raw  youth,”  as  he  later  described 
himself,  he  ventured  across  the  ocean  to  Princeton  Theological  Seminary.  It  was 
the  first  of  many  extended  voyages  that  during  his  life  took  him  several  times 
around  the  globe. 

Graduating  from  the  Seminary  in  1915  with  a fellowship  for  graduate  study, 
he  had  hoped  to  go  to  Germany.  Central  Europe  was  then  into  the  first  years 
of  World  War  I,  and  John  Mackay  decided  to  go  to  Spain  to  study  with  Miguel 
de  Unamuno,  the  Spanish  existentialist  who,  before  most,  had  discovered  and 
written  about  Kierkegaard.  It  was  the  beginning  of  a love  affair  with  the  Iberian 
Peninsula  and  Hispanic  culture  to  which  he  would  be  devoted  throughout  his 
life.  Later,  he  wrote  of  Unamuno  that  “he  incarnated  Spain  in  much  the  same 
way  as  the  soul  of  Russia  was  incarnated  in  Dostoyevsky.”  Though  divergent  in 
many  ways,  the  Highland  Celt  and  the  Spanish  mystic  converged  in  a vision  of 
existentialist  missionary  witness  to  the  living  Christ. 

In  1916,  John  Mackay  and  Jane  Logan  Wells  were  married,  and  they  set  off 
as  educational  missionaries  for  Lima,  Peru.  There  they  founded  a Protestant 
school,  now  known  as  the  Colegio  San  Andres.  While  in  Peru,  John  Mackay 
was  invited  to  occupy  the  chair  of  Philosophy  in  the  National  University  of  San 
Marcos.  The  first  Protestant  to  be  appointed  to  such  an  academic  position  in  this 
renowned  university,  founded  in  1551,  it  was  an  honor  equalled  only  many  years 
later  by  an  award  of  the  “Palmas  Magisteriales”  by  the  Peruvian  government 
for  John  Mackay’s  contribution  to  education. 

Step  by  step,  and  country  by  country,  John  Mackay  was  making  his  way, 
providentially  we  may  believe,  to  Princeton.  Under  special  assignment  with  the 
South  American  Federation  of  the  YMCA,  he  began  to  lecture  and  write  first 
in  Uruguay  and  then  in  Mexico.  He  was  appointed  a member  of  the  Board  of 
Foreign  Missions  of  the  Presbyterian  Church  with  general  oversight  of  Latin 
America  and  Africa.  Through  this  association,  he  began  a lifelong  friendship 
with  Robert  E.  Speer  who,  at  this  time,  was  President  of  the  Presbyterian  Board 
and  a Trustee  of  Princeton  Seminary. 

John  Mackay  was  called  in  1936  to  the  presidency  of  Princeton  Seminary, 
where  he  served  for  twenty-three  years  not  only  as  President,  but  as  Professor 
of  Ecumenics,  the  first  such  designated  chair  in  an  American  seminary.  It  was 
a time  of  theological  disruption,  and  a few  years  earlier  several  reactionary 


42 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


trustees,  faculty,  and  students  seceded  during  the  fundamentalist  controversy, 
which  was  then  dividing  churches  and  denominations  across  the  country. 

John  Mackay  came  into  this  unpromising  situation  with  his  eyes  open  and 
with  missionary  zeal.  In  short  order,  he  restored  stability  to  the  campus,  tran- 
scending the  arid  debates  that  had  split  the  Seminary  and  enlarging  and  strength- 
ening the  faculty.  He  began  overtures  with  the  University  toward  mutual  rec- 
ognition of  academic  programs,  raised  the  morale  of  the  campus  with  his  ecumenical 
enthusiasm,  insisting  all  the  time  that  theology  must  be  an  intellectually  respect- 
able discipline. 

The  chronicle  of  John  Mackay  s life  during  the  following  two  decades  reveals 
a series  of  eminent  positions  to  which  he  was  appointed.  His  long  and  distin- 
guished ecumenical  career  began  at  the  Oxford  Conference  in  1937,  where  he 
headed  the  Commission  on  the  Universal  Church  and  the  World  of  Nations. 
This  occasioned  his  often-quoted  directive,  “Let  the  Church  Be  the  Church.” 
He  was  a member  of  the  Central  Committee  of  the  World  Council  of  Churches 
(1948-1954),  President  of  the  American  Association  of  Theological  Schools  (1945- 
1950),  Chairman  of  the  International  Missionary  Council  (1947-1958),  and  Pres- 
ident of  the  World  Alliance  of  Reformed  Churches  (1954-1959).  He  was  elected 
Moderator  of  the  General  Assembly  of  the  Presbyterian  Church  in  the  USA  in 
1953.  After  his  retirement  from  Princeton,  he  taught  at  the  American  University 
in  Washington  as  Adjunct  Professor  of  Hispanic  Thought. 

In  all  these  church  and  official  positions,  John  Mackay  was  governed  by  the 
interdependence  of  what  he  liked  to  call  “Order  and  Ardor.”  He  argued  for 
balance  between  ecclesiastical  unity  and  evangelical  mission,  between  the  ecu- 
menical and  the  confessional,  between  the  structure  of  doctrine  and  the  freedom 
of  the  Spirit.  Those  who  heard  him  speak  remember  his  impassioned  contrasts 
between  “The  Balcony  and  the  Road,”  “Don  Quixote  and  Robinson  Crusoe," 
“The  Badge  and  the  Banner,”  “The  End  and  the  Beginning,”  “The  Way  to 
Tomorrow  Leads  Through  Yesterday.” 

A prolific  author,  John  Mackay  was  always  in  the  process  of  writing  articles, 
editorials,  reports,  dedicatory  inscriptions,  and  books.  He  published  thirteen 
books,  three  of  which  he  wrote  in  Spanish.  In  1944,  he  founded  and  edited  the 
religious  quarterly  Theology  Today.  The  review,  he  hoped,  would  carry  on  and 
extend  the  tradition  of  earlier  Princeton  reviews  going  back  to  the  days  of  Charles 
Hodge  and  more  recently  to  the  co-editors,  Benjamin  B.  Warfield  and  Charles 
A.  Briggs.  The  first  “Aim,”  as  he  formulated  it  for  the  journal,  read,  “To 
contribute  to  the  restoration  of  theology  in  the  world  of  today  as  the  supreme 
science,  of  which  both  religion  and  culture  stand  in  need  for  their  renewal." 

In  1953,  John  Mackay,  disturbed  not  only  by  the  so-called  “McCarthy  Hear- 
ings” and  other  allegations  of  unpatriotic  trends  in  this  country,  but  also  by  the 
silence  and  timidity  of  ecclesiastical  and  educational  institutions,  drafted  “A  Letter 
to  Presbyterians,”  calling  for  reasonable  reflection.  In  one  of  his  favorite  phrases, 
he  urged  leaders  in  church  and  culture  “to  take  the  lead."  The  “Letter"  was 
widely  distributed  and  acclaimed  as  a lone  voice  crying  in  the  wilderness. 

In  the  same  vein,  he  repeatedly  advocated  open  dialogue  and  summit  meetings 
of  political  leaders  for  China,  Russia,  and  the  troubled  areas  of  Latin  America. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


43 


Many  remember  a dramatic  community  meeting  in  the  Auditorium  of  the  Cam- 
pus Center  when  John  Mackay,  with  an  emotional  introduction,  welcomed  J.  Robert 
Oppenheimer,  then  the  Director  of  the  Institute  for  Advanced  Study  and  at  the 
time  under  a cloud  of  suspicion  because  of  his  association  with  the  atomic  bomb. 

At  the  time  of  his  retirement  in  1959,  a special  issue  of  Theology  Today,  against 
his  better  judgment,  carried  a series  of  tributes  to  John  Mackay  from  some  of 
his  friends  and  associates.  Among  those  who  wrote  were  John  Baillie,  Walter 
Lowrie,  Emil  Brunner,  Harold  Dodds,  Eugene  Blake,  Nathan  Pusey,  James  Pike, 
and  F.  W.  Dillistone.  But  high-sounding  praise  was  not  to  his  liking,  for  John 
Mackay  was  in  many  respects  a plain  man  with  simple  tastes  and  frugal  ways. 
If  to  many  he  seemed  at  times  austere,  to  a few  intimates,  such  as  his  Seminary 
roommate,  Peter  K.  Emmons,  he  was  always  “Jock,”  and  on  rare  occasions  he 
was  known  to  demonstrate  his  soccer  footwork  on  the  front  campus  to  an 
astonished  group  of  seminarians. 

Coming  out  of  a small  sectarian  Scottish  church,  John  Mackay  became  a world- 
recognized  ecumenical  ambassador.  He  liked  to  say  that  no  one  could  teach  him 
anything  about  divisive  sectarianism  or  rigid  orthodoxy.  A born  missionary,  for 
whom  personal  piety  provided  the  spark  for  his  relentless  drive,  he  hated  prose- 
lytism,  sentimentality,  and  piosity.  An  essentially  reflective  person,  he  had  un- 
limited confidence  in  the  persuasive  power  of  the  spoken  and  written  word.  His 
public  addresses  were  delivered  with  dramatic  eloquence,  punctuated  not  only 
with  rhetorical  flourishes,  but  with  imaginative  and  symbolic  language.  He  would 
have  made  a distinguished  Secretary  of  the  United  Nations  or  a superlative 
Shakespearean  actor;  but  John  Mackay ’s  ruling  passion  was  in  “bringing  into 
captivity  every  thought  to  the  obedience  of  Christ,”  in  words  which  he  invoked 
when  granting  diplomas  to  graduating  divinity  students. 

In  1932,  and  the  date  is  significant,  for  it  was  mostly  a time  of  theological 
wasteland,  John  Mackay  was  invited  to  give  the  Merrick  Lectures  at  Ohio  Wes- 
leyan University.  He  titled  the  series  “Prophetic  Thinkers.”  He  dealt,  prophet- 
ically as  it  turned  out,  with  Kierkegaard,  Dostoyevsky,  Nietzsche,  Unamuno,  and 
Barth.  These  early  lectures  set  the  tone  for  later  titles,  all  hinting  at  what  he 
called  the  dimension  of  “Beyondness.”  The  following  captions  are  typical:  “The 
Endless  Journey  Starts,”  “Keep  Moving  Beyond,”  “Heritage  and  Destiny,”  “An 
Ecumenical  Era  Calls  for  Missionary  Action,”  “Let  the  Church  Live  on  the 
Frontier.” 

On  the  tombstone  for  Sir  Christopher  Wren  in  St.  Paul’s  Cathedral  which  he 
had  designed,  we  can  read  the  Latin  inscription  Si  Monumentum  Requiris  Cir- 
cumspice.  So,  too,  of  John  Alexander  Mackay,  as  we  survey  his  life  and  work  on 
this  campus  and  around  the  world,  and  as  we  try  to  calculate  his  continuing 
influence  upon  this  place  he  loved  so  well,  we  can  say  that  if  anyone  searches 
for  a monument  to  his  memory,  all  we  need  do  is  look  around  us. 

To  his  widow,  Jane  Logan  Wells  Mackay,  and  to  their  children,  Isobel,  Duncan, 
Elena,  and  Ruth,  and  their  families,  we  extend  our  heartfelt  sympathy,  our  high 
regard,  and  our  Christian  greetings. 


Norman  Victor  Hope 

1908-1983 


The  teacher  peered  around  the  lectern  with  a mischievous  twinkle  in  his  eye 
as  he  spoke  of  the  barbarian  invasion  of  the  British  Isles.  With  straight  face 
he  told  his  students,  “When  the  tribes  of  Angles  crossed  the  channel  the  obtuse 
Angles  turned  south  and  became  the  English.  The  acute  Angles  turned  in  the 
opposite  way  and  they  became  the  Scots.”  Once  again  Dr.  Hope  had  lightened 
learning  with  laughter  and  captivated  his  class. 

In  a style  uniquely  his  own,  Norman  Hope  excelled  as  a teacher  and  scholar, 
and  endeared  himself  to  us  as  colleague  and  friend.  His  was  a first-rate  mind, 
a cosmopolitan  consciousness,  and  an  enviable  sensitivity  in  the  use  of  language, 
not  only  in  theological  discussion  but  also  in  historical  and  literary  settings.  Born 
in  Edinburgh,  Scotland,  he  was  the  son  of  Alexander  and  Margaret  Duff  Symons 
Hope.  He  attended  the  George  Herriot  School  and  then  won  high  honors  at  the 
University  of  Edinburgh  in  history,  economics,  and  ecclesiastical  pursuits.  After 
study  at  the  University  of  Berlin,  he  earned  a doctorate  at  his  alma  mater.  Then 
in  the  years  1935  to  1938  he  served  as  pastor  of  the  Busby  West  Parish  in  Glasgow. 
What  a lively  time  that  congregation  must  have  had! 

At  the  age  of  thirty  Dr.  Hope  came  to  this  country  to  teach  Systematic  Theology 
at  the  New  Brunswick  Theological  Seminary,  first  as  lecturer  and  later  as  James 
Suydam  Professor.  In  1946  Princeton  Seminary  called  him  to  the  Archibald 
Alexander  Chair  of  Church  History,  a post  he  held  until  retirement  as  Professor 
Emeritus  in  1978.  Ordained  a minister  of  the  Church  of  Scotland,  he  was  enrolled 
as  a member  of  the  Presbytery  of  New  Brunswick  during  his  years  in  this  country 
until  his  death.  He  was  predeceased  by  his  wife  Isabella  Logan,  known  to  friends 
as  Shumi.  In  1967  he  married  Wanda  Swoll  Christiff,  who  survives  him.  We 
pray  that  our  gracious  God  will  be  her  refuge  and  strength,  comforting  her  and 
sustaining  her  in  this  time  of  her  loss. 

A committed  and  gifted  teacher,  Professor  Hope  was  a marvel  in  the  classroom, 
a witty  and  learned  lecturer  who  was  popular  not  only  with  students  on  this 
campus  but  also  in  many  other  academic  institutions,  and  with  many  congre- 
gations. His  prodigious  memory  enabled  him  at  will  to  call  forth  dates,  figures, 
quotations,  information,  and  illustrations  with  amazing  accuracy  and  uncanny 
relevance.  This  ability  served  him  well  in  his  role  as  a constant  reviewer  of  books 
and  also  as  a qualified  author  himself.  He  contributed  material  to  The  New 
Schaffer -Herzog  Encyclopedia  of  Religious  Knowledge  and  to  A Dictionary  of  Prac- 
tical Theology , and  he  had  several  books  to  his  credit.  Norman  Hope  succeeded 
eminently  as  a creative,  dynamic  member  ot  this  faculty  and  chairman  of  the 
Seminary’s  History  Department.  With  his  rare  talents  and  unmistakable  elan, 
he  attracted  many  admirers  and  brought  much  credit  to  this  institution  which 
he  loved  and  served  so  faithfully  and  well. 

Like  Zaccheus,  he  was  a wee  man  in  stature,  but  he  was  a great  man  in  mind 
and  heart  and  soul,  kindled  with  boundless  energy.  It  was  in  his  walk,  in  his 
talk,  in  his  schedule.  Whether  speeding  across  the  campus  pathway  or  across  a 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


45 


century  of  church  history,  there  was  a transparent  vitality.  It  came  through  at 
the  most  ordinary  moments  as  he  answered  the  telephone  “Hope  speaking”  or 
as  he  asked  successive  generations  of  students  in  his  eagerness  to  plunge  into  the 
lecture,  “Has  the  bell  not  rung?  Oh,  there  it  goes.  Let  us  pray.”  It  came  through 
at  the  holiest  of  moments,  too,  when,  as  he  did  almost  every  Sunday  of  every 
year,  he  came  to  the  pulpit  to  preach. 

Norman  Hope  brought  the  enriching  illustrations  of  his  homiletical  care  to 
his  lectures,  whether  the  source  was  from  biography  or  poetry  or  history.  He 
brought  the  clarifying  summary  gifts  of  his  teaching  to  the  pulpit— “My  three 
points  are  these.”  And  always,  everywhere,  there  were  the  punctuating  forceful 
gestures  of  his  hands  and  head,  the  twinkle  of  mirth  in  his  eye  and  raised  brows, 
the  delight  in  humor  and  the  affection  for  people. 

He  preached  in  hundreds  of  pulpits.  Thousands  of  people  knew  him  and 
considered  him  their  friend.  In  their  appreciation  of  his  sermons — their  clarity, 
their  conviction,  their  memorability  and  their  brevity — his  congregations  iden- 
tified Norman  Hope  clearly  with  Princeton  Seminary.  As  a good  Scot  and  a 
concerned  member  of  the  Seminary  community,  he  often  challenged  them  to  be 
generous  in  their  stewardship  and  in  support  for  Princeton.  Chiefly  his  preaching 
was  a vivid  witness  to  Jesus  Christ  as  Lord  and  Savior,  and  an  enthusiastic 
encouragement  to  follow  Him  in  faithful  service.  His  attentive  congregations 
knew  he  was  speaking  to  them  thus  because  of  his  personal  concern  for  them. 

In  the  sadness  of  the  speed  with  which  the  disease  took  his  strength  and  his 
mobility,  his  alert  caring  concern  for  students,  alumni,  and  friends  continued, 
and  he  became  increasingly  aware  too  of  the  care  both  human  and  divine  that 
surrounded  him.  In  a very  memorable  moment  Norman  was  parked  in  front  of 
the  Administration  Building.  He  could  not  leave  the  car.  The  window  was  rolled 
down.  He  would  wave  as  he  could,  but  the  voice  was  weak.  Professor  Geddes 
Hanson  came  over  and  inquired  for  him  and  then  said,  “Norman,  there  is  one 
thing  in  all  this  you  can  be  sure  of.  You  are  not  alone.  You  know  that.”  And 
with  a voice  that  reclaimed  its  old  strength,  and  speed  of  deliverance,  and  a 
matching  gesture  of  hand  and  nod  of  head,  Dr.  Hope  replied,  “That  I know, 
that  I know.” 

Norman  Hope  was  a faithful  servant  of  the  One  who  was  with  him  in  the 
valley  of  the  shadow  of  death.  His  life  and  teaching  reflected  his  faith,  and  many 
of  us  on  this  campus  and  across  this  land  have  been  influenced  by  him  in  our 
pilgrimage  and  service.  To  him  we  give  our  gratitude,  thanking  God  for  our 
encounter  with  this  exceptional  friend,  colleague,  and  mentor,  and  giving  to 
Norman  the  accolade  of  the  prophet  of  old,  “They  that  be  teachers  shall  shine 
as  the  firmament,  and  those  who  turn  many  to  righteousness  as  the  stars  for  ever 
and  ever.”  Amen. 


The  Tacit  Dimension 
of  Ministry 

by  Thomas  W.  Gillespie 

Until  last  October,  I had  never  met 
a leper.  The  only  lepers  I knew 
were  the  ones  1 read  about  in  the  Bible. 
Something  of  their  wretchedness  came 
home  to  me  in  the  motion  picture,  Ben 
Hur.  The  scene  depicting  the  helpless- 
ness and  the  hopelessness  of  the  lepers 
in  the  Valley  of  Gehenna  was  unfor- 
gettable. Yet,  until  last  October,  I had 
never  met  a leper. 

Then,  with  sixteen  members  of  our 
church  in  Burlingame,  we  visited  United 
Presbyterian  mission  stations  in  South- 
east Asia.  One  of  our  stops  was  in 
Chiengmai,  a city  in  the  north  of  Thai- 
land. There  we  were  introduced  to  the 
ministry  of  the  McKean  Leprosy  Hos- 
pital. It  was  founded  seventy-four  years 
ago  by  Dr.  James  W.  McKean,  a Pres- 
byterian medical  missionary  who  went 
out  to  Thailand  in  1889.  The  hospital 
is  located  on  an  island  in  the  Mae  Ping 
River,  away  from  the  city.  This  land 
was  given  to  Dr.  McKean  in  1908  by 
the  governor  of  Chiengmai.  It  was  con- 
sidered haunted  by  evil  spirits,  and  that 
apparently  was  a fitting  place  for  a lep- 
rosarium. 

Today  it  is  a fitting  place.  It  is  a home 
and  a hospital  for  the  lepers  who  are 
“outcasts”  of  the  Thai  society.  In  Thai- 
land, even  those  lepers  who  are  cured 
are  not  permitted  to  return  to  their  vil- 
lages and  families.  So  McKean  is  a vil- 
lage apart,  a community  of  hope  for 
people  who  otherwise  would  know  only 
rejection  and  despair.  The  people  who 
live  there  with  their  leprosy  are  beau- 
tiful in  spirit  but  deformed  in  body.  We 
met  men  who  have  hands  without  fin- 
gers, and  women  who  have  legs  with- 


On  most  Mondays  President  Thomas  W. 
Gillespie  preaches  to  the  Seminary  community 
in  Miller  Chapel.  The  following  is  his  first 
Monday  sermon,  given  on  September  26,  1983, 
at  the  beginning  of  his  presidency. 

out  feet.  Many  of  them  have  suffered 
terrible  facial  disfigurement.  If  you  have 
an  ounce  of  compassion  in  your  heart, 
you  are  moved  deeply  by  the  condition 
of  these  fellow  human  beings. 

Now  when  I read  a story  like  the 
one  told  by  Mark  about  Jesus  and  a 
leper,  I have  a feeling  for  it  that  I never 
had  before.  When  the  man  is  identified 
as  a leper,  I can  imagine  what  he  looked 
like.  When  he  is  portrayed  as  coming 
to  Jesus  with  his  disease,  begging  Jesus, 
kneeling  at  the  feet  of  Jesus,  and  crying 
out  to  Jesus,  “If  you  will,  you  can  make 
me  clean,”  I can  appreciate  his  desper- 
ation. And  when  Mark  tells  us  that  Je- 
sus was  “moved  with  pity,”  I can  res- 
onate to  that  because  it  corresponds  to 
my  own  feelings  toward  lepers  at 
McKean  in  Chiengmai. 

There  is  only  one  small  problem.  It 
is,  of  all  things,  a textual  problem.  Some 
of  the  oldest  and  best  manuscripts  of 
Mark’s  Gospel  do  not  say  that  Jesus  was 
“moved  with  pity.”  They  say  instead 
that  he  was  “very  angry.”  Now  because 
I prefer  Jesus  to  show  “pity”  and  not 
“anger,”  I am  tempted  to  dismiss  the 
variant  reading.  But  my  training  in  tex- 
tual criticism  will  not  permit  that.  For 
I was  taught  in  seminary  and  in  grad- 
uate school  an  important  rule  of  thumb. 
And  this  is  the  rule.  When  manuscripts 
that  are  of  equal  vintage  disagree  on  a 
reading,  the  more  difficult  reading  is 
more  likely  to  be  the  original.  Applied 
to  this  instance,  it  is  easy  to  see  why  a 
Christian  scribe  would  change  “he  was 
angry”  to  read  “he  was  moved  with 
pity.”  But  it  is  not  easy  to  understand 
why  a scribe  would  change  “he  was 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


47 


moved  with  pity”  to  read  “he  was  an- 
gry.” So  we  are  stuck  with  the  difficult 
reading.  The  emotional  response  of  Je- 
sus to  the  leper  was  not  one  of  pity  but 
one  of  anger. 

But  this  resolution  of  the  textual 
problem  creates  for  me  a theological 
problem.  Why  was  Jesus  angry  when 
confronted  by  this  leper?  The  context 
of  the  story  in  the  Third  Gospel  pro- 
vides the  answer.  Mark  introduces  the 
public  ministry  of  Jesus  by  reporting 
that  “after  John  was  arrested,  Jesus  came 
into  Galilee,  preaching  the  gospel  of 
God,  and  saying,  ‘The  time  is  fulfilled, 
and  the  kingdom  of  God  is  at  hand; 
repent,  and  believe  in  the  gospel’  ” (1:14- 
15).  He  then  illustrates  what  it  means 
to  repent  and  believe  in  the  gospel  by 
the  calling  of  the  first  disciples.  Simon 
and  Andrew,  James  and  John,  leave  all 
they  have  and  follow  Jesus.  This  is  fol- 
lowed by  an  exorcism  in  the  synagogue 
at  Capernaum  and  the  healing  of  Si- 
mon’s mother-in-law.  Then  comes  a 
Marcan  summary  statement  which 
sounds  programmatic: 

That  evening,  at  sundown,  they 
brought  to  him  all  who  were  sick  or 
possessed  with  demons.  And  the 
whole  city  was  gathered  together 
about  the  door.  And  he  healed  many 
who  were  sick  with  various  diseases, 
and  cast  out  many  demons  (1:32-34). 

But  this  is  not  a programmatic  state- 
ment. At  least  it  does  not  represent  the 
focus  of  our  Lord’s  ministry  as  pre- 
sented by  Mark.  What  that  focus  was 
becomes  clear  in  the  ensuing  pericope. 

The  morning  after  the  healing  ser- 
vice at  the  door  of  Simon’s  house,  Jesus 
is  missing.  Finding  him  at  prayer  in  an 
isolated  spot,  the  disciples  announce  that 
everyone  is  looking  for  him.  The  peo- 
ple want  to  see  more  of  this  wonder- 


working power.  But  Jesus  replies,  “Let 
us  go  on  to  the  next  towns,  that  I may 
preach  there  also;  for  that  is  why  I came 
out"  (1:38).  This  is  Mark’s  way  of  tell- 
ing us  that  the  focus  of  the  public  min- 
istry of  Jesus  was  his  preaching  of  the 
gospel  of  God.  The  healings  and  ex- 
orcisms were  a part  of  his  ministry,  but 
they  provided  the  tacit  dimension.  It  is 
also  Mark’s  way  of  explaining  why  Je- 
sus is  angry  in  the  story  of  the  leper 
which  immediately  follows.  Given  the 
focal  intention  of  Jesus  to  preach  the 
gospel,  the  reason  for  his  anger  is  evi- 
dent. He  is  not  angry  at  the  leper.  He 
is  angry  because  he  is  frustrated.  Here 
is  a human  need  that  cannot  be  avoided. 
But  if  he  meets  this  need  it  will  frus- 
trate his  intention.  Jesus  evidently  healed 
by  touching.  If  he  touched  a leper,  how- 
ever, he  would  be  contaminated.  And 
that  would  make  his  preaching  impos- 
sible in  the  cities  of  Galilee.  Yet  he  did 
touch  the  man.  “Moved  to  anger,  he 
stretched  out  his  hand  and  touched  him, 
and  said  to  him,  ‘I  will;  be  clean.’  ” In 
that  moment  the  leper  became  clean. 
In  that  same  moment  Jesus  became  un- 
clean. 

According  to  the  Revised  Standard 
Version,  Jesus  then  “sternly  charged” 
the  man  to  say  nothing  to  anyone  about 
who  effected  his  cure.  According  to  the 
Greek  text,  he  “snorted  with  inward 
rage”  as  he  gave  the  command.  His 
command  to  remain  silent  was  an 
expression  of  his  indignation.  But  the 
cleansed  leper  was  a blabbermouth  who 
could  not  keep  the  secret.  As  Mark  tells 
it,  “he  went  out  and  began  to  talk  freely 
about  it,  and  to  spread  the  news.”  The 
result  was  inevitable:  “Jesus  could  no 
longer  openly  enter  a town,  but  was 
out  in  the  country”  (1:45).  That  is  not 
a reference  to  his  fame.  It  is  a reference 
to  his  fate.  As  one  who  had  touched  a 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


48 

leper,  he  could  not  enter  the  villages  of 
the  people.  By  honoring  the  tacit  di- 
mension ot  ministry,  Jesus  paid  a price. 
Yet  the  price  had  its  dividends.  Ac- 
cording to  Mark,  the  “people  came  to 
him  from  every  quarter”  (1:45). 

Today  our  crucified  and  risen  Lord 
continues  his  ministry  through  the 
Church.  You  and  I are  the  instruments 
of  his  work  in  the  world.  And  the  focus 
of  his  ministry  remains  normative  for 
ours.  We  are  called  to  preach  the  gospel 
of  God,  the  good  news  of  the  kingdom 
of  God,  the  redeeming  message  of  the 
sovereign  love  of  God  that  is  not  only 
“at  hand”  but  “on  hand”  in  the  person 
of  Jesus  the  Christ.  Yet  we  dare  not 
forget  the  tacit  dimension  of  this  min- 
istry. Not  even  when  it  seems  to  frus- 
trate and  sidetrack  our  focal  efforts.  Like 
Jesus,  we  set  out  on  our  way  to  preach 
the  gospel  to  the  cities  of  Galilee  which 
are  now  the  cities  and  villages  of  the 
world.  But  as  we  go  we  are  confronted 
by  people  who  say  to  us  out  of  desper- 
ation: “If  you  will,  you  can  secure  jus- 
tice for  me.”  “If  you  will,  you  can  lib- 
erate me  from  my  bondage  to  poverty.” 
“If  you  will,  you  can  enable  me  to  feed 
my  own  hunger.”  “If  you  will,  you  can 
influence  the  world  in  the  cause  of 
peace.”  Like  Jesus,  we  cannot  avoid  these 
needs  but  we  can  be  frustrated  by  them. 
They  are  so  deep,  so  broad,  so  monu- 
mental that  they  require  of  us  every- 
thing we  have  and  then  some.  More- 
over, we  cannot  meet  these  needs 
without  touching  them,  without  be- 
coming involved  with  them,  without 
being  contaminated  by  them  in  the  eyes 
of  many.  Is  it  any  wonder  that  we,  like 
Jesus,  are  so  often  angry— angry  with 
ourselves,  angry  with  each  other,  angry 
with  the  world  that  we  find  at  our  feet? 

What  then  are  we  to  do?  Are  we  to 
allow  our  anger  to  immobilize  us?  Are 


we  to  resolve  our  frustration  by  giving 
up  our  preaching  of  the  gospel  in  favor 
of  our  ministering  to  the  needs  of  the 
world?  Or  are  we  to  resolve  our  frus- 
tration the  other  way,  by  ignoring  the 
cries  of  human  need  in  our  determi- 
nation to  preach  the  gospel?  If  the  min- 
istry of  Jesus  is  our  norm,  the  answer 
must  be:  None  of  the  above.  Jesus  calls 
us  to  a ministry  in  which  the  focus  and 
the  tacit  dimension  are  integrated. 

Many  of  you  will  recognize  that  I 
am  borrowing  here  the  language  of  Mi- 
chael Polanyi.  Polanyi  was  a scientist 
who  turned  philosopher  and  struggled 
with  the  problem  of  human  knowl- 
edge. His  insight  was  that  knowledge 
is  the  product  of  a process  of  integra- 
tion. When  we  focus  our  attention  upon 
something,  we  are  also  aware  of  other 
things  within  our  field  of  vision. 
Knowledge  arises  when  we  perceive  the 
connections  and  the  relationships  be- 
tween our  focus  and  this  tacit  dimen- 
sion. The  integration  of  our  focus  and 
the  tacit  dimension  of  our  awareness 
produces  knowledge. 

I believe  that  what  is  true  of  knowl- 
edge is  equally  true  of  Christian  min- 
istry. Our  focus  is  proclaiming  the  gos- 
pel of  God.  But  within  our  field  of  vision 
is  the  tacit  dimension  of  genuine  hu- 
man need.  Ministry  is  formed  when  we 
integrate  the  focus  with  the  tacit  di- 
mension. Such  an  integration  is  not  easy 
to  achieve.  It  comes  only  by  a concerted 
effort,  and  even  then  there  will  be  great 
frustration  and  perhaps  some  anger.  But 
Jesus  trees  us  for  that  by  his  own  anger 
and  frustration.  Yet  his  encounter  with 
the  leper  encourages  us  to  believe  and 
to  hope  that  our  touching  the  needs  of 
the  world  will  not  divert  us  from  our 
mission.  On  the  contrary,  touching  the 
needy  may  just  be  the  way  of  fulfilling 
our  task. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


49 


Presbyterian  missionaries  in  Thai- 
land have  learned  over  the  past  hundred 
years  that  the  most  effective  way  of 
preaching  the  gospel  is  by  addressing 
the  felt  needs  of  the  Thai  people.  It  is 
no  accident  that  the  gospel  has  been 
heard  and  believed  more  among  the 
lepers  than  among  any  other  social 


group.  There  is  more  at  McKean  than 
a hospital  and  a village.  There  is  a 
church.  And  the  church  was  created  by 
the  preaching  of  the  gospel,  the  preach- 
ing of  the  gospel  by  ministers  and  doc- 
tors and  nurses  who  became  credible 
witnesses  to  Jesus  Christ  by  their  will- 
ingness to  touch  the  lepers. 


Paul  A.  Crow,  Jr.,  has  had  a long  friendship 
with  Princeton  Seminary.  While  serving  as 
Director  of  the  Consultation  on  Church  Union, 
with  its  national  offices  in  Princeton,  he  was 
also  a Visiting  faculty  member  at  the  Semi- 
nary. This  sermon  has  been  made  available  to 
the  Bulletin  and  these  introductory  para- 
graphs are  printed  here  to  set  forth  the  context 
in  which  the  sermon  was  preached.  Dr.  Crow 
is  currently  President  of  the  Council  on  Chris- 
tian Unity  of  the  Christian  Church  ( Disciples 
of  Christ)  and  Visiting  Professor  of  Church 
History  at  Christian  Theological  Seminary  in 
Indianapolis. 

May  Day  Sunday  1983  at  St.  Paul’s  Cathedral  in  London  was  planned  as  a 
two-event  celebration  of  the  church’s  mission  and  unity.  Anglican  bishop 
Desmond  Tutu,  General  Secretary  of  the  South  African  Council  of  Churches, 
had  agreed  to  preach  at  Matins  that  day  on  Christian  Witness;  I was  scheduled 
to  be  the  preacher  at  Evensong  on  the  theme  of  Christian  unity.  Instead,  what 
transpired  was  a far  more  dramatic  encounter  between  the  spirituality  of  that 
historic  cathedral  and  the  racist  government  of  South  Africa. 

Twelve  months  before  this  Sunday,  Bishop  Tutu  accepted  an  invitation  to 
preach  at  St.  Paul’s  on  May  1,  to  lecture  at  his  alma  mater — King’s  College, 
London — on  May  3,  and  the  next  day  to  deliver  the  annual  Drawbridge  Lecture 
on  Christian  Evidence  at  St.  Paul’s.  The  Dean  and  the  Chapter,  as  well  as  British 
and  American  diplomats,  had  given  the  South  African  government  longtime 
notice  and  made  clear  that  this  was  a pastoral  and  not  a political  visit.  Such 
invitations  are  nevertheless  always  surrounded  by  uncertainty,  since  the  South 
African  government  fears  Tutu’s  preaching  and  the  lively  way  in  which  he  brings 
the  Biblical  message  to  bear  upon  today’s  world. 

On  Thursday,  April  28,  Bishop  Kenneth  Woollcombe,  formerly  Anglican 
bishop  at  Oxford  and  now  the  Canon  at  St.  Paul’s  who  had  set  up  this  special 
day,  received  word  that  Bishop  Tutu,  as  often  before,  had  been  denied  travel 
papers  to  leave  his  country.  On  Friday,  the  Paris  edition  of  The  Herald  Tribune 
published  the  story.  Strangely,  the  English  newspapers  delayed  any  word.  At 
this  point  it  was  decided  that  Bishop  Woollcombe  would  preach  in  Tutu’s  place 
at  the  morning  service.  When  a BBC  radio  operator  came  to  interview  Dean 
Allen  Webster,  he  asked  if  St.  Paul’s  invitation  had  not  from  the  beginning  been 
a political  gesture.  Dean  Webster’s  reply  was,  “Bishop  Tutu’s  invitation  was  to 
preach  the  Word  of  God  and  to  celebrate  the  Eucharist.  But  even  so,  when 
Christians  witness  to  God’s  justice  and  love  it  is  not  politics  but  spirituality  at 
its  deepest  level.”  Later  Dean  Webster  read  a public  statement  at  St.  Paul’s 
protesting  the  decision  of  the  South  African  government  to  prevent  Desmond 
Tutu  from  flying  to  London.  In  part,  the  statement  said: 

To  prevent  a responsible  South  African  church  leader  who  is  invited  to  speak 
on  academic  and  Christian  occasions  reveals  an  extraordinary  failure  to  un- 


Christian  Unity  in  a 
Wounded  World 

by  Paul  A.  Crow,  Jr. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


5i 


derstand  the  need  for  British  understanding  of  South  Africa.  . . . The  flow  of 
ideas  especially  from  those  who  are  denied  the  right  to  vote  or  address  meetings 
in  their  own  country  is  vital  for  human  understanding.  . . . To  deny  the 
possibility  of  responsible,  moderate  leadership  from  Bishop  Tutu,  who  has 
worldwide  support,  is  tragic  and  foolish. 

The  Dean  ended  his  public  statement  by  saying,  “May  God  bless  Bishop  Tutu 
and  may  God  keep  him  safe,  keep  him  safe.” 

The  procession  for  Matins  began  with  a sense  of  unusual  drama  even  for 
historic  St.  Paul’s.  Before  the  service,  Bishop  Woollcombe  placed  the  Queen’s 
chair  in  the  main  aisle  between  the  lectern  and  pulpit,  symbolizing  Desmond 
Tutu’s  presence  even  though  he  was  physically  absent.  (This  idea  came  from  the 
Disciples  of  Christ  General  Assembly  at  Anaheim  in  1981,  when  Tutu  was 
supposed  to  speak  but  was  denied  a travel  visa.)  In  the  red  velvet  chair  usually 
reserved  for  a royal  visit  sat  the  Book  of  Modern  Martyrs  which  normally  is  on 
display  in  a side  chapel.  It  was  open  to  the  page  which  commemorates  Steve 
Biko,  a thirty-one-year-old  black  South  African  Christian  whose  work  for  free- 
dom led  to  his  1977  murder  in  a South  African  prison.  The  empty  chair,  the 
open  martyrs  book,  and  the  nearby  wooden  crucifix  above  the  high  pulpit  in  St. 
Paul’s — where  Bishop  Tutu  was  to  have  preached — were  for  me  symbols  of  the 
suffering  of  thousands  of  Christians  whose  faith  and  quest  for  freedom  put  them 
at  odds  with  the  oppressive  governments.  These  three  were  symbols  of  the  power 
of  the  powerless.  When  will  the  South  African  government  and  all  other  powers 
realize  that  when  the  Spirit  is  present,  an  empty  chair  is  as  powerful,  if  not  more 
powerful,  than  a Bishop  in  the  pulpit? 


SERMON 

Text:  11  He  [God]  has  made  known  to  us  his  hidden  purpose-such  was  his  will  and 
pleasure  determined  beforehand  in  Christ — to  be  put  into  effect  when  the  time 
was  ripe:  namely,  that  the  universe,  all  in  heaven  and  on  earth,  might  be 
brought  into  a unity  in  Christ .”  (Ephesians  1:9-10) 


The  British  novelist  J.  B.  Priestly  was 
once  invited  to  write  an  article  about 
his  theological  beliefs.  He  declined  the 
invitation,  confessing  that  at  the  mo- 
ment he  was  “perhaps  better  able  to 
deny  than  to  affirm.”  Then  thought- 
fully he  added:  “I  regret  this,  because 
now  is  the  time  for  gigantic  affirma- 
tions.” 

Priestly’s  words  are  therapy  these  days 
for  the  movement  towards  Christian 
unity,  a movement  which  in  certain 
places  is  caught  in  moods  of  disillu- 


sionment, anger,  uncertainty,  and  leth- 
argy. Some  church  leaders  might  de- 
scribe these  as  times  when  we  are 
“perhaps  better  able  to  deny  Christian 
unity  than  to  affirm.”  There  are  mem- 
ories of  broken  covenants  among  the 
churches,  delayed  theological  consen- 
sus, bruised  egos,  rejected  love.  But  at 
just  this  moment  the  Apostle  Paul  makes 
his  most  “gigantic  affirmation.”  From 
his  prison  cell  Paul  saw  a tragically  di- 
vided and  disordered  world  in  which 
the  whole  fabric  of  life  was  threatened. 


52 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


He  saw  walls  of  hostility  dividing  per- 
sons of  different  races,  cultures,  nations, 
and  traditions.  He  saw  alienation  be- 
tween persons  and  God,  an  alienation 
which  had  to  be  healed  before  any  of 
the  other  divisions  could  be  reconciled. 

At  that  very  moment,  claims  Paul, 
God  chose  to  make  known  “the  mys- 
tery of  his  will,”  “his  hidden  purpose 
for  all  humanity.”  Through  Christ,  God 
is  fulfilling  his  original  purpose,  now 
made  clear,  to  overcome  all  rivalries, 
all  animosities,  all  divisions,  and  in  their 
place  to  establish  unity.  His  design  is 
“to  unite  all  things  in  him,  things  in 
heaven  and  things  on  earth.”  Paul’s 
phrase  of  reconciling  “all  things”  ( ta 
panta)  means  literally  the  reconciling  of 
the  whole  of  creation  as  well  as  of  all 
personal  relationships.  Despite  what 
many  say,  disunity  is  not  God’s  way. 
Reconciliation  and  unity  are  God’s  pur- 
pose for  humanity. 

I 

In  this  gigantic  affirmation  we  hear 
the  voice  of  apostolic  confidence.  The 
phrase  “in  the  fullness  of  time”  or  “when 
the  time  was  ripe”  is  not  lightly  spoken 
by  Paul.  Nor  is  it  to  be  understood  as 
a time  of  glowing  success  or  victorious 
ecumenical  campaigns.  When  many 
doomsayers  felt  the  new  Israel  was  de- 
feated, Paul  wrote  to  those  first-century 
Christians:  “Look!  Now  is  the  right 
time  for  unity!  Now  is  the  day  of  rec- 
onciliation!" 

To  work  for  Christian  unity  is  to 
learn  about  the  weaknesses  of  Chris- 
tians and  churches.  We  are  feeble,  hu- 
man, vulnerable  vessels  of  God.  Our 
designs  are  not  always  the  design  of 
God.  Our  achievements  seem  fragile  and 
short-lived.  But  this  is  the  assumption 
of  the  Gospel.  Precisely  at  the  moment 
when  we  are  most  human,  most  vul- 


nerable, most  divided — when  the  power 
of  sin  is  so  terribly  strong — Christians 
discover  the  hidden  depths  of  their  unity 
and  common  faith.  We  discover  that 
the  distances  between  us  are  being  lifted 
by  grace  in  order  that  new  intimacies 
can  grow.  What  a sign  of  God’s  grace! 
Despite  our  failures  as  Christians — our 
disobedience  and  comfortable  disuni- 
ties— the  Holy  Spirit  is  still  at  work  in 
the  church  gathering  its  members  and 
ministers  for  common  service  in  the 
world.  Despite  our  lack  of  love  as 
churches,  God  is  at  work  in  the  world 
raising  up  sons  and  daughters  who  cou- 
rageously witness  to  peace  and  unity. 

Christian  unity  is  not  just  a dream 
to  be  realized  when  church  synods  and 
assemblies  are  inclined  to  do  so.  Unity 
is  the  goal  of  all  history,  made  possible 
by  the  Cross  and  Resurrection  of  Jesus 
Christ.  For  us,  whether  we  be  bishops, 
clergy,  or  laity,  to  stand  before  a broken 
and  divided  world  and  be  silent  or  dis- 
couraged about  church  unity  is  the  same 
as  if  we  stood  before  the  empty  tomb 
that  first  Easter  morning  and  had  noth- 
ing to  say  but  to  express  anger,  disil- 
lusionment, and  tiredness.  Today  is  the 
fullness  of  time.  We  are  empowered  to 
begin  again  the  search  for  visible  unity 
because  the  reconciling  power  of  Christ 
unites  all  things,  things  in  heaven  and 
things  on  earth. 

II 

Through  Paul’s  gigantic  affirmation 
we  hear  the  voice  of  a divided,  wounded 
world.  Disunity  is  the  most  dramatic 
single  fact  of  our  world.  This  has  been 
illustrated  in  our  midst  at  St.  Paul’s 
today  when  the  racist  government  of 
South  Africa  did  not  allow  Bishop  Des- 
mond Tutu  to  come  to  this  day  of  cel- 
ebration. He  and  millions  of  others  are 
denied  their  human  rights  by  govern- 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


53 


ments  and  parties  which  fragment  the 
people  of  God.  When  Paul  joyously  said 
elsewhere,  “God  was  in  Christ  recon- 
ciling the  world  to  himself  and  en- 
trusting to  us  the  ministry  of  reconcil- 
iation” (II  Corinthians  5:19),  he  was 
saying  something  profound  about  God’s 
love  for  this  world  of  hurting  people. 

Whenever  the  call  to  visible  unity  is 
taken  so  lightly  these  days  or  treated  as 
if  it  were  dependent  on  the  preferences 
of  different  traditions,  I believe  we  mis- 
understand the  relation  between  God’s 
church  and  God’s  world.  The  ecumen- 
ical question  is  not  whether  we  can  dis- 
cover a united  church  that  pleases  An- 
glicans, Methodists,  United  Reformed, 
or  Roman  Catholics.  The  ecumenical 
question  which  the  Gospel  poses  is  how 
we  can  be  a church  which  manifests 
the  unity  of  God’s  purpose  to  a frag- 
mented, dying  world. 

The  world  is  the  creation  of  God’s 
goodness  entrusted  to  humanity  for  its 
completion.  The  world  is  the  object  of 
God’s  deepest  love.  The  world  is  the 
place  where  sin  and  forgiveness,  bro- 
kenness and  new  beginnings  are  signs 
of  salvation.  But  where  do  warring  na- 
tions, classes  in  conflict,  distrusting  races 
learn  that  God  has  made  them  one? 
Where  do  persons  whose  differences 
have  led  to  alienation  and  hatred  learn 
that  they  are  no  longer  strangers  or  those 
outside  love,  but  rather  are  common 
citizens  with  the  saints  and  members 
of  God’s  household? 

Such  is  the  true  calling  of  the  church. 
The  church,  according  to  God’s  pur- 
pose, is  a sign  of  the  coming  unity  of 
all  humanity.  The  church  is  the  voice 
of  God’s  “no”  to  the  disunities  of  so- 
ciety— the  quarrels,  the  unhealthy  na- 
tionalism, the  ancient  biases  which  di- 
vide. We  are  called  to  be  those  who 
allow  God’s  love  to  shine  through  us 


in  such  a way  that  the  divisions  between 
peoples  are  overcome,  and  through 
whom  women  and  men  of  all  sorts  and 
conditions  are  drawn  together. 

Ill 

The  apostle  gave  a clue  to  church 
unity  when  he  said:  “If  anyone  is  in 
Christ  he  [or  she]  is  a new  creation”  (I 
Cor.  5:17),  a new  person.  Unity  is  pos- 
sible because  persons  are  recreated  in 
the  image  of  their  own  common  Lord 
Jesus  Christ,  who  is  the  image  of  God. 

Garfield  Todd,  the  former  prime 
minister  of  Rhodesia/Zimbabwe,  was 
asked  several  years  ago  what  he  thought 
of  the  witness  of  the  World  Council  of 
Churches  against  apartheid  and  racism. 
This  Christian  statesman  replied:  “Be- 
cause of  that  witness  Jesus  Christ  again 
walks  the  villages  of  Zimbabwe.”  That’s 
what  it  means  to  be  a sign  against  di- 
vision. Whenever  the  churches  together 
bridge  the  divisions  and  bind  up  the 
wounds,  whenever  we  empower  other 
human  beings  to  see  the  image  of  God 
in  themselves,  then  the  oneness  of  the 
people  of  God  can  be  celebrated. 

There  is  therefore  a profound  rela- 
tion between  the  unity  of  the  church 
and  the  unity  of  humanity.  As  Pope 
John  Paul  II  said  in  his  1982  address 
at  Liverpool: 

As  Christians  today  strive  to  be  sources 
of  reconciliation  in  the  world,  they 
feel  the  need,  perhaps  more  than  ever 
before,  to  be  fully  reconciled  them- 
selves. 

Nowhere  is  this  relation  between  the 
unity  of  the  Church  and  the  brokenness 
of  the  world  more  critical  than  in  the 
search  for  world  peace.  The  reality  of 
a nuclear  war  makes  clear  that  we  will 
become  one  Body  of  Christ  or  we  will 
become  one  destroyed  earth.  Who  will 


54 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


announce  that  judgment?  Who  will  live 
out  the  reconciling  love  which  is  nec- 
essary for  peace?  Two  weeks  ago  I at- 
tended a Christian  World  Conference 
on  Life  and  Peace  at  Uppsala,  Sweden. 
In  their  message,  church  leaders  from 
thirty  countries  confessed  the  divine  link 
between  unity  and  peace.  “The  poten- 
tial causes  of  war,”  said  a Reformed 
bishop  from  Hungary,  “are  supported 
by  a divided  church.”  Such  a spiritual 
insight  led  the  Uppsala  Conference  to 
celebrate  all  the  movements  toward 
Christian  unity  as  “a  good  sign  of  hope” 
and  to  say:  “At  this  precise  moment  in 
history  when  division  threatens  the  very 
survival  of  the  human  race  the  Holy 
Spirit  is  driving  [God’s]  people  to  dis- 
cover and  demonstrate  a unity  that 
transcends  all  divisions.”  If  the  churches 
could  recover  the  biblical  symbol  of  one 
living  fellowship  in  Christ,  they  might 
become  a promise  to  nations  and  in- 
ternational societies  of  that  ancient  vi- 
sion of  a New  Earth  where  all  nations 


come  together  peacefully  before  the  Lord 
God  and  where  hunger,  hurt,  and  sor- 
row are  no  more.  Church  unity  is  a 
foundation  of  global  peace  because  God 
has  united  all  things  in  Christ,  things 
in  heaven  and  things  on  earth. 

Towards  the  end  of  his  life,  Nathan 
Soderblom,  a Swedish  Lutheran  arch- 
bishop and  an  architect  of  the  modern 
ecumenical  movement,  wrote: 

In  the  Spirit  I have  seen  a glimpse 
of  the  united  church,  a distant  goal 
from  which  [the  churches]  cannot  turn 
away,  and  which  [they]  may  not  neg- 
lect without  thereby  denying  the 
Christian  faith”  (Sundkler,  p.  413). 

So  the  Gospel  speaks  to  the  churches 
of  this  land  and  elsewhere  of  their  ecu- 
menical pilgrimage.  Because  it  is  a pil- 
grimage made  during  God’s  f{ airos , a 
pilgrimage  of  a healing  community  in 
the  midst  of  a wounded  world,  we  can- 
not leave  it  or  neglect  it  without  en- 
dangering our  salvation.  Amen. 


Spirituality  of  the  Struggle 

by  John  W.  de  Gruchy 


Dr.  John  W.  de  Gruchy,  a native  of  South 
Africa,  served  at  Princeton  Theological  Sem- 
inary as  a Visiting  Lecturer  in  Theology  dur- 
ing the  spring  and  fall  semesters  of  1983.  He 
is  a senior  lecturer  and  head  of  the  Department 
of  Religious  Studies  at  the  University  of  Cape 
Town.  Dr.  de  Gruchy  is  an  ordained  minister 
in  the  United  Congregational  Church  of  South 
Africa.  The  author  o/The  Church  Struggle 
in  South  Africa,  he  is  also  editor  of  Apart- 
heid is  a Heresy  (1983).  This  sermon  is  an 
expanded  version  of  one  preached  in  the  Chapel 
of  Princeton  Seminary  in  spring  1983. 


Text:  “ Come  to  me  and  listen  to  my  words,  hear  me,  and  you  shall  have  life."  (Isaiah 

55G) 


On  passing  through  the  security  check 
at  Heathrow  Airport  in  London 
several  years  ago,  my  hand  luggage 
produced  that  suspicious  “peep”  which 
suggests  that  you  are  trying  to  smuggle 
a handgun  on  board.  The  security  per- 
son proceeded  to  examine  my  bag  and 
eventually  pulled  out  a book,  a book 
with  a zipper.  “That,”  he  proclaimed, 
“is  the  offending  article.”  “But  that,”  I 
replied,  “is  only  my  Bible.”  “Indeed, 
sir,”  he  snapped  back,  “that  can  be  a 
very  dangerous  book!”  Indeed,  it  can. 

I thank  God  for  all  that  we  have 
learned  as  a result  of  Biblical  critical 
study.  As  a student  I started  off  rather 
worried  that  such  study  would  destroy 
my  confidence  in  the  Bible.  I knew  that 
this  did  happen,  and  still  does,  though 
I suspect  less  frequently.  But  I increas- 
ingly discovered  as  a student  and  as  a 
pastor,  and  still  do  today,  that  such  study 
properly  done  is  an  aid  which  helps  us 
to  discover  what  God  is  saying  to  us  in 
the  scriptures  today.  In  any  case,  if  it 
does  nothing  else,  proper  critical  study 
prevents  us  from  misusing  the  Bible  to 
support  notions  and  ideologies  which 
in  fact  distort  and  undermine  Christian 
faith  and  witness.  So  I give  thanks  to 
God  for  Biblical  scholarship. 


But  I also  know  that  sometimes  our 
study  of  the  Bible  ends  up  with  us  con- 
trolling it  instead  of  it  challenging  us. 
This  is  true  as  much  for  those  funda- 
mentalists who  reject  critical  study  as 
for  anyone  else.  Biblical  literalism  is  often 
a way  of  manipulating  scripture.  But  it 
is  true  of  all  of  us.  How  often  we  render 
the  Bible  ineffective  by  boxing  it  up  in 
our  own  packages;  domesticating  it; 
homogenizing  it;  yes,  desensitizing  it 
because  it  has  become  a security  risk! 

Why  is  the  Bible  a “dangerous  book?” 
It  is  a “dangerous  book”  because  it  re- 
minds us  of  those  formative  events  in 
our  Judaeo-Christian  tradition  which 
“turned  the  world  upside  down.”  It  is 
full  of  what  Johannes  Metz  has  called 
“dangerous  memories.”  Those  liberat- 
ing and  prophetic  deeds  and  words 
which  transformed  slaves  into  the  peo- 
ple of  God,  and  time  and  again  called 
them  back  to  faithful  obedience  to  the 
righteousness  and  justice  of  God.  But 
it  is  a “dangerous  book”  especially  be- 
cause it  constantly  confronts  us  with  the 
“dangerous  memory”  of  the  “Word  be- 
come flesh,”  the  crucified  and  risen  Lord, 
who  upsets  the  thrones  of  the  mighty 
and  exalts  the  humble  and  meek  of  the 
earth.  It  is  a “dangerous  book”  because 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


56 

it  proclaims  a “Kingdom  not  of  this 
world,”  that  rule  and  reign  of  God  in 
this  world,  in  the  midst  of  this  world, 
which  does  not  derive  its  authority  or 
power  from  the  “principalities  and 
powers  of  this  world.”  One  of  my  fa- 
vorite texts  comes  at  the  end  of  chapter 
12  of  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles.  Herod, 
we  are  told,  “was  eaten  by  worms  and 
died.  But  the  Word  of  God  grew  and 
multiplied!” 

The  church  in  South  Africa  is  en- 
gaged in  an  intense  struggle,  a struggle 
within  itself,  and  a struggle  against  an 
unchristian  ideology  and  political  sys- 
tem. It  is  a struggle  for  its  own  soul;  a 
struggle  against  racism,  exploitation, 
militarism;  a struggle  against  the  her- 
esy of  apartheid;  a struggle  against 
compromising  the  Lordship  of  Christ 
over  the  church;  a struggle  for  the  true 
unity  of  the  church  which  transcends 
human  barriers;  a struggle  for  social 
justice  and  peace. 

But  is  that  not  the  same  for  the  church 
in  every  part  of  the  world?  Is  the  church 
struggle  in  South  Africa  as  unique  as 
it  seems,  or  is  it  but  one  example  of 
what  is  universally  true?  Indeed,  could 
it  not  be  said  that  the  church  is  only 
being  the  church  if  it  is  engaged  in 
struggle — the  struggle  to  be  faithful  to 
the  gospel  of  the  kingdom  in  each  and 
every  historical  situation?  A black 
American  student  interrupted  a lecture 
of  mine  on  the  church  struggle  in  South 
Africa  earlier  this  year,  saying  that  I 
was  in  fact  describing  his  situation.  Per- 
haps the  best  way  you  can  help  the 
church  in  South  Africa  is  by  being  more 
faithfully  the  church  here  in  the  United 
States! 

It  is  precisely  when  the  church  seeks 
to  do  and  be  this  that  it  soon  discovers 
the  inadequacy  of  its  own  programs, 
resources,  and  strengths.  It  discovers  that 


it  is  in  fact  quite  impotent  to  make  any 
difference.  It  is  precisely  then,  indeed, 
only  then  that  the  church  is  able  to 
“hear  the  Word  of  God”  and  discover 
the  resources  of  God,  the  empowering 
of  the  Spirit,  which  alone  give  life.  There 
is  that  awesome  experience  of  the  si- 
lence of  God  to  which  many  bear  wit- 
ness. The  experience  of  Job  and  the 
Holocaust.  But  quite  differently  there 
is  what  some  have  called  “the  strange 
silence  of  the  Bible  in  the  church”  which 
results  from  the  church  presuming  it 
can,  in  its  own  strength,  with  its  own 
resources,  manage  very  well,  thank  you! 
It  feels  no  need  to  listen;  it  therefore 
does  not  hear.  Thank  God,  time  and 
again  the  Word,  like  a “two  edged 
sword”  (Hebrews  4: 1 if.),  cuts  through 
our  guff,  through  our  categories,  through 
our  carefully  designed  plans  and  pre- 
tense, and  brings  us  through  repent- 
ance to  life. 

For  that  is  what  the  Word  of  God 
is  about.  It  is  the  “Word  of  life,”  the 
Word  which  bears  witness  to  Jesus  Christ 
who  gives  life  even  in  the  midst  of  death. 
Our  gospel  reading  reminds  us  that  the 
scriptures  are  testimonies  to  Jesus;  their 
whole  purpose  is  to  enable  us  to  dis- 
cover life  in  him.  This  is  what  the  Word 
does  when  we  allow  it  to  break  into 
our  lives,  and  the  life  of  our  congre- 
gation. The  Word  about  which  we  speak 
is  not  one  which  puts  an  intolerable 
burden  upon  us.  It  is  one  which  meets 
our  deep  needs;  it  is  a Word  which 
sustains  and  supports  us  once  we  have 
set  out  in  our  weakness  and  impotence 
and  unrighteousness,  to  believe,  to 
struggle,  to  do  justice. 

But  it  is  also  a Word  w'hich  comes 
to  us  in  the  midst  of  our  lives  wrhen  we 
have  everything  but  are  empty.  I re- 
member a young  man  from  my  first 
congregation  who,  through  hard  work 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


57 


and  considerable  effort,  had  acquired 
wealth  and  civic  power  by  the  time  he 
was  thirty.  One  night  he  told  me,  as 
we  played  pool  in  his  spacious  home, 
that  he  had  decided  to  apply  for  the 
ordained  ministry.  “You  understand,” 
I remarked,  “that  you  will  take  a cut 
in  your  salary!”  “Yes,  indeed,”  was  his 
reply,  “now  that  I have  all  I want,  and 
more,  I realize  that  I have  not  got  what 
I really  need.” 

Come,  all  who  are  thirsty,  come,  fetch 
water;  come,  you  who  have  no  food, 
buy  corn  and  eat;  come  and  buy,  not 
for  money,  not  for  price.  Why  spend 
money  and  get  what  is  not  bread, 
why  give  the  price  of  your  labor  and 
go  unsatisfied?  . . . Come  to  me  and 
listen  to  my  words,  hear  me,  and  you 
shall  have  life. 

These  ancient  words  of  Isaiah  are 
surely  appropriate  in  our  materialistic 
culture — a culture  which  puts  a pre- 
mium on  possessions,  and  seeks  to  sat- 
isfy its  soul  on  the  abundance  of  things 
which  can  be  gathered  and  stored  into 
barns,  barns  which  have  to  be  enlarged, 
and  enlarged  once  again,  because  things 
never  satisfy.  We  find  it  awfully  diffi- 
cult to  accept  this  lesson;  I certainly  do. 
For  many  in  our  modern  world,  life 
has  no  meaning  because  they  have  no 
bread;  for  many  of  us,  life  has  no  mean- 
ing because  we  have  too  much  “bread,” 
but  have  never  really  tasted  the  “bread 
of  life.” 

But  these  ancient  words  apply  not 
only  to  those  of  us  who  try  to  satisfy 
our  souls  on  the  abundance  of  the  things 
we  possess,  or  the  successes  we  are  able 
to  achieve.  It  applies  also  to  those  of  us 
who  are  very  busy  trying  to  serve  God. 
How  often  ordained  ministers  discover 
that  they  have  been  so  busy  “minister- 
ing” that  they  have  been  closed  to  the 


ministry  of  Christ.  There  is  no  greater 
tragedy  in  the  ministry.  Busy  about  pre- 
paring sermons,  we  fail  to  hear  the  life- 
giving  Word.  The  same  is  true  for  all 
who  seek  to  minister  in  the  name  of 
Christ;  all  who  bear  office  in  the  life  of 
the  church.  Spiritually  inept  or  ex- 
hausted, we  remain  closed  to  the  em- 
powering of  the  Spirit. 

But  it  is  not  only  true  for  such;  it  is 
also  true  for  all  Christians  struggling 
to  be  faithful  in  the  midst  of  the  world. 
How  often  have  we  not  become  in- 
volved in  the  struggle  for  justice,  and 
discovered  not  only  the  paucity  of  our 
resources,  but  also  the  emptiness  of  our 
lives.  Like  Mary  we  have  been  busy, 
intensely  active,  perhaps,  but  unlike 
Martha  we  have  failed  to  discover  that 
which  gives  life  its  meaning  and  service 
its  power.  That  anonymous  14th  cen- 
tury classic  of  the  spiritual  life,  The  Cloud 
of  Unknowing,  reminds  us  that  a person 
“cannot  be  fully  active  except  he  be  partly 
contemplative,  nor  fully  contemplative 
without  being  partly  active.” 

Spirituality,  it  is  true,  can  so  easily, 
as  it  does  so  often,  degenerate  into 
something  egocentric,  where  we  mas- 
sage our  own  souls  in  order  to  develop 
our  spiritual  potential;  or  it  can  be  a 
way  of  escape  from  the  challenge  of  life 
in  the  world,  the  struggle  for  justice, 
the  struggle  to  be  a good  neighbor.  The 
spirituality  of  which  we  speak  is  the 
spirituality  which  derives  from  silence 
before  the  living  Word  in  the  midst  of 
the  struggle,  that  spirituality  which  lis- 
tens in  order  to  live,  that  spirituality 
which  is  a gift  of  grace,  a gift  of  the 
Spirit,  not  the  product  of  a technique, 
but  the  spirituality  which  is  knowing, 
trusting,  and  obeying  Jesus  Christ.  It  is 
the  spirituality  of  those,  who  in  the  midst 
of  the  struggles  of  life,  the  struggles  of 
discipleship,  study  the  scriptures,  that 


5» 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


“dangerous  book”  in  order  to  discover 
the  sustenance  which  Jesus  Christ  alone 
can  give. 

It  is  indeed  a “dangerous  book”  which 
has  been  entrusted  into  our  hands.  But 
it  is  more  dangerous  not  to  hear  and 
obey  it,  than  to  listen  and  obey.  For  the 
gracious  demands  and  challenge  of  the 
Word  are  not  intended  to  destroy  us, 
but  to  set  us  free  to  discover  God’s  grace 
in  the  midst  of  life;  to  set  us  free  for 
that  costly  yet  joyous  discipleship  in 
which  alone  we  discover  the  One  who 
gives  meaning  to  life.  To  be  deaf  to  the 


Word  which  God  speaks  means  being 
unable  to  hear  the  music  which  makes 
sense  of  our  experience  and  universe, 
that  music  which  alone  gives  us  cause 
to  hope  beyond  hope  and  so  live  in 
trust. 

“There  is  a prophecy  in  Amos,”  wrote 
R.  D.  Laing,  “that  there  will  be  a fam- 
ine in  the  land,  not  a famine  for  bread, 
not  a thirst  for  water,  but  for  hearing 
the  words  of  the  Lord.  That  time  has 
now  come.  It  is  the  present  age.”  “Come 
to  me  and  listen  to  my  Words,  hear  me, 
and  you  shall  have  life.”  Amen. 


Bible  Study  on  Peace: 
Ephesians  2:11-3:21 

by  Cullen  I K Story 


In  biblical  history,  the  “gospel  of 
peace”  appears  as  a most  fitting  rubric 
for  God’s  good  news.  Witness,  for  in- 
stance, how — to  an  oppressed  people — 
the  great  prophet  of  Israel’s  exile  por- 
trayed vividly  a messenger  moving  across 
the  mountains  announcing  the  good 
news  of  peace  (shalom,  cf.  Isa.  52:7  with 
52:4-5).  Or  again,  consider  that,  in  the 
face  of  the  reign  of  a cruel  Edomite 
king  whose  value  for  human  life  was 
sub-zero,  the  angelic  evangel  sang  of 
peace  on  earth  (Luke  2:14).  Two  pow- 
erful paradigms  soliciting  our  reflection 
today.  Not  only  do  they  cry  out  in  op- 
position to  a nuclear  arms  race  threat- 
ening the  world  with  a holocaust  that 
defies  description,  but  they  also  issue  a 
clarion  call  for  evangelical  messengers 
who  will  proclaim  preeminently  Christ’s 
peace. 

Peace  on  earth  was  incarnation’s  first 
word  for  the  world  (Luke  2:14)  and 
what  a word  it  was!  It  encompassed 
the  entire  ministry  of  Jesus,  for  as  he 
moved  in  and  out  among  all  levels  of 
society,  his  word  of  peace  implied 
wholeness  for  the  one  who  was  sick 
(Mark  5:34),  forgiveness  for  the  one  who 
had  sinned  (Luke  7:47,  50),  restoration 
for  the  one  who  had  failed  (John  20:19, 
21,  26),  and  confidence  in  God’s  ulti- 
mate saving  purpose  for  the  one  who 
faced  death  (Luke  2:29-30).  The  im- 


A native  of  Iowa,  Dr.  Cullen  I K Story  is 
an  alumnus  of  Johns  Hopkins  University,  Dal- 
las Theological  Seminary,  and  Princeton  The- 
ological Seminary.  He  has  been  a member  of 
the  New  Testament  faculty  at  Princeton  for 
over  20  years  and  is  also  Director  of  the  Bib- 
lical Language  Program.  His  most  recent  pub- 
lication is  Greek  to  Me,  which  he  co-authored 
with  his  son.  For  eight  years  Dr.  Story  served 
in  Lebanon  for  the  Board  of  Foreign  Missions; 
the  need  for  peace  is  something  he  has  wit- 
nessed firsthand. 

plication  is  clear.  Twentieth-century 
Christians  are  to  join  hands  with  Chris- 
tians of  the  first  century  in  that  invisible 
yet  indissoluble  bond  of  the  gospel  of 
peace  (Eph.  6:15;  cf.  Isa.  52:7). 

In  such  confidence,  we  approach  our 
Bible  study  in  Ephesians  with  its  theme 
of  peace,  a theme  that  permeates  the 
pivotal  section  of  the  letter  (Eph.  2:11- 
3:21).  The  passage  is  divided  by  a num- 
ber of  printed  texts  into  two  main  di- 
visions (2:11-22  and  3:1-21).  I suggest 
that  the  movement  of  Paul’s  thought 
in  the  two  divisions  is  comparable  to 
the  second  and  third  parts  of  Handel’s 
Messiah.  Part  two  of  the  Messiah  opens 
with  what  may  be  termed  the  “golden 
passional,”1  i.e.,  the  chorus,  “Behold  the 
Lamb  of  God.”  It  continues  with  a de- 
scription of  messengers  on  the  moun- 
tain who  bring  with  them  the  gospel 
of  peace,  and  concludes  with  the  “Hal- 
lelujah Chorus.”  Part  three  highlights 
the  triumph  of  Christ’s  resurrection  and 
the  resurrection  ot  his  people,  conclud- 
ing with  the  “Amen”  chorus.  So,  in 
Ephesians — similar  to  the  chorus,  “Be- 
hold the  Lamb  of  God” — we  find  a 
portrayal  of  Christ’s  passion  (2:13-15), 
then  a description  of  the  messengers  of 
Christ’s  peace  (3:1-12),  followed  by  a 

1 The  term  is  used  by  F.  Delitzsch  of  Isa. 
52:I3'53:I2- 


6o 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


proclamation  of  Christ’s  victory  (3: 13- 
17).  Then,  commensurable  to  the  “Hal- 
lelujah Chorus,”  is  Paul’s  praise  offered 
tor  the  incomprehensible  dimensions  of 
Christ’s  love — its  length  and  breadth 
and  its  depth  and  height  (3:18-19).  Fi- 
nally, similar  to  the  concluding  “Amen" 
chorus  of  Handel,  Paul  also  ends  with 
his  own  “Amen”  following  his  ascrip- 
tion of  praise  to  God  (3:20-21). 

The  letter  to  the  so-called  “Ephe- 
sian” church  is  quite  evenly  balanced 
between  what  “amazing  grace”  has  done 
for  the  people  of  God  (chapters  1-3)  and 
what  grace  can  do  through  them  (chap- 
ters 4-6).  One  feature  that  distinguishes 
the  two  parts  is  the  extensive  use  of  the 
indicative  mood  in  chapters  1-3  over 
against  the  imperative  mood  in  chap- 
ters 4-6.  Chapters  4-6  are  full  of  ex- 
hortations or  demands  laid  upon  the 
Christian  body  for  a well-ordered  life 
among  its  own  members  as  well  as  in 
society.  For  example,  the  writer  urges 
readers  to  “put  on  the  new  nature”  (4:24), 
“speak  the  truth”  (4:25),  “be  imitators 
of  God”  (5:1),  “walk  in  love”  (5:2),  “be 
strong  in  the  Lord”  (6:10),  and  “put  on 
the  whole  armor  of  God”  (6:1 1).  There 
are  almost  forty  of  these  “imperatives” 
in  chapters  4-6,  all  indicating  what  the 
people  of  God  are  to  do. 

In  contrast,  chapters  1-3  are  char- 
acterized by  the  “indicative”  mood,  i.e., 
what  God  has  done.  There  is  one  im- 
perative only — in  2:11,  “remember.”  It 
relates  to  the  past:  remember  what  you 
were  and  the  change  which  God  has 
wrought  in  you.  But  as  the  lone  im- 
perative in  the  first  three  chapters,  it  is 
one  of  the  important  keys  for  under- 
standing the  letter.  It  points  us  to  the 
basic  need  of  the  church  today  and  like- 
wise directs  us  to  the  heart  of  our  con- 
cern for  “peace”  in  this  study.  For,  the 
apostle  says,  in  remembering  what  you 


were — strangers,  alienated  persons, 
without  hope,  and  without  God — while 
you  remember  all  of  these  things,  re- 
member most  of  all,  that 

(a)  Christ  Jesus  is  our  peace  (2:14), 

(b)  He  made  peace  through  his  cross 
(2:15-16),  and 

(c)  He  came  preaching  the  good  news 
of  peace  (2:17) — peace  to  those 
who  are  far  off  and  peace  to  those 
who  are  near. 

Remember.  The  verb — ever  so  impor- 
tant in  the  Bible — is  the  word  which 
Israel  needed  to  hear.  Remember  that 
you  were  slaves  and  that  the  Lord 
brought  you  out  of  Egypt;  remember 
the  days  of  old;  remember  what  won- 
ders the  Lord  performed  on  your  be- 
half. And  how  well  Jesus  knew  that — 
like  the  butler  who  did  not  remember 
Joseph  but  forgot  him  (Gen.  40:23) — 
His  disciples  and  His  church  could  and 
would  forget,  and  so  He  instituted  the 
holy  supper,  saying,  “This  do  in  re- 
membrance of  me.” 

And  now,  two  “pegs”  may  help  us 
to  grasp  the  breadth  of  our  passage: 

Peace — the  provision  of  Christ  for 
the  world — Eph.  2:11-21. 

Peace — the  purpose  of  God  in  Christ 
for  the  world,  to  be  channeled  to 
the  world  through  the  church — 
Eph.  3:1-21. 

(1)  Peace — The  Provision  of  Christ  for 
the  World.  Christ  breaks  down  the  mid- 
dle wall  of  separation  between  one  peo- 
ple and  another,  between  one  culture 
and  another,  between  one  race  and  an- 
other (2:14).  In  a succinct  way,  Robert 
Frost’s  poem  “Mending  Wall”  has  cap- 
tured the  meaning  of  barriers  between 
people.  He  describes  a scene  where  he 
and  his  neighbor,  at  an  appointed  time 
each  spring,  walk  down  on  either  side 
of  the  stone  wall  that  marks  the  bound- 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


6 


ary  between  their  respective  properties. 
They  cut  and  bruise  their  hands  as  they 
replace  the  stones  that  have  fallen  down 
through  the  winter  months.  When  his 
neighbor  blandly  states,  “Good  fences 
make  good  neighbors,’’  the  poet  rebels. 
He  says  to  himself,  “Why  do  we  need 
fences?  My  neighbor  has  pine  trees  and 
I have  apple  trees.  Surely  my  apples  will 
not  cross  the  wall  and  eat  the  pine  cones 
under  my  neighbor’s  trees.”  Then  come 
the  famous  lines: 

Before  I built  a wall,  I’d  ask  to  know 
what  I was  walling  in  or  walling  out, 
and  to  whom  I was  like  to  give  of- 
fense. Something  there  is  that  doesn’t 
love  a wall,  that  wants  it  down. 

Does  Frost,  unconsciously,  capture 
something  of  Ephesians  2?  Does  Paul 
suggest  that  the  “wall”  is  that  which 
divided  the  court  of  the  Gentiles  from 
the  Temple  proper?  Possibly.  Over  a 
hundred  years  ago,  the  French  archae- 
ologist, Clermont-Ganneau,  uncovered 
an  inscription  that  had  once  been  writ- 
ten on  the  temple  wall,  an  inscription 
that  in  clear,  crisp  terms  forbade  any 
Gentile  to  enter  the  sanctuary  under 
penalty  of  death.  Yet,  by  the  “wall”  of 
Ephesians  2,  Paul  may  provide  us  with 
a flashback  to  the  curtain  of  the  holy 
place  in  the  temple — which  curtain,  at 
Jesus’  death,  was  torn  in  two  from  top 
to  bottom  (Mark  15:38).  Whether  either 
of  these  ideas  be  Paul’s  specific  refer- 
ence, the  text  summons  us  to  face  the 
painful  barriers  of  racial  animosities  that 
have  plagued  the  church  from  its  very 
inception.  There  was  a sharp  almost 
impenetrable  wall  that  separated  Jew 
from  Gentile  in  the  first  century.  We 
are  aware  of  the  prayer  of  the  Pharisee 
in  Paul’s  day,  “God,  I thank  thee  that 
I am  not  a Gentile” — a prayer  echoed 
pointedly,  according  to  Jesus,  by  the 


Pharisee  in  the  temple:  “God,  I thank 
thee  that  I am  not  like  the  rest  ...  or 
even  like  this  tax-collector”  (Luke  18:11). 
Think  what  it  took  to  get  Peter  to  go 
to  the  home  of  the  Gentile  centurion 
(Acts  10).  Or  consider  the  anxiety  and 
sleepless  nights  that  Barnabas  and  Paul 
must  have  had  prior  to  the  Jerusalem 
council  where  they  contended  vigor- 
ously for  the  equal  standing  and  status 
of  Gentile  and  Jewish  Christians  in  the 
church  of  Jesus  Christ  (Acts  15).  Today, 
we  remember  that  it  was  racial  hatred 
that  ignited  the  fearful  holocaust  of  so 
many  millions  of  Jews.  We  remember 
too  the  fearless  stand  of  Martin  Luther 
King,  Jr.,  who  aroused  the  conscience 
of  church  and  society  alike  to  a re- 
sponsible commitment  to  human  rights 
and  human  dignity  for  all  races.  The 
tragedy  of  racism  drives  us  back  re- 
lentlessly to  Ephesians  2,  where  there 
unfolds  before  our  very  eyes  the  soci- 
ological miracle  of  the  first  century  with 
all  of  its  tremendous  implications  for 
the  twentieth  century.  Jew  and  Gentile 
are  placed  in  one  body  in  Christ.  The 
passage  reverberates  with  the  numeral 
one. 

He  made  us  both  one  . . . that  He 
might  create  in  himself  one  new  per- 
son in  place  of  two  . . . and  might 
reconcile  us  both  to  God  in  one  body 
. . . for  through  Him  we  both  have 
access  in  one  Spirit  to  the  Father  (2:14- 
18). 

The  church  is  called,  not  to  mount 
a peace  “bandwagon,”  but  to  some- 
thing far  more  serious.  The  word  “re- 
member” (2:11)  summons  the  church 
away  from  a theological  amnesia  to  a 
renewed  awareness  of  a peace  that  is 
full  and  profound,  rooted  indelibly  in 
Christ’s  cross.  In  essence,  peace  is  the 
provision  of  Christ  for  the  world,  for 


62 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


He  is  the  one  who  breaks  down  the 
wall  of  hostility,  who  creates  one  new 
person,  thereby  making  peace. 

Today,  peace  and  the  broken  wall, 
in  the  words  of  Markus  Barth,  mean 
“the  end  of  separation  and  segregation, 
the  end  of  enmity  and  contempt,  and 
the  end  of  every  sort  of  ghetto!”  (The 
Broken  Wall , p.  43).  But  beyond  what 
Barth  has  said,  there  is  a frank  confes- 
sional nature  to  our  Scripture,  “For  he 
himself  is  our  peace  ...  so  [he  was] 
making  peace”  (2:14-15).  It  is  confes- 
sional in  the  sense  of  Mark  8:29,  “You 
are  the  Christ,”  or  in  the  sense  of  1 Cor. 
12:3,  “Jesus  is  Lord.” 

“Christ  himself  is  our  peace.”  The 
confession  is  both  clear  and  revealing. 

First,  it  is  comparable  to  the  confes- 
sions in  Second  Isaiah  and  in  the  Fourth 
Gospel  that  express  respectively  the  self- 
revelation and  self-declaration  of  God 
and  of  the  God-Man,  Jesus: 

I am  he,  I am  he  who  blots  out 
your  transgressions  (Isa.  43:25). 

I am  the  bread  of  life  (John  6:35). 

I am  the  way,  the  truth,  and  the 
life  (John  14:6). 

And  so  if  we  should  put  the  confession 
of  Eph.  2:14  on  the  lips  of  the  risen 
Jesus,  it  would  be,  “I  myself  am  your 
peace”  (cf.  John  20:19-23,  26) — imply- 
ing that  our  own  plans  and  programs 
for  peace  must  always  be  subject  to  our 
confession  of  Jesus  as  our  peace. 

John  Bunyan  has  described  the  point 
so  well  in  his  other  masterpiece,  The 
Holy  War.  The  Prince  of  Peace,  Em- 
manuel, successfully  conquers  the  town 
of  ManSoul  and  establishes  his  rule  of 
peace  within.  At  first  the  inhabitants 
visit  the  prince  regularly  and  take  de- 
light in  his  love  feasts.  But  then,  be- 
cause of  the  craftiness  of  a Mr.  Carnal 
Security,  they  begin  to  think  of  them- 


selves— how  impregnable  is  their  town, 
how'  great  are  their  heroic  leaders — and 
they  take  to  feasting  and  sporting  and 
grow  cold  in  their  love  for  Emmanuel 
until  He  withdraws  from  their  town 
and  they  do  not  even  miss  him.  There 
is,  however,  one  ray  of  hope,  the  con- 
tinued presence  in  ManSoul  of  a Mr. 
Godly  Fear  wrho  probes  and  warns  and 
preaches.  Like  a thorn  in  their  side,  he 
calls  to  remembrance  who  they  are  and 
who  is  the  center  of  their  lives.  “I  my- 
self am  your  peace,”  says  the  risen  Jesus. 
Armed  with  this  assurance,  as  com- 
mitted Christians  we  too  are  to  probe 
and  warn,  to  proclaim  to  our  people 
and  nation  that  Christ  is  our  peace. 

Second,  there  is  a breadth  to  the 
confession  for  the  first  century  church 
but  no  less  for  the  church  today.  It  is 
a confession  of  Christians,  but  of  Jewish 
Christians  and  of  Gentile  Christians 
alike.  He  himself  is  our  peace  who  has 
made  the  two  one.  The  terms  Jew  and 
Gentile  in  the  first  century  embraced 
all  people,  for  if  you  were  not  a Jew 
you  were  a Gentile  and  vice  versa.  For 
us  today,  the  confession  is  ecumenical. 
I doubt  seriously  if  we  have  begun  to 
explore  its  potential  power  in  the 
worldwide  church — Malaysian  Chris- 
tians, Christians  in  Indonesia,  China, 
and  India,  in  East  and  West  Germany, 
in  Kenya,  Lebanon,  and  Brazil,  in  Ar- 
gentina and  Great  Britain,  in  El  Sal- 
vador and  the  United  States.  For  Chris- 
tians everywhere  to  recover  or  to  discover 
for  the  first  time  the  timely  meaning 
of  the  confession — this  may  be  our  most 
important  task  for  the  day. 

Third,  the  confession  ends  with  a 
unique  expression,  “making  peace.” 
Ephesians  finds  its  parallel  so  often  in 
Colossians,  where  we  read  similar  words, 
“he  made  peace  through  the  blood  of 
his  cross”  (Col.  1 :2o).  Apart  from  a brief 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


reference  in  James  (3:18),  a comparable 
declaration  is  found  only  in  the  beati- 
tudes of  Jesus,  from  the  sermon  on  the 
mount:  “Blessed  are  the  peacemakers 
for  they  shall  be  called  the  children  of 
God”  (Matt.  5:9).  As  far  as  we  know, 
there  was  no  written  Gospel  of  Mat- 
thew in  circulation  at  the  time  Ephe- 
sians was  written.  But  can  it  be  that 
Paul  was  acquainted  with  the  tradition 
of  the  beatitudes  and  can  it  be  that  he 
is  consciously  reflecting  the  seventh 
beatitude  in  Ephesians  2?  You  are  to 
stretch  your  minds  just  a wee  bit  now 
as  you  see  the  two  similar  expressions 
in  transliterated  Greek  and  as  you  sense 
the  similar  “ring”  which  they  have. 

poion  eirenen 

Eph.  2:14,  “making  peace” 
eirenopoioi 

Matt.  5:9,  “peacemakers” 
cf.  eirenopoiesas 

Col.  1:20,  “having  made 
peace” 

A link  between  the  texts  would  imply 
two  things: 

(a)  It  would  imply  that  the  one  who 
gave  his  special  blessing  to  peacemakers 
demonstrated  in  himself  that  peace- 
making involved  great  personal  sacri- 
fice, for  the  peace  that  he  made  came 
by  way  of  the  cross,  as  Eph.  2:16  affirms 
(cf.  Col.  1:20).  That  is  to  say,  real  hon- 
est-to-goodness  peacemakers  who  re- 
ceive Jesus’  blessing,  according  to  Matt. 
5:9,  are  led  in  Ephesians  2 not  only  to 
Jesus’  sacrificial  example  of  peacemak- 
ing but  to  the  unique  nature  of  his 
“peacemaking”  as  well.  His  was  indeed 
the  solitary  sacrifice,  the  sacrifice  of  the 
sinless  one  for  us  the  sinners.  He,  the 
just  one,  suffered  for  us  the  unjust  that 
he  might  bring  us  to  God.  He  in  his 
own  person  bore  our  sins  in  his  own 
body  on  the  tree.  Our  life  in  Christ  is 


63 

completely  dependent  on  his  life  that 
was  poured  out  for  us.  There  is,  in  brief, 
a deep  indelible  substitutionary  quality 
about  the  peace  that  Jesus  made  through 
the  blood  of  his  cross.  I say  “made,” 
and  yet  the  verb  tense  used  in  Ephe- 
sians is  not  past  but  present,  as  though 
to  describe  what  it  is  that  Jesus  contin- 
ues to  be  about  in  the  world.  Unique 
it  is,  then,  yet  Ephesians  2 suggests  that 
Jesus’  sacrifice  is  also  exemplary.  It  means 
that  Paul’s  word  linked  to  Jesus’  saying 
affirms  that  peacemakers  who  receive 
the  blessing  of  Jesus  must  be  ready  for 
personal  sacrifice — even  to  the  extent 
of  death. 

(b)  A second  implication  emerges  as 
we  join  Eph.  2:15  to  the  beatitude  in 
Matthew  5.  The  peace  that  Jesus  made 
through  his  cross  is  far  more  than  a 
personal  peace  which  you  and  I may 
claim  to  have  with  God.  It  is  more  than 
the  peace  that  the  church  receives 
through  the  preaching  of  the  word  or 
the  celebration  of  holy  communion.  The 
blessing  of  Jesus  on  peacemakers,  in 
Matthew  5,  does  not  mean  a blessing 
on  those  who  merely  claim  to  receive 
and  celebrate  the  peace  and  wholeness 
that  Jesus  brings.  No,  it  means  a bless- 
ing on  those  who  are  reconcilers  wher- 
ever there  may  be  enmity,  hostility, 
hatred,  and  warfare.  What  Jesus 
preached  He  practiced.  He  proclaimed, 
“Blessed  are  the  peacemakers,”  and  “He 
made  peace  through  the  blood  of  his 
cross.”  Peace  in  Eph.  2:14-16,  therefore, 
has  global  consequences.  Jesus  be- 
stowed his  blessing  on  peacemakers.  If 
he  were  here,  he  would  bestow  no 
blessing  on  our  government  which 
spends  more  than  a million  dollars  an 
hour  on  military  arms,  a nation  whose 
peacetime  military  budget  has  escalated 
to  an  all-time  high.  Whether  it  is  known 
or  not,  Ground  Zero  Week  and  the 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


64 

clarion  call  that  is  being  sounded  in 
many  sectors  of  our  nation  for  a halt 
to  nuclear  arms  production  possess  a 
biblical  base  in  Ephesians  2 that  is  lucid 
and  compelling.  The  agonizing  ques- 
tion presses  in  on  us  on  every  side,  a 
question  that  refuses  to  go  away  and 
get  lost:  “To  a nation  that  we  love, 
whose  heritage  we  have  appropriated 
and  much  of  whose  heritage  we  ap- 
preciate, how  do  we,  as  Christ’s  wit- 
nesses, bear  effective  and  sacrificial  wit- 
ness to  the  Christ  who  made  peace 
through  his  cross  and  hence  calls  on  us 
to  be  peacemakers?”  The  question  brings 
us  appropriately  to  the  second  part  of 
our  study.  Peace  is  not  only  the  pro- 
vision of  Christ  for  the  world,  but — 

(2)  Peace  is  the  Purpose  of  God  in 
Christ  for  the  World,  to  be  Channeled  to 
the  World  through  the  Church.  The  word 
“peace”  itself  does  not  actually  occur  in 
chapter  3 but,  given  the  way  in  which 
chapter  2 flows  into  chapter  3,  we  are 
to  understand,  I believe,  that  to  preach 
the  good  news  of  peace  (2:17)  means  to 
proclaim  “the  mystery  of  Christ”  (3:4), 
and  the  “wisdom  of  God”  (3:10)  is 
nothing  less  than  the  peace  which  comes 
through  Christ’s  cross  (2:15-16)  or  the 
confession,  “Christ  Jesus  is  our  peace” 
(2:14). 

The  indication  that  Eph.  3:1-12  con- 
stitutes one  extended  sentence2  points 
to  the  difficulty  we  face  in  grasping 
adequately  the  thought  of  the  apostle. 
Apparently,  Paul’s  intent  is  both  to  un- 
fold the  special  stewardship  of  God’s 
grace  with  which  he  was  entrusted  (3:1- 
9)  and  to  show  no  less  the  awesome 
responsibility  that  is  laid  upon  the  church 
to  proclaim  divine  grace  (3:10-12).  Much 
like  the  pretentious  wrapping  around 
a gift  that  gives  an  aura  of  mystery  to 
the  quality  of  the  gift  within,  so,  when 
1 Thus  the  Westcott-Hort  Greek  text. 


Paul  mentions  “the  mystery  of  Christ,” 
we  wait  in  expectancy  for  him  to  unfold 
the  mysterious  nature  of  the  gracious 
gift.  He  does  so  by  using  three  rare 
expressions  that  affirm  the  singular  re- 
lationship of  Gentile  Christians  with 
Jewish  Christians:  fellow-heirs,  fellow- 
members,  and  fellow-sharers  of  the 
promise  of  Christ  through  the  gospel 
(3:6).  If  peace  means  a broken  barrier 
(Eph.  2),  it  also  means  a bridge  built 
between  hostile  peoples  (Eph.  3).  Jew 
and  Gentile  come  to  realize  that  they 
have  become  siblings,  heirs  of  all  that 
their  Father  offers,  that  their  life  is  or- 
ganically and  socially  intricately  inter- 
twined much  like  the  interrelatedness 
of  members  of  the  human  body,  and 
that  they  share  in  the  promised  Spirit 
and  thus  experience  the  power  that  is 
inherent  in  the  good  news  of  Christ  (cf. 
Acts  2:39). 

But  we  dare  not  forget  two  other 
items  of  great  importance.  First,  the 
very  existence  of  this  interracial  body 
of  Christians  springs  from  God’s  pur- 
pose of  peace  through  Christ.  That  is 
to  say,  Christ’s  body,  his  church,  ap- 
pears in  the  text  nestled  between  “the 
mystery  of  Christ”  on  the  one  hand 
(3:4)  and  “the  free  gift  of  God’s  grace" 
on  the  other  (3:7).  And  second,  it  is 
through  this  body  as  w'ell  as  through 
Paul  that  God  plans  to  carry  the  peace 
of  Christ  to  the  world. 

Paul  stands  in  awe  and  amazement 
before  the  gift  of  God’s  grace  (“less  than 
the  least  of  all  saints”),  yet  he  moves 
irresistibly  to  proclaim  and  interpret  that 
grace  to  all  (3:7-9).  Far  more  than  his 
own  individual  task,  however,  he  is 
concerned  with  the  task  of  the  churchd 
It  is  through  the  church  that  God’s  ul- 
timate purpose  of  peace  may  be  realized 

3 The  hina  clause  in  3:10  (“in  order  that”) 
makes  this  clear. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


65 


in  the  world  (3:10-11).  I say  “in  the 
world,”  though  Paul  speaks  of  the  ob- 
ject of  God’s  peace  as  “the  principalities 
and  powers  in  the  heavenly  realm”  (3:10). 
The  terms  “principalities  and  powers” 
occur  in  three  places  in  the  letter.  They 
are  said  to  be,  ultimately,  under  the 
control  of  the  risen  Christ  (1:21,  cf.  1 
Cor.  15:24),  to  be  the  adversaries  of  the 
Christian  church  (6:12)  and  at  the  same 
time  to  be  the  objects  of  her  witness 
(3:10).  It  is  extremely  doubtful  that,  by 
these  terms,  Paul  reflects  a gnostic  or 
mythical  view,  as  some  have  imagined. 
After  all,  he  uses  one  of  these  two  terms 
(i.e.,  “powers”)  to  describe  the  very 
mundane  Roman  government  of  his  own 
day  (Rom.  13:1-2).  Given  his  own  com- 
mitment to  evangelism  of  men  and 
women  in  all  walks  of  life  (cf.  Acts 
26:22),  it  cannot  be  that  he  encouraged 
any  less  of  a commitment  for  the  church. 
Yet  it  is  indeed  curious  that  the  goal  of 
his  own  mission  is  “the  nations”  (3:8) 
while  the  mission  of  the  church  is  to 
“principalities  and  powers”  (3:10).  Is 
there  indicated  here  part  of  the  great- 
ness of  Paul  in  that  he  can  sense  that 
the  corporate  witness  of  the  church  ex- 
ceeds by  far  his  own  individual  wit- 
ness? But  the  basic  question  is  whether 
the  church  of  Christ  has  caught  the 
vision  of  God’s  goal  that  is  indicated  in 
3:10.  The  phrase  “principalities  and 
powers  in  the  heavenly  places”  suggests 
both  demonic  persons  behind  these  rul- 
ing forces  (cf.  6:12-16)  as  well  as  the 
pervasive  nature  of  the  power  which 
they  wield  (cf.  1 Cor.  15:24,  “when  he 
shall  render  ineffective  every  princi- 
pality and  every  authority  and  power”). 
Markus  Barth  seems  to  be  right  on  tar- 
get when  he  explains: 

Paul  means  by  principalities  and 

powers  those  institutions  and  struc- 


tures by  which  earthly  matters  and 
invisible  realms  are  administered,  and 
without  which  no  human  life  is  pos- 
sible. The  superior  power  of  nature 
epitomized  by  life  and  death;  the  ups 
and  downs  of  historic  processes;  the 
nature  and  impact  of  favored  pro- 
totypes or  the  catastrophic  burdens 
of  the  past;  the  hope  or  threat  offered 
to  the  present  by  the  future;  the  might 
of  capitalists,  rulers,  judges;  the  ben- 
efit and  onus  of  laws  of  tradition  and 
custom;  the  distinction  and  similar- 
ity of  political  and  religious  prac- 
tices; the  weight  of  ideologies  and 
prejudices;  the  conditions  under 
which  all  authority,  labor,  parent- 
hood, etc.,  thrive  or  are  crushed — 
these  structures  and  institutions  are 
in  Paul’s  mind  ( Ephesians , 1-3,  p.  174). 

There  will  be  times  when  we  sense  that 
these  structures  or  powers  are  of  God 
(Romans  13),  but,  on  the  other  hand, 
we  may  often  find  them  to  be  inspired 
by  the  evil  one.  Ephesians  6 tells  us  of 
the  real  spiritual  warfare  which  men 
and  women  of  God  are  to  wage  against 
principalities  and  powers,  against  the 
world-rulers  of  this  present  darkness. 
And,  by  the  way,  these  Christian  men 
and  women  not  only  are  to  wear  the 
breastplate  of  righteousness  but  to  have 
their  feet  shod  with  the  equipment  of 
the  gospel  of  peace  (Eph.  6:15).  Appro- 
priately now,  as  we  come  to  the  close 
of  our  study,  we  discover  that  the  wit- 
ness of  the  church  to  the  world  (3:10- 
12)  is  buttressed  by  Paul’s  prayer  that 
the  church  be  gripped  and  held  (“rooted” 
and  “grounded”)  in  Christ’s  measure- 
less love  (3:13-19).  And,  as  a fitting  con- 
clusion to  the  passage,  Paul  ascribes  all 
praise  to  God  (3:20-21).  And  so,  enmity 
between  nations  and  the  militarism  of 
any  one  nation  can  be  countered  effec- 


66 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


tively  only  by  a people  who  are  rooted 
and  grounded  in  the  love  of  Christ  (3:17) 
demonstrated  in  his  cross.  A friend  of 
mine  put  it  this  way: 

The  cross  is  a declaration  that  there 
is  no  violence  so  horrid,  no  despair 
so  comprehensive,  no  mindless  bru- 
tality so  thorough-going  that  it  is  be- 
yond the  pale  of  God’s  peace.  The 
cross  is  “the  more  excellent  way.” 
The  cross  with  all  its  horror  becomes 
in  fact  our  hope.  God  wills  his  peace 
and  the  world  cannot  contradict  it. 
The  cross — irony  of  ironies — is  the 
consummation  of  the  angelic  song, 
“peace  on  earth”  (Dr.  John  McCoy). 

Here  then,  my  brothers  and  sisters, 
in  Eph.  2:1 1-3:21,  is  the  message  of  peace 
which,  I believe,  God  would  give  to  the 
world  through  the  church  today.  Ours 
is  a world  of  which  God  has  a purpose, 
a world  of  axioms,  of  religion,  of  pol- 
itics, of  history,  and  of  culture.  And 
what  is  that  purpose?  It  is  that  the  wis- 
dom of  God  be  made  known  to  this 
very  world  through  the  church.  God’s 
wisdom  is  nothing  other  than  the  peace 
of  Christ  that  comes  through  the  cross, 
for  1 Cor.  1:23  tells  us,  “We  preach 
Christ  crucified  . . . Christ  the  power  of 
God  and  the  wisdom  of  God.” 

The  Revised  Standard  Version  af- 


firms that  the  wisdom  of  God  is  “man- 
ifold” (3:10).  The  word  occurs  only  here 
in  the  whole  New  Testament.  Does  it 
mean  many-faceted,  variegated,  many- 
sided?  How  would  Paul  intend  for  us 
to  describe  it  in  English?  The  picture 
which  comes  to  my  mind  is  the  kalei- 
doscope with  its  small  cardboard  tele- 
scope. With  each  successive  shake  of 
the  hand  you  peer  through  the  tele- 
scope only  to  see  ever-succeeding  scenes 
of  ornamental  beauty  and  arrangement 
which  point  to  some  imaginative  cre- 
ator who  put  it  all  together.  And  so  the 
kaleidoscopic  wisdom  of  God,  the  many- 
faceted  peace  of  God,  is  to  be  channeled 
through  the  church  to  the  principalities 
and  powers  of  our  own  day  whose 
growing  stockpiles  of  weapons  of  de- 
struction are  designed  to  wipe  out  cities 
and  people  en  masse.  To  confess  that 
Christ  Jesus  is  our  peace  in  the  face  of 
the  devious  and  demonic  militarism  of 
our  day  demands  from  us  far  greater 
wisdom  than  you  and  I possess.  And 
yet  to  be  called  sons  and  daughters  of 
God  means  that  we  are  inevitably 
peacemakers  who  follow  in  the  path  of 
Him  who  made  peace  and  makes  peace 
through  the  blood  of  his  cross  for, 
through  us,  God  deigns  to  make  known 
his  variegated  wisdom  which  implies, 
preeminently,  his  global  peace  through 
Christ. 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


The  Faith  of  the  Old  Testament:  A History , 
by  Werner  H.  Schmidt,  translated  by  John 
Sturdy.  Westminster  Press,  Philadelphia, 
PA,  1983.  Pp.  x + 302.  $24.95. 

One  of  the  more  interesting  debates  in  con- 
temporary Old  Testament  scholarship  concerns 
the  perspective  from  which  that  body  of  liter- 
ature should  be  described.  The  debate  normally 
centers  on  the  problem  of  reconciling  histori- 
cally oriented  descriptions  with  the  religious  or 
theological  interests  that  most  Old  Testament 
scholars  have,  either  explicitly  or  implicitly,  in 
studying  just  this  collection  of  texts.  Werner  H. 
Schmidt,  one  of  the  more  interesting  of  the 
younger  generation  of  German  scholars,  is  among 
those  who  believe  that,  at  least  in  the  case  of 
the  Old  Testament,  historical  and  theological 
interests  tend  to  converge.  Thus,  according  to 
the  foreword  by  J.  R.  Porter,  Schmidt  intends 
this  book  to  stand  midway  between  a “history 
of  Old  Testament  religion”  and  a “theology  of 
the  Old  Testament.”  I presume  that  this  is  the 
reason  for  the  somewhat  awkward  title,  The 
Faith  of  the  Old  Testament.  People  may  have  faith 
(or  a faith),  but  books  cannot.  Schmidt  intends 
his  book  to  be  a description  of  Israel’s  faith  for 
our  knowledge,  of  which  the  Old  Testament  is 
the  principal  source. 

Schmidt  is  careful  to  emphasize  that  he  is 
interested  in  Israel’s  faith,  and  not  only  its  re- 
ligion. This  means  for  him  that  a great  deal  of 
attention  is  given  to  an  account  of  what  Israel 
believed,  on  the  presumption  that  its  religion 
was  an  expression  of  its  beliefs  and  that  Israel’s 
beliefs,  on  the  other  hand,  exercised  a critical 
control  on  the  forms  that  its  religion  could  take. 
According  to  Schmidt  the  critical  norm  of  Is- 
rael’s faith  is  provided  by  the  first  two  com- 
mandments, with  the  first  commandment  pro- 
viding the  “integrating  center”  of  the  Old 
Testament  (p.  278).  He  argues  not  that  the  Dec- 
alogue is  early  or  that  the  first  commandment 
came  to  independent  expression  at  the  begin- 
ning of  Israel’s  history,  but  that  it  is  impossible 
to  conceive  of  Israel’s  faith  apart  from  Yahweh’s 
exclusive  role  within  it.  At  the  same  time  Schmidt 
recognizes  that  the  way  Yahweh  was  conceived, 
and  particularly  the  way  Yahweh’s  relation  to 
Israel  and  the  world  was  conceived,  changed  in 
important  ways  during  the  course  of  Israel’s 
history.  For  that  reason  any  adequate  account 
of  Israel’s  faith  will  have  to  be  historical  in  ori- 


entation, and  will  at  the  same  time  be  theological 
to  the  extent  that  it  shows  the  way  in  which  the 
first  commandment  functioned  to  limit  the  kinds 
of  historical  development  which  Israel  could 
permit. 

The  theological  nature  of  this  task  is  em- 
phasized by  Schmidt  in  the  claim  that  the  his- 
tory of  Israel’s  faith  is  at  the  same  time  the 
history  of  God.  This  is  true  not  only  because 
Yahweh  is  conceived  differently  in  different  his- 
torical circumstances,  but  because  these  histor- 
ical circumstances  are  in  part  definitive  of  who 
Yahweh  is.  Thus  history  becomes,  together  with 
the  first  and  second  commandments,  a critical 
norm  for  Israel’s  faith.  Schmidt  is  careful  to 
explain  that  no  one  event  can  be  picked  out 
which  grounds  these  three  norms.  They  are  not 
part  of  a description  of  Israel’s  faith.  Rather, 
they  are  the  antecedent  conditions  which  make 
such  a faith  possible  and  a description  of  this 
faith  must  show  how  they  functioned  to  give 
Israel’s  religion  the  character  which  distin- 
guishes it  from  its  environment. 

The  bulk  of  the  book  carries  out  this  assign- 
ment. Schmidt  shows  consistently  how  Israel’s 
religion  appropriated  religious  practices  and 
conceptions  from  its  neighbors,  particularly  Ca- 
naan, but  also  Egypt  and  Mesopotamia,  and 
modified  them  in  accordance  with  the  demands 
of  the  first  two  commandments  and  Yahweh’s 
involvement  in  Israel’s  history.  The  book  is  es- 
pecially helpful  in  that  it  does  not  present  the 
religion  of  Canaan,  for  example,  as  the  negative 
foil  against  which  to  portray  Israel.  Rather, 
Schmidt  shows  how  Israel  accommodated  a va- 
riety of  religious  conceptions  and  imagery  to  its 
own  purposes  which  can  be  understood  only  if 
Israel  is  considered  in  terms  of  the  larger  reli- 
gious and  historical  milieu.  Thus  constant  ref- 
erence is  made  to  texts  from  the  environment 
which  Israel  shared  with  its  neighbors. 

The  book  is  divided  into  four  parts  corre- 
sponding to  four  historical  epochs:  the  period 
before  the  conquest,  the  period  prior  to  the  mon- 
archy, the  monarchy,  and  “the  late  period.”  The 
largest  of  these  sections  is  the  first,  which  Schmidt 
calls  “Nomadic  Prehistory.”  He  is  in  agreement 
with  traditional  scholarship  in  explaining  the 
patriarchs  as  nomads  who  yearn  for  a settled 
life  in  the  land  and  who,  having  attained  it, 
combine  their  nomadic  religion  with  the  El  cult 
of  Canaan.  The  appeal  to  nomadic  origins,  which 
appears  throughout  the  book,  is  particularly  in 
need  of  revision.  Schmidt  does  not  interact  with 


68 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


scholarship  outside  of  Europe  on  this  or  any 
other  question,  and  it  is  a marked  deficiency  of 
the  book.  Still,  there  is  much  that  is  worthwhile 
in  his  discussion,  particularly  for  students. 

The  most  useful  part  of  his  treatment  of  the 
pre-monarchic  period  is  the  discussion  of  “cov- 
enant,” which  is  a subject  still  hotly  debated 
among  scholars.  Schmidt  is  skeptical  of  com- 
parisons between  Israelite  “covenant”  texts  and 
Hittite  and  other  treaties.  He  argues  that  any 
such  comparisons  must  be  preceded  by  tradi- 
tional-historical investigation,  and  that  such  in- 
vestigation shows  that  the  covenant  form  ex- 
hibited, for  example,  in  Exodus  19-24  is  the 
product  of  later  redaction  of  originally  inde- 
pendent traditions.  In  this  conclusion  he  is  surely 
correct.  He  argues  further  that  the  form  of  Is- 
raelite covenant  texts  can  be  explained  more 
profitably  in  terms  of  their  own  situation  of  legal 
proclamation  than  in  terms  of  borrowing  from 
international  treaty  forms.  In  fact,  he  claims, 
such  borrowing  in  later  periods  may  have  arisen 
from  the  covenant  character  of  Israel’s  relation 
to  Yahweh.  These  points  will  continue  to  be 
debated,  but  the  debate  will  have  to  take  into 
account  the  points  Schmidt  makes  persuasively. 

Schmidt’s  description  of  Israel’s  faith  in  the 
monarchic  period  is  particularly  concerned  with 
the  changes  that  the  transition  to  kingship  brought 
about.  In  my  estimation  this  is  the  strongest 
portion  of  the  book.  Particularly  notable  is  his 
discussion  of  prophecy  in  which  he  argues  that 
stronger  connections  should  be  seen  among  all 
Israel’s  prophets.  Prophecy,  he  suggests,  may 
constitute  a coherent  tradition  or  institution  of 
its  own  and  that  future  research  should  concern 
itself  more  with  establishing  continuities  among 
the  various  prophets,  rather  than  considering 
prophets  merely  as  individual  spokesmen  for 
particular  theological  traditions.  This  is  an  ex- 
tremely valuable  suggestion. 

The  chapter  on  wisdom,  which  concludes  the 
section  on  the  monarchy,  is  not  particularly 
helpful.  Indeed,  this  chapter  and  the  concluding 
section  on  the  late  period,  concerned  especially 
with  apocalyptic,  are  the  weakest  parts  of  the 
book.  It  is  clear  that  Schmidt’s  real  interest  lies 
in  the  earlier  periods  of  Israel’s  history  and  the 
later  chapters  often  devolve  into  mere  sum- 
maries of  the  material.  It  is  interesting  that  so 
little  attention  is  given  to  the  period  after  the 
monarchy,  which  produced  such  a large  portion 
of  Israel’s  literature,  while  the  dubitable  “no- 
madic” period  receives  the  greatest  attention. 

For  the  most  part  the  book  is  clearly  written 
and  well  translated.  There  are,  however,  indi- 


cations of  hasty  editing.  In  several  places  Schmidt’s 
points  are  confused  by  the  translation,  and  I can 
make  no  sense  whatever  of  the  middle  of  page 
139.  Since  the  book  is  intended  for  students 
more  ample  documentation  of  sources  would  be 
especially  helpful,  as  would  references  to  works 
in  English  translation — or  even  works  written 
by  English  speaking  scholars!  In  spite  of  these 
remarks  I would  highly  recommend  this  work 
to  those  interested  in  the  Old  Testament.  Schmidt 
displays  an  unusual  degree  of  theological  sen- 
sitivity, exemplified  especially  in  the  eight  ex- 
curses on  various  subjects  scattered  throughout 
the  book.  The  book  has  gone  through  four  edi- 
tions in  German;  may  it  be  as  successful  in  Eng- 
lish. 

Ben  C.  Ollenburcer 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 

Women  Recounted:  Narrative  Thinking  and 
the  God  of  Israel , by  James  G.  Williams. 
(Bible  and  Literature  Series,  No.  6,  ed.  David 
M.  Gunn.)  Almond  Press,  Sheffield,  Eng- 
land, 1982.  Pp.  150.  $10.95  (paper). 

Women  Recounted  is  the  second  study  by  Wil- 
liams to  be  published  in  the  Bible  and  Literature 
Series  by  Almond  Press.  His  earlier  work.  Those 
Who  Ponder  Proverbs  (1981),  examined  aphoristic 
discourse  in  biblical  literature.  In  the  present 
volume  he  turns  his  attention  to  the  narrative 
mode  of  thinking,  focusing  specifically  upon 
biblical  narratives  that  involve  significant  female 
characters.  The  purpose  of  this  study,  he  de- 
clares, is  both  literary  and  theological.  On  one 
front,  he  proposes  to  show  that  biblical  narrative 
represents  a dynamic  mode  of  thinking  and  at- 
taining knowledge.  On  the  other,  he  is  con- 
cerned to  show  the  function  of  the  feminine  and 
its  theological  significance. 

Williams  accomplishes  his  dual  purpose  with 
limited  success.  His  work  shows  greatest  strength 
when  he  is  directly  engaged  in  literary  analysis 
of  the  text.  He  reads  the  selected  narratives  with 
special  attention  to  key  words,  typic  scenes,  and 
the  nuances  of  dialogue.  The  methodology  he 
applies  to  the  text  closely  follows  that  of  Robert 
Alter  in  his  book.  The  Art  of  Biblical  Narrative 
(Basic  Books,  1981).  Indeed,  much  ot  Williams’ 
work  serves  to  reiterate  or  elaborate  upon  the 
observations  of  Alter. 

The  biblical  narratives  that  involve  the  arche- 
mothers  of  Israel  serve  as  the  starting  point  of 
Williams’  study.  By  “arche-mother”  he  means 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


69 


not  only  the  wives  and  mothers  of  the  patriarchs, 
but  all  those  women  who  affect  the  genesis  and 
destiny  of  Israel.  These  include  the  mother  of 
Moses,  Pharaoh’s  daughter,  Zipporah,  Hannah, 
and  the  mother  of  Samson,  as  well  as  Sarah, 
Rebecca,  and  Rachel.  Williams  examines  the 
narratives  in  which  these  women  appear  and 
finds  in  them  a series  of  typic  scenes.  These 
involve  scenes  of  betrothal,  wife-sister  ruses,  the 
struggles  of  the  barren  woman,  and  the  birth 
of  a promised  son.  Within  the  context  of  these 
scenes  Williams  demonstrates  the  role  of  the 
arche-mother  as  a mediating  agent  who  stands 
between  the  chosen  male  and  a frequently  hos- 
tile world.  Her  primary  function  in  the  biblical 
narrative  is  to  provide  nurture  and  continuity 
within  the  compass  of  the  divine  covenant  with 
Israel. 

The  paradigm  of  the  arche-mother  is  not, 
however,  the  only  feminine  role  found  in  bib- 
lical narrative.  Williams  also  examines  the  sto- 
ries of  women  who  deviate  to  varying  degrees 
from  the  matriarchal  model.  Deborah  and  Ju- 
dith are  honored  as  leaders  in  Israel  while  Esther 
and  Ruth  are  held  in  esteem  as  heroines  of  less 
militant  action.  Yet  even  in  the  characters  of 
these  women  Williams  discovers  traces  of  the 
arche-mother’s  role.  Deborah,  the  warrior 
woman,  is  also  described  as  “a  mother  in  Israel” 
while  Ruth,  the  Moabite  woman,  is  named  as 
the  ancestress  of  King  David.  So  pervasive  is 
this  matriarchal  model  that  its  imprint  may  be 
discerned  in  reverse  in  the  biblical  figure  of  the 
temptress,  personified  by  Delilah  and  the  wife 
of  Potiphar.  These  women  represent  counter- 
order in  that  they  turn  their  sexuality  to  de- 
structive rather  than  generative  purposes.  They 
thereby  become  a threat  to  the  hero  rather  than 
a source  of  nurture  and  protection. 

Williams’  analysis  of  the  narratives  in  which 
these  women  appear  does  not  attempt  to  deny 
the  patriarchal  bias  of  the  text.  He  readily  ac- 
knowledges that  the  arche-mother  is  not  as  closely 
related  to  God  as  the  chosen  male,  even  though 
she  functions  as  life-giver  to  the  elect  one.  Her 
role  is  defined  primarily  in  terms  of  her  rela- 
tionship to  the  male  as  wife  and  mother.  When 
she  has  performed  her  function  vis-a-vis  the 
hero  of  the  story,  she  disappears  from  the  nar- 
rative, not  to  be  mentioned  again  unless  it  is  to 
note  her  death.  Williams  admits,  furthermore, 
that  when  women  move  beyond  the  confines  of 
the  family  to  take  up  leadership  roles  within 
Israel,  their  actions  are  frequently  viewed  as 
contrary  to  the  natural  order.  He  argues  that 
the  narrative  of  Judges  is  based  upon  the  as- 


sumption that  the  prominence  of  a woman  such 
as  Deborah  is  intrinsically  related  to  the  social 
upheaval  of  that  period.  The  biblical  writer  im- 
plies that  women  are  in  a position  to  affect  the 
course  of  history  only  when  the  times  are  out 
of  joint.  Their  positions  of  prominence  within 
Israel  function  as  a divine  reminder  to  men  that 
they  do  not  rule  by  their  own  power  or  au- 
thority. 

Despite  the  patriarchal  perspective  from  which 
biblical  history  is  narrated,  Williams  wants  to 
find  in  the  stories  of  women  some  theological 
truth  that  can  transcend  the  cultural  context  in 
which  it  is  embedded.  The  radical  difference 
between  the  roles  assigned  to  Israelite  women 
and  those  that  are  open  to  contemporary  women 
prohibits  a simplistic  appropriation  of  biblical 
models.  Unfortunately,  Williams’  proposal  for 
drawing  theological  meaning  across  this  vast 
cultural  gap  provides  few  significant  results.  He 
suggests  that  biblical  interpreters  proceed 
aphoristically,  drawing  out  of  the  culturally- 
conditioned  narratives  some  fragment  of  speech 
or  action  that  can  transcend  its  context  and  speak 
directly  to  the  contemporary  reader.  By  means 
of  this  methodology,  Williams  claims  that  we 
can  comprehend  and  communicate  something 
about  God  and  humankind.  He  admits,  how- 
ever, that  the  results  may  be  limited;  just  how 
limited  is  immediately  apparent  from  Williams’ 
own  application  of  the  aphoristic  method  he 
espouses.  The  results,  which  consume  the  space 
of  less  than  one  page,  may  be  judged  meager  at 
best.  If,  as  Williams  maintains,  he  is  not  engaged 
in  literary  analysis  for  its  own  sake  but  is  seri- 
ously concerned  with  the  theological  import  of 
biblical  narratives  about  women,  he  is  under 
obligation  to  demonstrate  the  application  of  his 
method  at  greater  length.  Although  he  has  pro- 
vided new  insights  into  the  literary  motifs  that 
recur  in  biblical  narrative,  he  has  failed  to  con- 
tribute to  our  understanding  of  the  theological 
significance  of  women's  stories.  Readers  who 
come  to  this  book  in  hope  of  finding  fresh  the- 
ological reflection  upon  the  subject  will  find 
themselves  disappointed. 

Elizabeth  Gaines 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 


7° 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Colossians,  Philemon,  by  Peter  T.  O’Brien. 
(Word  Biblical  Commentary,  44,  ed.  by 
Ralph  P.  Martin.)  Word  Books,  Waco,  TX, 
1982.  Pp.  liv  + 328.  $18.95. 

If  Ernest  Best  is  right  that  commentaries  are 
basic  in  a minister’s  library,  then  Peter  T. 
O’Brien's  volume  represents  a worthy  addition. 
O’Brien,  who  is  professor  of  New  Testament  at 
Moore  Theological  College,  Newton,  New  South 
Wales,  Australia,  trained  at  the  University  of 
London  and  of  Manchester.  His  previous  pub- 
lications include  Introductory  Thanksgivings  in 
the  Letters  of  Paul  (1977).  This  new  work,  cov- 
ering well  trodden  ground,  invites  comparison 
with  other  commentaries  available  in  English. 
O’Brien’s  book  is  far  longer  than  the  neat  little 
work  of  C.  F.  D.  Moule  (1957);  less  homiletical 
and  less  theologically  directed  than  E.  Schweizer 
(1981);  and  less  interested  in  the  abundance  of 
Hellenistic  literature  than  E.  Lohse  (1971).  Yet 
he  uses  them  all  and  more  in  developing  an 
extensive  bibliographical  base.  The  result  is  of 
sizeable  proportions,  reminding  the  reader  in  a 
quantitative  sense  of  the  Kaesemann,  Commen- 
tary on  Romans , but  treating  Colossians  from  a 
very  different  point  of  view,  as  one  would  expect 
of  a commentary  in  a series  organized  at  Fuller 
Theological  Seminary. 

Consistent  with  the  best  side  of  the  conser- 
vative tradition,  primary  attention  is  given  to 
the  Greek  text,  supplemented  by  abundant  ref- 
erences to  recent  scholarly  discussions  of  the  text 
itself.  While  O’Brien  has  his  own  positions,  he 
gives  extensive  reports  of  other  possible  inter- 
pretations. 

Fifty-four  pages  are  devoted  to  discussion  of 
general  topics  on  Colossians,  followed  by  261 
pages  of  tightly  packed  commentary.  In  the  in- 
troductory pages  he  makes  frequent  use  of 
F.  O.  Francis  and  W.  A.  Meeks,  Conflict  at 
Colossae  (1975),  a book,  by  the  way,  dedicated 
to  Paul  W.  Meyer  of  the  Princeton  Seminary 
faculty. 

O’Brien  makes  a case  for  Pauline  authorship 
of  Colossians.  He  finds  many  parallels  with  other 
letters  of  Paul  as  to  language  and  style,  sum- 
moning W.  Kuemmel  for  support  (xliv,  xlix). 
He  differs  with  E.  Lohse,  who  centered  the 
christology  of  Colossians  in  1:15-20.  O’Brien 
contends  that  the  letter  as  a whole  supports  the 
universal  lordship  of  Christ,  Paul’s  theme  in  I 
Cor.  12:12-27,  Romans  12:4-5.  Colossians  con- 
tains a realized  eschatology,  a position  to  which 
Paul  gradually  moved  late  in  his  life  (p.  171). 


He  rejects  the  view  of  Kaesemann  that  1:15-20 
is  a pre-Christian  Gnostic  hymn,  taken  over  by 
the  Christians  for  a baptismal  liturgy.  He  denies 
that  Colossians  is  part  of  a post-Pauline  tradition 
when  the  apostolic  office  functioned  as  the 
guardian  of  truth,  a position  shared  by  Lohse 
and  Kaesemann.  For  O’Brien,  Colossians  is  clearly 
an  occasional  letter  written  to  address  a specific 
need  in  the  church  (xlvii).  The  wording  of  3:22f. 
and  4:9f.  looks  toward  a relationship  with  the 
letter  to  Philemon.  Both  are  prison  letters,  writ- 
ten not  from  Caesarea,  but  preferably  from  Rome, 
since  Colossians  reflects  the  thinking  of  the  later 
Paul,  which  would  rule  out  Ephesus. 

The  commentary  proper  follows  a definite 
pattern.  Each  section  discussed  opens  with  a 
basic  bibliography,  then  a translation,  followed 
by  discussion  of  technical  points  in  a section 
called:  “Form,  Structure,  Setting,”  which  is  also 
peppered  with  bibliographical  references,  and 
finally  two  sections  of  a more  expository  nature 
called  “Comment”  and  “Explanation.”  As  one 
might  expect  from  a well  schooled  conservative 
a firm  foundation  is  formed  by  references  to 
works  in  grammar  and  lexicography,  including 
appreciation  at  many  points  of  the  work  of 

B.  Metzger.  Despite  an  affection  for  the  works 
of  F.  F.  Bruce,  J.  B.  Lightfoot,  R.  P.  Martin, 

C.  F.  D.  Moule,  and  F.  Zeilinger,  O’Brien  is  not 
above  making  use  of  the  thinking  of  writers 
whose  presuppositions  he  does  not  share. 

In  the  discussion  of  Colossians  3:18-4:1  he 
would  limit  the  use  of  Luther’s  term  “Haus- 
tafel”  to  such  exhortations  as  are  found  in  this 
passage,  paralleled  in  Ephesians,  with  pairs  and 
reciprocal  duties  (p.  215).  He  also  amplifies  his 
usual  treatment  to  consider  whether  the  back- 
ground of  this  passage  was  based  on  a Hellen- 
istic code,  a Christian  code,  or  a Hellenistic  Jew- 
ish code. 

The  book  closes  with  43  pages  of  discussion 
ot  Philemon,  more  space  devoted  to  that  letter 
than  one  finds  in  the  work  of  E.  Lohse.  O’Brien 
interrelates  the  personal  references  at  the  close 
of  Colossians  with  those  in  Philemon,  but  he 
does  not  accept  the  theories  of  John  Knox,  whose 
position  has  been  weakened  by  the  almost 
wholesale  rejection  of  Pauline  authorship  for 
Colossians. 

Despite  this  reviewer’s  admiration  for  the 
enormous  effort  exerted  by  O’Brien,  a few  mi- 
nor questions  can  be  raised.  Is  his  translation  of 
Colossians  1:5,  6 put  in  the  best  possible  style 
of  English:  “You  have  heard  about  this  hope 
before  when  the  word  of  truth,  the  gospel,  first 
came  to  you.”  On  page  84  there  is  an  error  in 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


71 


the  spelling  of  the  Aramaic  word  for  ‘‘secret.” 
Is  page  216  complete?  There  appears  to  be  some- 
thing missing  at  the  bottom  of  the  page.  One 
printing  of  the  book  has  a mixup  in  the  last 
pages  of  the  indices,  but  we  are  assured  by  the 
publisher  that  this  error  has  been  corrected.  Fi- 
nally while  there  are  indices  at  the  close  of  the 
book,  they  could  have  been  somewhat  more  ex- 
tensive. After  all  his  hard  work,  O’Brien  de- 
served the  help  of  an  editorial  assistant. 

Otto  Reimherr 

Susquehanna  University 

The  Church , by  Wolfhart  Pannenberg, 
trans.  by  Keith  Crim.  The  Westminster 
Press,  Philadelphia,  1983.  Pp.  189.  $10.95. 

This  work,  which  is  a translation  of  the  sec- 
ond half  of  a book  originally  published  in  Ger- 
man in  1977,  Ethi\  und  EEklesiologie , is  not  a 
fully  developed  ecclesiology.  Rather,  it  is  a col- 
lection of  essays  that  deals  with  some  of  the 
major  themes  of  ecclesiology  in  light  of  a strongly 
articulated  concern  for  the  unity  of  the  church. 
In  fact,  all  but  chapters  one  and  three  were 
previously  published  in  other  places.  In  spite  of 
this,  however,  these  essays  hold  together  very 
well,  mainly  because  of  a consistent  focus  on 
theological  foundations  and  resources  for  unity 
in  the  church. 

The  first  essay  sets  the  stage  for  those  that 
follow  by  underscoring  the  vital  importance  of 
unity  among  the  churches — its  achievement,  ac- 
cording to  Pannenberg,  is  “Christianity’s  most 
important  task  in  our  century.”  Pannenberg  then 
turns  to  an  examination  of  the  theological  foun- 
dation of  the  church’s  unity,  Jesus  Christ,  and 
explores  how  unity  is  both  a reality  and  a goal. 
The  significance  of  eschatology  for  a proper  un- 
derstanding of  Christian  unity  begins  to  emerge 
in  the  next  section,  in  which  Pannenberg  argues 
that  the  common  past  of  the  churches  has  mean- 
ing to  the  degree  that  it  has  its  starting  point 
and  final  goal  in  Jesus  and  his  resurrection.  And 
in  the  following  essay  this  eschatological  ori- 
entation provides  a fruitful  perspective  from 
which  to  explore  the  apostolicity  and  catholicity 
of  the  church.  The  next  three  essays  deal  with 
denominationalism,  the  major  contribution  that 
the  Reformation  can  offer  a unified  Christianity, 
and  an  ecumenical  understanding  of  church  of- 
fices. These  are  followed  by  two  rich  essays  on 
the  Lord’s  Supper,  the  sacrament  of  Christian 
unity.  And  a concluding  essay  widens  the  ho- 


rizon to  examine  Christianity’s  relation  to  other 
religions  and  to  society  as  a whole. 

This  book  has  many  fine  points,  not  the  least 
of  which  is  the  power  with  which  Pannenberg 
argues  for  the  necessity  of  Christian  unity.  He 
may  have  exaggerated  the  degree  to  which  en- 
mity between  churches  has  contributed  to  the 
secularism  of  modern  society.  But  he  is  on  the 
mark  when  he  suggests  that  our  very  identity 
as  Christians  is  threatened  by  the  divided  state 
of  Christianity.  For,  as  this  book  points  out  so 
well,  the  division  among  the  denominations  is 
directly  contrary  to  the  church’s  nature  as  a 
symbol  and  instrument  of  the  final  unity  of  hu- 
mankind in  the  Kingdom  of  God.  A lack  of 
unity,  therefore,  represents  the  failure  of  the 
church  to  remain  faithful  to  its  calling  and  to 
make  concrete  the  unity  that  God  has  already 
created  in  Jesus  Christ.  Pannenberg  also  effec- 
tively makes  the  point  that  the  existence  of  sep- 
arated denominations  signals  in  a way  the  fail- 
ure of  the  Reformation,  since  the  goal  of  the 
Reformers  was  to  reform  all  of  Christianity  rather 
than  to  create  new  churches.  It  indeed  the  fires 
of  ecumenism  are  beginning  to  flicker  in  some 
quarters,  a consideration  of  Pannenberg’s  ar- 
guments for  the  importance  of  Christian  unity 
should  help  to  rekindle  them. 

Pannenberg’s  discussion  of  the  Lord’s  Supper 
is  also  good.  He  is  concerned  to  stress  the  cen- 
trality of  this  sacrament  for  Christian  worship 
and  to  highlight  its  significance  as  a symbol  of 
Christian  unity.  He  also  offers  a brief  but 
thoughtful  discussion  of  the  concept  of  sacra- 
ment itself — which  he  maintains  should  be  de- 
veloped only  after  a careful  consideration  of  the 
nature  of  the  individual  sacraments.  And  his 
treatment  of  the  recent  interpretations  of  the 
Lord’s  Supper  in  terms  of  the  concept  of  “tran- 
signification”  is  lucid  and  suggestive.  But  per- 
haps the  most  valuable  aspect  of  this  discussion 
is  the  way  in  which  he  makes  use  of  an  escha- 
tological perspective.  He  argues  that,  since  the 
Lord’s  Supper  represents  the  unity  that  God  has 
already  created  but  will  not  bring  to  full  flower 
until  the  end,  churches  need  not  wait  until  they 
have  ironed  out  all  of  the  differences  between 
them,  even  important  differences,  to  celebrate 
this  sacrament  together.  On  the  contrary,  such 
a common  celebration  would  be  an  expression 
of  faith  in  what  God  has  done  and  will  do  to 
bring  humankind  together  in  spite  of  its  present 
divisions.  The  Lord’s  Supper  would  thereby  bear 
witness  to  a reality  that  precedes  and  always 
transcends  our  understanding  of  the  faith,  a reality 
that  is  ahead  of  us  and  yet  already  active  among 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


72 

us.  On  the  other  hand,  Pannenberg  also  roots 
the  Lord’s  Supper  in  |esus‘  practice  of  sharing 
table  fellowship  with  tax  collectors  and  sinners. 
In  this  way,  he  provides  a solid  theological 
grounding  not  only  for  the  practice  of  “open 
communion”  between  denominations  but  also 
for  the  admission  to  the  Supper  of  all  who  sin- 
cerely desire  to  take  part  in  the  meal  offered  by 
Jesus  Christ. 

On  the  other  side  of  the  ledger,  there  are  some 
critical  questions  that  must  be  raised  about  what 
Pannenberg  identifies  as  the  core  of  the  Gospel. 
He  rightly  insists  that  every  period’s  under- 
standing of  the  Gospel  is  limited  and  provisional 
and  that,  nevertheless,  the  Gospel  itself  has  an 
enduring  validity.  In  an  attempt  to  identify  this 
enduring  core,  he  turns  to  the  eschatological 
dimension  of  Jesus’  message  and  fate,  especially 
the  resurrection  and  its  proleptic  disclosure  of 
the  end  of  history.  Here,  according  to  Pannen- 
berg, we  have  something  that  moves  beyond  the 
age  of  the  apostles,  leaving  behind  features  that 
were  conditioned  by  the  times  in  which  they 
lived.  Without  denying  that  there  is  an  enduring 
truth  in  the  eschatological  motif  of  the  apostolic 
witness,  there  is  reason  to  doubt  that  Pannen- 
berg has  actually  managed  to  isolate  the  core  of 
the  Gospel.  For  it  is  difficult  to  see  how  the 
message  of  the  coming  “Kingdom  of  God”  and 
of  God’s  imminent  “lordship”  over  the  world 
is  not  temporally  conditioned.  In  light  of  Pan- 
nenberg’s  discussion  of  such  matters  in  other 
works,  we  should  no  doubt  assume  that  he  means 
that  these  temporally  conditioned  images  convey 
a truth  that  transcends  any  particular  time.  The 
reason  for  making  these  images,  rather  than 
several  other  possible  candidates,  so  central  is 
the  resurrection  of  Jesus.  But  where  does  the 
history  of  Jesus,  especially  the  path  to  the  cross, 
fit  into  this  schema?  It  is  at  this  point  that  a 
major  weakness  in  Pannenberg’s  argument  be- 
comes clear,  namely,  his  inadequate  apprecia- 
tion of  the  enduring  value  and  meaning  of  the 
history  of  Jesus  prior  to  the  resurrection.  This 
history  has  an  impact  on  the  apocalyptic  frame- 
work within  which  the  idea  of  resurrection  has 
meaning  and  gives  shapes  to  the  church’s  mes- 
sage and  mission  in  a way  that  the  resurrection 
alone  never  could.  Although  Pannenberg  does 
not  seem  to  be  unaware  of  this,  his  discussion 
tends  to  emphasize  only  the  resurrection. 

The  question  of  what  significance  we  should 
accord  to  the  history  of  Jesus  becomes  particu- 
larly important  when  we  speak  of  the  coming 
Kingdom  of  peace  and  justice,  as  Pannenberg 
does  throughout  these  essays.  For,  since  peace 


and  justice  are  general  terms  that  are  easily  ma- 
nipulated, it  is  necessary  to  indicate  how  we  are 
to  arrive  at  an  understanding  of  their  meaning 
for  our  time.  Christian  faith  affirms  that  the 
history  ol  Jesus  is  crucial  for  our  definition  of 
these  concepts.  But  Pannenberg  is  far  from  clear 
about  how  the  path  of  Jesus  to  the  cross  should 
be  related  to  a contemporary  Christian  under- 
standing of  their  implications  for  our  situation. 

Finally,  Pannenberg’s  last  essay  is  disappoint- 
ing for  at  least  two  reasons.  First,  he  never  de- 
fines what  he  means  by  religion  in  his  discussion 
of  the  relationship  between  religions,  on  one 
hand,  and  between  the  religions  and  contem- 
porary society,  on  the  other.  As  a result,  this 
discussion  often  lacks  clarity.  Second,  his  in- 
sistence that  contemporary  society  needs  to  draw 
its  values  from  faith  in  God  never  adequately 
addresses  the  question  of  how  a truly  pluralistic 
society,  in  which  faith  in  God  can  hardly  be 
assumed,  can  actually  have  God  as  the  foun- 
dation of  its  values. 

On  the  whole,  however,  Pannenberg’s  essays 
are  lucid  and  well  argued.  In  short,  they  will 
reward  whoever  takes  the  time  to  give  them 
careful  consideration. 

Keith  Crim’s  translation  is  clear  and  readable. 
However,  I did  find  three  places  at  which  the 
English  text  did  not  accurately  reflect  the  Ger- 
man (in  each  case  it  appears  to  be  an  error  in 
the  printing  rather  than  in  the  translation):  i) 
on  p.  51  of  the  English  text  it  says  that  the 
apostles’  work  was  not  done  in  the  light  of  God’s 
eschatological  act,  whereas  the  German  says  not 
only,  2)  on  the  bottom  of  p.  86,  following  the 
mention  of  the  Augsburg  Confession,  several 
lines  of  the  German  have  fallen  out;  and  3)  on 
p.  104  one  finds  the  assertion  that  the  Memo- 
randum of  the  German  University  Ecumenical 
Institutes  presents  the  special  offices  of  the  church 
in  isolation  from  the  general  priesthood  of  be- 
lievers, whereas  Pannenberg’s  real  point  is  that 
it  does  not  do  this. 

David  J.  Bryant 

The  Graduate  School 


Message  and  Existence:  An  Introduction 
to  Christian  Theology , by  Landon  Gil  key. 
The  Seabury  Press,  New  York,  1979.  Pp. 
257.  $5.95  (paper). 

Here  is  Langdon  Gilkey’s  "baby  systematic,” 
as  he  calls  it — a mim-summa  in  which  this  the- 
ologian at  the  University  of  Chicago  Divinity 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


73 


School  aims  to  draw  each  central  Christian  sym- 
bol into  a coherent  interpretation.  Readers  should 
not  expect  from  this  text  the  elaborate  treatment 
of  issues  that  Gilkey  undertook  in  Naming  the 
Whirlwind  (1969)  or  Reaping  the  Whirlwind  (1977). 
This  work  is  “strictly  for  beginners  and  not  for 
professionals  in  theology.”  Nor  should  we  view 
this  book  as  a primer  anticipating  a later,  more 
massive  summation  of  Gilkey ’s  systematic  the- 
ology. An  “unavoidable  realism”  about  his  own 
personal  interests  and  capacities  limits  him  to 
the  more  modest  task  of  writing  this  general 
introduction  to  Christian  theology. 

This  text  introduces  readers  to  “systematic” 
theology  by  ordering  the  Christian  symbols  ac- 
cording to  four  main  clauses  of  the  Apostles’ 
Creed  (I  believe,  in  God  the  Father  almighty, 
in  Jesus  Christ  his  only  son  our  Lord,  and  in 
the  Holy  Spirit).  Therefore,  the  symbols  of  the 
faith  are  taken  up  in  Gilkey ’s  pages  in  a roughly 
traditional  order,  beginning  with  doctrines  of 
faith  and  revelation,  continuing  on  through  the 
doctrines  of  God,  creation,  providence,  sin,  Jesus 
Christ,  the  church.  Holy  Spirit,  and  Kingdom 
of  God.  I will  return  below  to  the  issue  of  how 
Gilkey  further  structures  these  symbols. 

First,  though,  I want  to  stress  that  the  really 
“systematic”  character  of  Gilkey ’s  book  rests  not 
so  much  in  the  way  he  relates  the  traditional 
symbols  to  each  other,  but  more  in  the  way  that 
the  symbols  are  correlated  with  dimensions  of 
human  experience.  In  each  of  the  book’s  four 
major  sections  based  on  the  Apostles’  Creed, 
Christian  doctrines  are  correlated  with  human 
existence.  There  are  two  subsections,  then,  for 
each  clause  of  the  creed,  one  dealing  with  di- 
mensions of  human  existence,  the  other  with 
the  Christian  symbols  that  can  be  correlated  with 
those  dimensions.  By  this  structural  device,  Gilkey 
offers  his  portraits  of  human  existence,  probing 
it  for  its  religious  dimensions  and  then  moving 
on  to  show  how  Christian  symbols  “represent” 
or  “thematize”  religious  dimensions.  For  ex- 
ample, Gilkey  meditates  on  human  experiences 
of  person,  community,  and  tradition  to  render 
more  intelligible  the  Christian  doctrine  of  rev- 
elation. Gilkey  portrays  experiences  of  human 
dependence  and  finitude  on  the  way  to  his  dis- 
cussion of  a doctrine  of  God.  So  also,  "estrange- 
ment” is  discussed  in  relation  to  doctrines  of  sin 
and  of  Jesus  as  the  Christ,  and  then  he  treats 
“humanity  as  communal”  in  relation  to  doc- 
trines of  the  Holy  Spirit  and  the  Kingdom  of 
God.  Readers  of  Gilkey ’s  previous  works  will 
not  be  surprised  by  the  persistently  correlational 
aim  of  this  “baby  systematic.” 


Indeed,  precisely  because  Gilkey’s  long- 
standing interests  have  been  correlational,  ne- 
cessitating reflection  in  philosophy  of  religion  as 
well  as  in  theology,  we  should  also  not  be  too 
surprised  that  his  corpus  of  personal  works  will 
not  include  an  elaborate  system  of  Christian 
symbols.  His  own  primary  focus  of  scholarship 
has  been  and  remains  the  correlation  of  symbols 
with  human  existence — -what  Gilkey,  and  Til- 
lich before  him,  term  a “theology  of  culture.” 

To  identify  Tillich’s  legacy  here  is  not  to  say 
that  Gilkey  merely  works  out  in  this  book  Til- 
lich’s “method  of  correlation.”  Gilkey’s  own 
method  moves  beyond  Tillich’s  correlation  of  a 
questioning  human  existence  with  a predomi- 
nantly “answering”  theology.  For  Gilkey,  hu- 
man experience  both  questions  and  posits  an- 
swers, and  theology  does  not  only  answer  but 
also  prompts  questions.  In  this  book,  Gilkey’s 
correlations  lead  him  to  set  theology  in  a varied 
conversation  with  human  experience.  He  pur- 
sues what  David  Tracy  has  helpfully  termed  a 
“mutually  critical  correlation”  in  which  expe- 
rience is  allowed  to  assess  and  enrich  traditional 
theology,  even  as  theology  may  criticize  and 
enrich  human  experience.  What  is  more,  in  the 
conversation  between  experience  and  theology 
that  Gilkey  creates,  each  new  occasion  for  cor- 
relation takes  a different  form.  Gilkey’s  method 
in  this  little  book  teaches  that  there  cannot  be 
any  predetermined  forms  of  correlational  think- 
ing in  theology.  Rather,  each  correlation  must 
allow  the  particular  subject  matter  or  realm  of 
discourse  in  human  experience  to  shape  the  cor- 
relation. That  is  to  say,  Gilkey  will  relate  ex- 
perience to  theology  a little  differently  when 
correlating  human  finitude  with  the  doctrinal 
symbol  of  God  than  he  does  when  correlating 
human  estrangement  with  a doctrine  of  sin. 
Gilkey’s  correlations  may  come  all  too  quickly 
for  some  readers  whose  specialized  disciplines 
do  not  incline  them  to  follow  Gilkey’s  discus- 
sions of  experience  as  disclosing  a religious  di- 
mension with  which  Christian  symbols  resonate. 
This  small  book  does  not  allow  Gilkey  to  at- 
tempt a careful  hermeneutic  analysis  of  the  dif- 
ferent realms  of  academic  discourse  in  which 
theologians  might  discern  religious  dimensions. 

Allow  me  now  to  shift  back  to  the  issue  of 
Gilkey’s  systematizing  of  Christian  symbols.  We 
cannot  in  this  short  review  evaluate  Gilkey’s 
stances  on  various  facets  of  the  Christian  symbol 
system — how  he  understands  doctrines  of  cre- 
ation, atonement,  the  Holy  Spirit,  et  al.  But 
conscious  as  we  are  now  of  Gilkey’s  rigorous 
focus  on  systems  of  correlation,  we  may  return 


74 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


to  his  view  of  this  symbol  system  and  find  there 
a structure  that  guides  his  correlational  activity. 
In  other  words,  we  may  note  how  Gilkey’s  cor- 
relational impulse  is  rooted  not  just  in  some 
contemporary  need  to  be  relevant,  but  rather 
emerges  from  a structure  that  is  intrinsic  to 
Christianity’s  own  traditional  system  of  symbols. 

What  is  this  structure?  For  Gilkey,  the  unique 
form  of  Christian  symbolism  is  present  in  the 
historical  life  and  teaching  of  Jesus  and  then 
stamped  into  almost  all  of  the  other  symbols. 
This  unique  form  is  a “dialectic  of  affirmation, 
of  negation,  and  then  of  a higher  reaffirmation 
that,  in  overcoming  the  negative,  also  trans- 
mutes the  originating  positive”  (p.  182).  This 
dialectic,  in  the  Christian  symbol  system  itself,  leads 
Gilkey  (as  he  thinks  it  should  lead  all  theolo- 
gians) to  a major  task  of  correlation,  one  that 
affirms  the  world  of  human  experience,  but  that 
also  can  renounce  and  negate  that  world.  The 
Christian  symbol  system  says  an  original  Yes  to 
the  world  in  its  doctrine  of  creation,  says  No  to 
it  in  its  doctrines  of  sin  and  judgment,  but  then, 
ultimately,  says  Yes  again  to  all  creation  by  way 
of  its  doctrine  of  redemption.  Theologians  faith- 
ful to  this  dialectic  will  pursue  a correlational 
method,  mindful  that  they  must  acknowledge 
the  worth  and  value  of  human  existence,  ac- 
knowledge also  the  need  to  negate  insights  of 
human  existence,  in  order  to  fashion  a theology 
that  speaks  to  and  renews  genuinely  human  ex- 
istence. Gilkey’s  correlational  method,  rich  in 
nuances  varying  with  the  issues  involved,  is  an 
attempt  to  respond  as  theologian  to  this  dis- 
tinctively Christian  dialectic. 

This  book,  then,  invites  its  readers  to  study 
two  kinds  of  systems  and  the  ways  they  play 
together:  not  only  the  system  of  coherence  that 
Gilkey  fashions  out  of  the  diverse  traditional 
doctrines,  but  also  the  “system”  of  correlations 
that  Gilkey  seeks  between  traditional  symbols 
and  human  experience. 

This  book  is  written  for  “the  beginner”  and 
hence  may  appeal  both  to  theology  students  and 
to  informed  and  diligent  lay  readers.  Unfortu- 
nately, as  I think  Gilkey  himself  admits  in  his 
preface,  the  book  is  not  written  in  a style  always 
accessible  to  the  beginning  student.  To  be  sure, 
Gilkey  limits  himself  here  to  the  basic  compo- 
nents of  Christian  theologizing,  and  his  text  is 
rich  in  citing  his  own  personal  experiences  in 
ways  that  may  interest  the  general  reader.  His 
writing  also,  it  should  be  granted,  occasionally 
breaks  out  with  existential  flair  to  stress  how 
Christian  doctrines  resonate  to  human  experi- 
ence. When  speaking  of  the  doctrines  of  creation 


and  providence,  for  example,  he  stresses  that 
these  speak  of  the  dependency  on  God  of  all 
creatures — of  “the  nebulae,  the  amoeba,  the  di- 
nosaurs, the  early  Piets  and  Scots,  the  Chinese, 
the  Kremlin,  you,  me,  our  two  dogs,  and  even 
the  cat”  (p.  87).  Generally,  however,  the  sen- 
tences of  this  text  are  long  and  complex,  fash- 
ioned out  of  the  writer’s  sense  of  long-standing 
issues  that  yet  cannot  be  unpacked  in  this  short 
volume.  Hence,  the  misgiving  that  Gilkey  him- 
self entertained  in  his  preface,  that  this  text  may 
not  be  readable  and  intelligible  for  the  beginning 
student,  may  prove  accurate.  This  need  not  rule 
out,  as  I have  tried  to  suggest  in  this  review, 
the  fact  that  this  text  is  worthy  of  study  for  those 
interested  in  theology’s  dynamics  of  coherence 
and  correlation. 

Mark  Kline  Taylor 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 

Romantic  Idealism  and  Roman  Catholi- 
cism: Schelling  and  the  Theologians,  by 
Thomas  F.  O’Meara.  University  of  Notre 
Dame  Press,  Notre  Dame  and  London,  1982. 
Pp.  231.  $20.00. 

Thomas  F.  O’Meara  describes  his  book  as  “a 
history  of  the  interplay  between  faith  and  cul- 
ture in  the  first  half  of  the  nineteenth  century” 
(p.  ix).  This  is  an  important  period  for  Roman 
Catholic  theology  because:  “it  was  a time  when 
the  Catholic  spirit  understood  how  to  live  in  a 
historical  world  and  how  to  be  faithful  to  tra- 
dition while  fashioning  a theology  that  spoke  to 
a particular  age”  (ibid.). 

O’Meara  is  correct  in  this  assessment.  Ger- 
man Catholic  theology  in  the  first  half  of  the 
nineteenth  century  had  a remarkably  modern 
character.  There  are  many  reasons  for  this,  not 
the  least  of  which  is  the  tact  that  political  cir- 
cumstances encouraged  a new  intellectual  open- 
ness. The  reorganization  of  German  lands  caused 
by  Napoleon’s  dissolution  of  the  Holy  Roman 
Empire  secularized  former  legal-religious 
boundaries  in  Germany  and  produced  the  rel- 
atively new  phenomenon  of  contessionally  mixed 
states.  Catholic  and  Protestant  theologians  sud- 
denly found  themselves  on  the  same  university 
faculties.  This  stimulated  thought.  It  particu- 
larly benefited  Catholic  scholars  for  they  were 
able  to  explore  in  a direct  way  the  advances  of 
Protestant  theology  made  during  the  Enlight- 
enment. 

Fortunately  Catholics  were  not  discouraged 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


75 


from  such  exploration  by  the  usual  hierarchical 
control.  The  papacy  did  not  exert  the  type  of 
strict  authority  that  it  had  previously  exerted  or 
would  come  to  exert  once  again  later  in  the 
century.  Free  from  ecclesiastical  pressure,  Cath- 
olic theologians  ventured  new  ideas  in  the  class- 
room and  in  print. 

And  new  ideas  there  were!  The  Romantic 
Age  was  a high  point  in  modern  German  cul- 
ture. Goethe,  Schiller,  Novalis,  Hoelderlin,  He- 
gel, and  others  were  at  work.  It  was  a time  for 
imagination  and  intellectual  fantasy.  As  O’Meara 
rightly  observes:  “The  mystical,  the  liturgical, 
the  panentheistic,  the  heroic,  the  Gothic,  the 
sacramental — these  inevitably  make  Catholic 
blood  rush.  Roman  Catholicism  breathes  easy 
and  flourishes  when  the  times  are  Romantic” 
(p.  197). 

The  center  of  theological  renewal  was  the 
Catholic  faculty  at  the  University  of  Tuebingen. 
Theologians  such  as  Johann  Sebastian  Drey,  Jo- 
hann Adam  Moehler,  and  Johannes  E.  von  Kuhn 
engaged  the  problematical  question  of  the  re- 
lation of  church  tradition  to  historical  change. 
The  Tuebingen  theologians  understood  the  sig- 
nificance of  modern  historical  consciousness.  They 
realized  that  Protestant  scholarship  in  the  En- 
lightenment had  exposed  for  the  first  time  the 
undeniable  historicity  of  Christianity.  They  knew 
that  the  aggressive  dogmatism  of  post-tridentine 
theology  was  no  answer  to  this  problem.  They 
feared,  however,  as  faithful  members  of  the 
church,  that  a decline  in  the  normative  authority 
of  church  tradition  threatened  to  transform  rev- 
elation into  a reflection  of  human  self-under- 
standing. 

Attempting  to  steer  a steady  course  between 
historicism  and  dogmatism,  the  Tuebingen  the- 
ologians drew  upon  the  insights  of  the  Romantic 
movement  and  philosophical  Idealism.  It  was  a 
classic  case  of  theology  accommodating  itself  to 
a dominant  cultural  milieu  and  finding  advan- 
tage in  doing  so.  According  to  O’Meara  the  most 
important  cultural  figure  for  Catholic  theology 
was  Friedrich  Wilhelm  Joseph  von  Schelling. 
Schelling  is  asserted  to  be  both  “a  symbol  for 
the  culture  of  his  time”  and  “the  mentor  of  the 
modern  understanding  of  self  and  history”  for 
nineteenth-century  Catholic  intellectuals  (p.  5). 
Tracing  Schelling’s  development  as  a philoso- 
pher and  explaining  his  relevance  to  theology 
are  the  two  tasks  O’Meara  sets  for  himself.  I 
am  uncertain  as  to  how  successful  he  is  in  either 
task. 

With  regard  to  the  task  of  explaining  Schell- 
ing, O’Meara  knows  the  problem.  “One  is  al- 


ways in  danger,”  he  writes,  “of  getting  lost  in 
the  mountains  of  Teutonic  systems”  (p.  13). 
Schelling’s  philosophy  has  an  irreducibly  vague 
quality  about  it.  This  is  helped  neither  by  the 
enormous  volume  of  his  writing  nor  by  the  am- 
bitious scope  of  his  various  subjects:  the  self, 
history,  nature,  the  absolute,  will  and  knowl- 
edge, art  and  aesthetics,  etc.  To  add  to  the  prob- 
lem, Schelling’s  style  is  often  aphoristic  and  hy- 
perbolic. 

O’Meara’s  approach  seems  to  be  determined 
by  the  fact  that  he  wants  to  mention  everything. 
The  problem  is,  however,  that  he  is  unable  to 
go  into  depth  in  anything.  And  the  inevitable 
result  is  that  he  leaves  the  reader  with  sketchy 
summaries  of  Schelhng’s  vast  range  of  ideas. 
The  following  passage  is  typical: 

In  1800  at  the  Easter  book  fair,  Schelling’s 
first  system  appeared,  The  System  of  Tran- 
scendental Idealism.  . . . This  system  included 
material  from  the  natural  sciences  and  from 
painting  and  sculpture,  sections  which  set  it 
aside  from  the  works  of  Kant  or  Fichte. 
Schelling’s  system  announced  parallel  worlds: 
one  of  self,  the  other  of  nature.  Idealism  was 
an  objective  idealism;  the  world  of  nature  was 
not  a mental  projection;  the  ideal  needs  the 
real  just  as  spirit  needs  nature  for  the  ultimate 
synthesis  to  occur.  In  this  early  work  the  two 
paralleled  histories  of  spirit  and  nature  seem 
to  be  joined  by  a predetermined  harmony  and 
to  lack  the  identity,  ground,  or  godhead  that 
Schelling  would  later  give  it  (p.  24). 

The  reader  wants  to  ask:  what  sections  of  this 
work  set  it  aside  from  Kant  and  Fichte  and  in 
what  ways?  What  does  it  mean  to  “announce 
parallel  worlds”?  What  is  their  relation  to  “par- 
allel histories  of  spirit  and  nature”?  And  so  on. 
O’Meara  appears  to  assume  that  the  reader  knows 
enough  about  Schelling  to  be  satisfied  with  a 
gloss.  Yet  he  himself  states  that  Schelling  is  little 
studied  in  English.  Perhaps  a better  method  of 
procedure  might  have  been  to  select  certain  key 
texts  and  analyze  them  in  depth. 

Second  there  is  a problem  with  O’Meara’s 
treatment  of  the  Tuebingen  School.  I am  not 
sure,  as  O’Meara  seems  to  be,  that  the  use  made 
of  Schelling  by  the  Tuebingen  theologians  is  the 
essential  feature  of  their  various  theologies. 
O’Meara  is  content  to  show  that  these  theolo- 
gians used  Schelling — which  is  certainly  true. 
But  this  usage  clearly  leads  to  some  theological 
problems.  Particularly  in  the  theologies  of  Drey 
and  Moehler,  there  is  the  tendency,  encouraged 
by  idealistic  categories,  to  identify  the  church 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


76 

with  the  realization  of  the  Kingdom  of  God  in 
history.  There  is  also  a fundamental  lack  of 
clarity  concerning  the  relation  of  grace  to  nature 
which  is  related  to  Schelling’s  panentheistic  mode 
ot  expression.  O’Meara  tackles  none  of  these 
issues.  And  because  he  does  not,  he  leaves  the 
impression  of  being  uncritical. 

Walter  Sundberg 
Como  Park  Lutheran  Church 
St.  Paul,  Minnesota 

Birth  and  Death:  Bioethical  Decision- 
Making,  by  Paul  D.  Simmons.  Westminster 
Press,  Philadelphia,  1983.  Pp.  276.  $13.95 
(paper). 

Paul  Simmons  has  made  a significant  con- 
tribution to  the  field  of  medical  ethics.  His  task 
is  to  provide  a systematic  approach  for  employ- 
ing the  Bible  as  a means  of  reflecting  on  issues 
involved  in  bioethical  decision-making.  Two  basic 
assumptions  underlie  this  study.  First,  “that  the 
Bible  not  only  is  relevant,  but  is  indispensable 
for  Christian  ethical  understanding.”  And  sec- 
ondly, “that  there  is  no  irreconcilable  tension 
between  the  Bible  and  modern  science.” 

Simmons  is  forthright  in  contending  that  the 
Bible  must  be  appropriated  in  its  totality  as  the 
primary  source  for  dealing  with  bioethical  is- 
sues. He  warns  that  the  “proof-text”  method  of 
using  the  Bible  will  always  be  inadequate.  This 
means  that  ethical  decisions  must  be  based  on 
a central  theme  within  the  Bible  rather  than  on 
specific  scriptural  references.  For  Simmons,  this 
theme  is  personhood.  He  suggests  that  the  main 
features  in  the  biblical  understanding  of  per- 
sonhood are:  (1)  the  person  is  regarded  as  ani- 
mated flesh;  (2)  the  person  must  bear  the  image 
of  God,  thus  distinguishing  him  or  her  from 
the  rest  of  creation;  and  (3)  a person  must  be 
able  to  make  moral  decisions.  To  find  these 
three  primary  characteristics,  Simmons  need  look 
no  further  than  the  first  three  chapters  of  Gen- 
esis. However,  he  extends  his  discussion  by  ex- 
plaining how  Jesus  Christ  is  the  paradigm  for 
full  personhood  in  relationship  to  God. 

The  concept  of  Christian  personhood  or  full 
humanity  becomes  the  focus  for  understanding 
how  Simmons  deals  with  the  bioethical  deci- 
sion-making process.  The  issues  he  raises  are 
abortion,  euthanasia,  biotechnical  parenting,  and 
genetic  research.  In  the  case  of  abortion,  he  sug- 
gests that  it  is  justifiable  in  some  instances  be- 
cause the  fetus  is  not  fully  a person.  What  we 


have  is  a “conceptus”  or  a stage  of  life  which  is 
“anticipatory  personhood.”  In  a similar  way,  when 
Simmons  moves  to  the  issue  of  euthanasia,  he 
sees  no  reason  for  sustaining  life  which  no  longer 
meets  the  criteria  of  full  personhood.  He  be- 
lieves that  extraordinary  or  heroic  means  of  pre- 
serving such  a life  fly  in  the  face  of  a Christian 
understanding  of  human  existence,  death,  and 
eternal  life.  He  is  not  adverse  to  using  the  term 
“sin"  to  make  his  point.  He  presents  a case  in 
which  a terminally  ill  patient  requests  that  life 
support  systems  be  discontinued.  The  physician 
refuses.  Simmons  argues  that  “the  sin  in  this 
case  is  twofold:  first,  in  that  the  man’s  request 
was  disregarded  which  is  a breech  of  trust  in 
doctor-patient  relations,  and  second,  in  that  too 
much  was  done  in  resisting  the  coming  of  death.” 

Biotechnical  parenting  and  genetic  planning 
are  two  closely  related  areas  which  are  of  special 
concern  for  Simmons.  In  developing  his  posi- 
tion, he  disavows  any  dependence  on  “natural 
law.”  In  an  analysis  of  the  creation  stories,  he 
points  out  that  human  sexuality  was  meant  as 
something  much  more  than  a means  of  pro- 
creation. Therefore,  he  believes  that  it  is  entirely 
appropriate  to  assist  couples  when  sexual  inter- 
course does  not  lead  to  the  bearing  of  children. 
In  the  case  of  genetic  planning,  Simmons  sees 
the  scientist’s  role  as  being  twofold.  On  the  one 
hand,  he  or  she  is  working  against  a potential 
genetic  crisis,  and  on  the  other  hand,  serving  to 
complete  what  God  has  set  in  motion  through 
creation.  Protecting  that  which  is  human  and 
ensuring  that  full  humanity  continues  to  prosper 
are  not  only  important  concerns  for  genetic 
planners,  they  are  areas  consistent  with  the  bib- 
lical witness.  Simmons  has  prepared  his  cases 
with  great  care.  In  addressing  the  issues  of  abor- 
tion, euthanasia,  biotechnical  parenting,  and  ge- 
netic planning,  he  draws  on  the  resources  of 
philosophy,  theology,  and  law.  The  introductory 
materials  in  each  section  serve  as  useful  primers 
for  understanding  the  particular  issues  which 
he  is  describing.  It  is  only  after  having  provided 
sufficient  historical  and  contemporary  views  that 
Simmons  moves  to  his  own  position. 

This  book  will  be  of  service  for  several  rea- 
sons. First,  it  is  an  important  part  of  the  dialogue 
between  theology  and  science.  Second,  it  ap- 
propriates biblical  materials  in  a holistic  way 
and  it  avoids  “proof-text”  argumentation.  Third, 
it  provides  a point  ot  departure  for  a systematic 
approach  to  using  the  Bible  in  analyzing  ques- 
tions in  the  field  of  biomedical  ethics. 

The  major  weakness  in  Simmons’  approach 
is  that  he  is  sometimes  guilty  of  overstating  his 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


77 


position.  He  not  only  makes  his  point  about 
certain  medical  procedures,  he  presents  his  case 
with  the  fervor  of  an  evangelist.  Thus,  while  he 
will  open  dialogue  with  many,  he  may  also  close 
off  discussions  with  others  who  take  exception 
to  his  conclusions.  In  addition,  some  Christian 
ethicists  will  not  see  in  the  Bible  the  implicit  or 
explicit  warrants  for  reaching  the  conclusions 
Simmons  finds  unavoidable.  Nevertheless,  Sim- 
mons has  made  a significant  contribution.  This 
book  should  be  read  by  teachers  of  ethics,  pas- 
tors, and  concerned  lay  people  alike.  The  anal- 
ysis will  be  a valuable  resource  in  addressing 
critical  problems  in  medical  ethics. 

William  DeVeaux 
The  Fund  for  Theological  Education 

Christian-Marxist  Dialogue  in  Eastern  Eu- 
rope, by  Paul  Mojzes.  Augsburg,  Minne- 
apolis, 1981.  Pp.  336. 

Dialogue  between  Christians  and  Marxists  is 
usually  understood  to  be  primarily  a Western 
activity.  In  Italy,  France,  and  Spain,  where 
Communist  parties  are  strong  but  not  in  power, 
a great  deal  of  it  takes  place  and  both  sides  are 
helped  by  it  to  clarify  their  basic  points  of  view. 
Some  people  are  even  converted  in  the  process, 
and  the  lines  of  conflict  are  softened. 

All  of  this  is  much  rarer  and  harder,  however, 
in  Eastern  Europe  where  Communist  govern- 
ments are  in  power.  How  can  there  be  open 
dialogue  when  an  atheist  ideology  is  official  doc- 
trine, where  freedom  of  speech  is  curbed,  and 
where  Christians  face  discrimination  at  every 
point  in  public  life?  Paul  Mojzes’  book  shows 
us  with  a wealth  of  perceptive  detail  that  the 
picture  is  not  as  simple  as  this. 

Dr.  Mojzes  is  himself  the  son  of  a Protestant 
pastor,  raised  in  Marxist  Jugoslavia.  He  is  now 
a staunch  Methodist  teaching  religion  in  a Cath- 
olic college  in  Pennsylvania.  From  his  childhood 
he  commands  Serbo-Croatian,  Hungarian,  Rus- 
sian, and  German,  and  with  this  base  can  read 
most  of  the  other  Slavic  languages  in  Eastern 
Europe.  With  these  tools  and  this  experience, 
he  has  made  the  exploration  of  Christian-Marx- 
ist relations  in  Eastern  Europe  a lifelong  schol- 
arly task.  The  first  fruits  of  this  task  are  in  this 
book. 

Country  by  country,  and  type  by  type,  Dr. 
Mojzes  examines  the  kind  of  talk  that  goes  on 
between  the  politically  dominant  Marxists  and 
the  Christians  in  their  churches,  even  in  those 


places  where  such  talk  is  officially  denied  and 
disavowed.  Dialogue  does  take  place  in  Eastern 
Europe,  not  only  in  those  few  hopeful  years  of 
detente  before  the  Russian  invasion  of  Czech- 
oslovakia in  1968,  but  continually,  despite 
repression.  Mojzes  shows  how  and  where  this 
is  happening,  and  how  much  more  of  it  there 
is  than  we  in  the  West  have  realized.  He  then 
reflects  upon  dialogue  itself,  and  on  the  chang- 
ing Marxist  and  Christian  perceptions  of  each 
other  which  result  from  it,  and  finally  about  the 
major  issues  which  emerge  in  the  encounter. 

This  story,  told  in  substantial  detail,  is  an 
important  part  of  the  life  history  of  Christianity 
in  Eastern  Europe.  It  also  belongs  to  the  life 
history  of  Christianity  everywhere.  North 
Americans  deceive  themselves  when  they  dis- 
miss Marxism  as  irrelevant  to  Christian  self- 
understanding. Latin  Americans  dodge  reality 
when  they  condemn  dialogue  as  an  academic 
separation  of  forces  that  should  be  working  to- 
gether. Conservative  and  revolutionary  alike  have 
much  to  learn  from  the  experience  of  Eastern 
Europe.  Mojzes’  work  is  an  authoritative  intro- 
duction to  this  experience. 

Charles  C.  West 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 

Pastoral  Theology , by  Thomas  C.  Oden. 
Harper  & Row,  San  Francisco,  1983.  Pp. 
xxii  + 372.  $14.95. 

Not  long  after  I began  reading  Thomas  Oden’s 
Pastoral  Theology  I visited  families  in  a new 
housing  development  and  saw  the  homeowners 
shoveling  away  dirt  which  the  contractors  had 
piled  against  the  trunks  of  trees.  Had  the  owners 
not  removed  the  dirt,  eventually  the  trees  would 
have  died. 

In  a similar  fashion,  Oden  has  exposed  the 
trunk  and  roots  of  pastoral  theology  with  the 
goal  of  revitalizing  our  ministries.  This  book 
is  for  students  preparing  for  ministry  and  those 
navigating  the  rapids  of  pastoral  demands  and 
the  backwaters  of  burnout. 

Oden,  a professor  of  theology  at  Drew  Uni- 
versity with  extensive  parish  experience,  is  aware 
of  the  diffused  sense  of  identity  which  comes 
with  the  territory,  and  the  possibility  of  losing 
trust  in  the  ground  lines  and  going  with  the 
winds.  He  grounds  his  analysis  of  pastoral  work 
in  the  event  of  Jesus  Christ,  in  the  early  pastoral 
shape  of  the  church,  in  practical  theological  rea- 
soning, and  in  experience.  Throughout  the  book, 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


?8 

even  as  he  faces  the  difficulties  of  pastoral  iden- 
tity and  work,  he  rejoices  in  the  access  which  a 
minister  has  into  human  life,  and  the  intimate 
victories  which  honest,  intelligent,  and  faithful 
work  brings. 

The  approach  taken  is  to  ask  what  Jesus  did 
and  why,  how  the  church  (with  special  reference 
to  the  early  church  fathers  and  Luther  and  Cal- 
vin) developed  its  ministry,  what  is  the  contem- 
porary need  of  each  task.  This  lean  approach 
conveys  the  essential  knowledge  directly. 

Pastoral  Theology  is  divided  into  five  sections. 
In  the  first  section,  “Becoming  a Minister,”  the 
author  describes  pastoral  theology  as  theological 
because  it  “treats  the  consequences  of  God’s  self- 
disclosure  in  history”  and  as  pastoral  because  it 
“deals  with  those  consequences  as  they  pertain 
to  the  roles,  tasks,  duties,  and  work  of  the  pas- 
tor” (p.  x).  Then  he  moves  to  the  question  of 
identity,  focusing  the  minister’s  self-esteem  in  a 
life  centered  in  Christ.  In  particular,  Oden  dif- 
ferentiates the  pastoral  ministry  from  “secular- 
ized, hedonically  oriented,  fee-basis  ‘pastoral 
psychotherapists’  who  may  or  may  not  be  com- 
mitted to  the  ministry  of  word  and  sacrament” 
(p.  5).  Moving  to  a consideration  of  the  call  to 
ministry,  Oden  balances  the  dynamics  of  the 
inward  call;  the  evaluation  of  gifts,  health,  and 
character;  and  the  guidance  and  support  of  the 
historic  church.  He  offers  biblical  evidence  of 
an  early  attempt  by  the  church  at  theological 
education  and  a rite  of  ordination  which  gives 
us  a dynamic  sense  of  our  apostolic  heritage. 
Oden  closes  this  section  with  a chapter  on  women 
in  ministry,  attacking  both  the  Catholic  and 
Protestant  opponents  on  the  very  grounds  of 
their  resistance:  continuity  in  tradition,  fitting 
liturgical  representation,  and  faithful  exegesis. 

The  second  section,  “The  Pastoral  Office,” 
defends  the  shepherding  analogy  as  still  sugges- 
tive and  meaningful  for  modern,  secularized 
society.  He  explores  the  paradox  of  pastoral  au- 
thority wherein  power  is  set  in  the  context  of 
the  servant  messiah:  “The  pattern  of  authority 
is  that  of  the  incarnate  Lord,  who  expressed  in 
a single,  unified  ministry  the  holiness  of  God 
amid  the  alienations  of  the  world,  the  incom- 
parable power  of  God  that  was  surprisingly  made 
known  in  an  unparalleled  way  amid  crucifixion 
and  resurrection”  (p.  53).  The  last  chapter  of 
the  section  is  an  analysis  of  the  ministerial  temp- 
tation to  explain  our  message  in  purely  human 
social,  or  psychological,  or  political  terms;  and 
he  warns  against  so  inflating  the  ministry  with 
an  excessive  sacerdotalism  that  human  friend- 
ship in  ministry  is  lost. 


In  the  third  section,  “What  Clergy  Do  and 
Why,”  Oden  uncovers  the  adventure  and  inti- 
macy of  ministry,  especially  as  he  describes  the 
“five  incomparable  days  in  the  believer’s  life” 
(p.  85):  birth,  baptism,  confirmation,  marriage, 
and  death.  His  discussion  on  baptism  and  eu- 
charist  is  solidly  grounded  in  scripture  and  early 
tradition.  The  chapter  on  equipping  the  laity 
for  ministry  clarifies  the  purpose  of  administra- 
tion, but  its  brevity  regarding  the  various  parts 
of  administration  leave  the  reader  wishing  a 
fuller  treatment  had  been  given. 

At  this  point,  a comment  can  be  made  about 
the  bibliographies  at  the  end  of  each  chapter. 
The  references  cited  are  useful  for  the  working 
pastor  who  is  not  at  home  with  the  early  fathers 
of  the  church,  or  even  with  the  pertinent  sections 
of  Luther  and  Calvin,  and  Oden’s  notes  make 
the  references  accessible.  However,  his  refer- 
ences to  contemporary  studies  on  church  admin- 
istration and  the  equipping  of  the  laity  are  thin. 

He  summarizes  the  third  section,  “Preaching 
can  help  shape  the  vision  of  the  organization. 
Worship  grounds  it  in  hope.  Counsel  enables 
individual  growth.  Pastoral  teaching  can  pro- 
vide perspective  and  direction  for  members  of 
the  body  at  various  stages  along  life’s  way.  Pas- 
toral leadership  wants  to  show  how  faith  can 
become  active  in  love.  All  these  tasks  intermesh 
in  the  challenging  work  of  ‘managing  well,’  or 
active  governance  (kudernesis),  of  the  Christian 
community”  (p.  164). 

The  fourth  section,  “Pastoral  Counsel,”  be- 
gins by  addressing  the  opportunities  and  prob- 
lems of  visitation,  grounding  this  task  in  Jesus' 
ministry,  exploring  the  obstacles,  reviewing  the 
apostolic  patterns,  offering  practical  advice,  and 
emphasizing  the  duty  and  privilege  of  such  ac- 
cess to  human  life.  In  his  chapter  on  the  “care 
of  souls,”  he  rescues  that  concept  from  the  me- 
dieval dualism  and  helps  pastors  see  the  unique- 
ness of  their  role.  A long-needed  review  is  given 
of  the  role  of  the  pastor  in  offering  comfort, 
admonition,  and  discipline.  Since  the  turn  ot  the 
century,  mainline  or  middle  sector  pastors  have 
needed  a dynamic  and  relevant  way  of  working 
for  the  “purity  of  the  church." 

The  fifth  section,  “Crisis  Ministry,”  begins 
with  a theodicy,  or  vindication  of  the  “divine 
attributes,  especially  justice,  mercy,  and  love,  in 
relation  to  the  continuing  existence  of  evil”  (jj. 
223).  What  pastor  hasn’t  been  stunned  into  si- 
lence by  unwarranted  suffering,  and  hasn't  wished 
for  theological  resources  for  his  own  spirit  that 
could  be  translated  into  pastoral  use?  Oden  gives 
ten  thoughtful,  classical  yet  contemporary  pas- 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


79 


toral  “consolations”  for  our  thought  and  work. 
Concluding  chapters  about  ministry  to  the  sick, 
to  the  poor,  and  to  the  dying  contain  in  brief 
fashion  excellent  counsel  from  the  field.  In  his 
chapter  regarding  the  poor,  he  summarizes 
Richard  Baxter’s  penetrating  counsels  for  the 
rich,  which  is  more  applicable  for  most  of  us 
than  we  like  to  admit.  I did  feel  that  he  could 
have  developed  more  fully  the  need  for  a min- 
istry to  the  poor  which  mobilized  the  congre- 
gation to  alter  the  institutional  causes  of  poverty. 

The  reader  will  find  the  book  easy  to  read  as 
an  overview  of  pastoral  theology,  or  as  a resource 
for  re-thinking  the  particular  tasks  of  ministry. 
It  is  truly  ecumenical  in  scope  and  Catholics  and 
Protestants  of  all  traditions  will  find  an  exciting 
commonality  of  ministry. 

H.  Dana  Fearon  III 
Lawrenceville  Presbyterian  Church 
Lawrenceville,  New  Jersey 

Discovering  the  Church , by  Barbara  Brown 
Zikmund.  (Library  of  Living  Faith).  The 
Westminster  Press,  Philadelphia,  1983.  Pp. 

1 16.  $5.95  (paper). 

What  is  the  church?  The  answer  depends  on 
one’s  perspective.  Dr.  Zikmund,  dean  of  Pacific 
School  of  Religion,  guides  the  reader  through 
six  different  ways  of  looking  at  the  church.  She 
begins  by  looking  at  the  church  as  it  appears 
within  popular  culture,  then  proceeds  to  con- 
sider the  church  as  seen  through  personal  tes- 
timony, within  biblical  and  theological  tradi- 
tions, from  historical  perspectives,  in  institutional 
forms,  and  as  disturbing  promise. 

Zikmund  insists  that  all  of  these  perspectives 
are  necessary  to  a full  understanding  of  the  church. 
As  she  writes  at  the  end  of  her  chapter  describ- 
ing the  church  as  it  is  seen  in  popular  culture, 
“Theologians  do  not  like  to  admit  the  signifi- 
cance of  these  perspectives  on  the  church,  but 
they  cannot  be  ignored.  Indeed,  it  might  be  ar- 
gued that  only  when  a theology  of  the  church, 
or  ecclesiology,  begins  to  recognize  the  ways  in 
which  average  people  understand  the  church 
will  it  have  an  adequate  foundation.  Biblical, 
historical,  and  theological  factors  aside,  we  fail 
to  understand  something  very  basic  about  the 
church  unless  we  begin  with  these  popular  un- 
derstandings held  by  many  Americans.” 

While  this  quotation  makes  an  important  the- 
ological point,  Zikmund  is  not  writing  for  other 
theologians — at  least  not  for  other  “profes- 


sional” theologians.  Like  the  other  authors  in 
The  Library  of  Living  Faith,  she  writes  believ- 
ing that  lay  people  can  be  assisted  to  do  some 
theological  thinking  themselves.  Zikmund  ap- 
pears to  have  achieved  her  objective,  for  this 
book  should  guide  lay  people  to  a deeper  un- 
derstanding of  the  church. 

In  the  chapter  on  the  institutional  forms  of 
the  church,  Zikmund  gives  the  best  brief  de- 
scription of  the  sources  of  denominationalism  I 
have  ever  read,  using  an  outline  of  “theological, 
political,  cultural,  and  practical  reasons”  for  di- 
vision in  the  church.  While  some  ecumenists 
might  challenge  her  largely  positive  evaluation 
of  denominationalism  (“Why  are  there  so  many 
churches?  Because  people  experience  the  love  of 
God  in  Christ  in  different  ways  and  in  different 
places”),  she  does  not  close  her  eyes  to  the  dan- 
gers of  division,  and  she  certainly  helps  people 
get  some  grasp  of  how  it  all  came  about. 

This  is  not,  of  course,  a full-scale  ecclesiology. 
In  places  it  is  sketchy.  While  treating  the  images 
and  metaphors  for  the  church,  Zikmund  limits 
herself  to  the  images  of  the  church  as  the  people 
of  God,  the  body  of  Christ,  and  a community 
of  the  Spirit.  This  drastically  reduces  the  rich 
tapestry  of  biblical  imagery  for  the  church,  but 
it  would  be  hard  to  think  of  a better  way  of 
treating  the  subject  in  fifteen  pages. 

Brevity  hurts  some  chapters  more  than  others. 
Zikmund’s  treatment  of  the  church’s  history  is 
simply  too  sketchy  to  be  of  much  help  to  most 
readers,  I am  afraid.  Her  choice  of  themes  is 
interesting:  “the  adaptability  of  the  church  to 
the  changing  political  order,  the  ways  in  which 
the  church  continually  supports  human  creativ- 
ity, the  capacity  of  the  church  to  reform  itself, 
and  the  drive  of  the  church  to  witness  to  the 
world.”  Unfortunately,  she  simply  doesn’t  have 
enough  space  to  do  them  justice. 

There  are  discussion  questions  and  sugges- 
tions for  further  reading  for  each  chapter.  These 
make  the  book  well  adapted  for  adult  study 
groups  in  the  church.  The  lists  of  suggested 
readings  are  good,  but  they  could  have  been 
improved  by  brief  notes  about  each  book.  For 
example,  in  the  list  for  the  chapter  on  church 
history,  the  first  two  books  are  Sydney  Ahl- 
strom’s  A Religious  History  of  the  American  Peo- 
ple, and  Roland  Bainton’s  The  Church  of  Our 
Fathers.  The  reader  is  given  no  hint  that  Bain- 
ton’s book  was  written  for  children,  nor  is  he 
or  she  informed  that  Ahlstrom’s  book  is  nearly 
one  thousand  pages  longer  than  Bainton’s. 

Despite  such  quibbles,  Zikmund  has  written 
a book  which  deserves  to  be  read  and  studied 


8o 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


by  church  people.  Few  could  read  it  without 
coming  to  understand  their  church  better. 
Moreover,  the  church  itself  might  be  better  if 
more  of  its  members  come  to  share  Zikmund’s 
conviction,  “Unless  the  church  disturbs  us  and 
invites  us  into  God’s  future,  we  have  failed  to 
discover  the  most  important  dimension  of  the 
church.” 

William  D.  Howden 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 

The  Twentieth  Century  Pulpit,  Vol.  II,  ed. 
by  James  W.  Cox.  Abingdon  Press,  Nash- 
ville, 1981.  Pp.  238.  $8.95. 

With  the  first  volume  of  this  two-part  sym- 
posium of  sermons,  James  W.  Cox  had  put  us 
all  in  his  debt  by  providing  us  with  a cross 
section  of  the  preaching  of  the  twentieth-century 
pulpit  of  the  western  world.  This  second  volume 
is  intended  (i)  to  introduce  us  to  “a  younger 
generation  of  preachers”;  (ii)  to  focus  “more 
sharply  on  social  and  ethical  issues”;  and  (iii)  to 
include  “worthy  sermons”  the  editor  was  not 
aware  of  when  the  first  volume  was  published. 
An  anthology  of  this  kind  receives  inevitably 
some  “off-the-cuff’  evaluations,  chiefly — why 
was  so-and-so  omitted,  and  this  more  often  than 
why  was  so-and-so  included.  Certainly  a volume 
of  discrete  selections  is  bound  also  to  be  uneven 
both  in  form  and  quality.  The  editor,  however, 
is  an  experienced  and  competent  homiletician 
whose  services  as  professor  of  preaching  at 
Southern  Baptist  Theological  Seminary,  editor 
of  the  Ministers  Manual  and  of  the  Pulpit  Digest, 
author  and  translator,  qualify  him  uniquely  to 
execute  this  enterprise  for  us. 

With  the  exception  of  merely  several  names, 
all  of  these  younger  contributors  are  known  to 
this  reviewer  (incidentally  several  of  these — Til- 
lich, Ford,  and  Robinson  are  scarcely  youthful; 
if  he  were  alive  today  Tillich  would  be  97!). 
The  selection  covers  a reasonably  wide  spec- 
trum, although  it  is  predominantly  Baptist  (nine 
out  of  twenty-seven).  The  score  is  as  follows: 
Baptist  (9),  Presbyterian  (3),  United  Church  of 
Christ  (3),  Roman  Catholic  (1),  Disciples  (1), 
Lutheran  (1),  Church  of  God  (1),  Anglican/ 
Episcopalian  (1),  and  Reformed  (2).  All  this  aside, 
the  advantage  of  a pulpit  anthology  represent- 
ative of  an  era  is  not  discerned  immediately;  it 
must  be  seen  in  the  long  run  as  a contribution 
to  the  literature  of  the  history  of  preaching  to 
which  research  students  will  turn  some  day  for 


indications  of  how  mid-twentieth-century 
Christian  preachers  handled  critical  issues  in  their 
own  generation. 

It  would  be  careless  and  unfair  to  evaluate 
these  sermons  comparatively  or  to  single  out  the 
strengths  and  weaknesses  of  any  one  of  them  in 
particular.  More  appropriate  is  it  to  make  some 
general  observations  as  follows:  (i)  One  is  pleased 
with  the  wide  range  of  themes — many  of  them 
with  a basic  theological  focus — and  the  attempt 
of  these  preachers  to  handle  them  contempo- 
raneously. (ii)  Their  analyses  and  perceptions  of 
the  nature  of  our  humanity  are  generally  ex- 
cellent, although  sometimes  their  prescriptions 
for  the  way  out  are  lacking  either  in  positive 
practicability  of  the  Gospel  or  even  downright 
reality,  (iii)  Some  of  the  sermons  espouse  a strong 
evangelical  thrust  and  most  of  them  are  marked 
by  a living-ness  that  is  healthy.  Wherever  there 
is  dullness  it  is  created  by  or  is  the  result  of 
abstract  idioms  and  the  lack  of  concrete  human 
allusions.  There  are  surprisingly  few  illustra- 
tions and  fortunately  an  absence  of  anecdotal 
ones,  (iv)  If  a third  volume  is  projected,  care 
should  be  taken  to  include  pulpit  representatives 
from  Scotland,  Ireland,  Canada,  Australia,  the 
Orient,  and  South  America.  Moreover,  in  this 
new  era  of  a globe-trotting  Pope,  maybe  one  of 
his  homilies  could  be  secured  as  he  passes  by. 

Donald  Macleod 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 

Biblical  Preaching:  An  Expositor’s  Treas- 
ury, ed.  by  James  W.  Cox.  Westminster 
Press,  Philadelphia,  1983.  Pp.  372. 

The  phrase  “biblical  preaching”  is  both  du- 
rable and  elastic.  It  is  durable  in  the  sense  that 
it  periodically  reappears  with  renewed  power 
whenever  new  developments  in  preaching  and 
biblical  studies  cause  the  romance  between  those 
two  fields  to  re-ignite.  The  phrase  is  also  elastic, 
however,  in  the  sense  that  it  has  been  used  so 
often  in  so  many  settings  and  to  cover  so  many 
different  assumptions  about  the  nature  of  both 
the  Bible  and  preaching  that  one  can  never  be 
exactly  sure  what  is  meant  by  it. 

Biblical  Preaching:  An  Expositor's  Treasury,  ed- 
ited by  James  Cox,  is  one  of  several  recent  books 
which  have  attempted  to  grapple  anew  with  the 
phrase.  The  volume  stands  both  as  an  encour- 
aging indication  that  yet  another  renewal  of  bib- 
lical preaching  is  in  progress  and  as  a reminder 
of  the  fact  that  the  concept  of  biblical  preaching 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


can  be  stretched  to  the  breaking  point  over  a 
variety  of  sometimes  competing,  sometimes 
complementary,  perspectives,  styles,  and  meth- 
ods. 

The  volume  contains  twenty  assorted  chap- 
ters by  eighteen  authors.  The  chapters  cover  a 
spectrum  of  biblical  topics  and  categories,  some 
concerned  with  broad  literary  groupings  (e.g., 
wisdom  literature,  minor  prophets,  Pauline 
epistles),  others  with  specific  genres  (e.g.,  par- 
ables, miracle  stories,  eschatological  texts),  and 
still  others  with  personalities  (e.g.,  the  patri- 
archs) and  events  (e.g.,  the  Exodus,  the  Resur- 
rection). Although  the  format  differs  somewhat 
from  chapter  to  chapter,  the  basic  chapter  design 
includes  a brief  essay  on  the  exegetical  and  her- 
meneutical issues  involved  in  preaching  on  the 
material  at  hand  followed  by  some  homiletical 
notes  and  sermon  ideas  for  several  representa- 
tive texts. 

It  is  clear  that  the  contributors  share  a sense 
of  the  importance  of  the  Bible  for  preaching  and 
a commitment  to  the  methods  of  critical  exegesis 
as  the  means  for  encountering  the  claims  of 
biblical  texts.  Indeed  it  is  exciting  to  see  the  ways 
in  which  the  authors  combine  historical,  literary, 
and  sociological  approaches  to  the  biblical  doc- 
uments with  sophistication  and  imagination. 

It  is  also  clear  that  the  contributors,  once  they 
have  done  their  exegetical  homework,  do  mark- 
edly different  things  with  the  results,  which  is 
to  say  that  contrasting  understandings  of  the 
nature  of  biblical  preaching  are  at  work.  Some 
move  toward  sermons  carrying  central  ideas, 
doctrines,  and  themes  from  the  biblical  texts,  while 
others,  Henry  Mitchell  and  Dwight  Stevenson 
for  example,  are  more  attentive  to  the  rhetorical 
and  literary  forms  of  the  texts  and  their  power 
to  govern  the  form  of  sermons.  Some  contrib- 
utors find  in  the  Bible  a radical  and  theocentric 
word  which  gives  an  urgency  to  biblical  preach- 
ing, while  others  find  there  a more  gentle,  less 
exigent  “wisdom  for  living.”  Krister  Stendahl, 
in  his  chapter,  includes  a helpful  discussion  of 
the  danger  in  setting  up,  in  sermons,  overdrawn 
analogies  between  the  text’s  world  and  our  world, 
and  he  holds  out  tor  analogies  which  are  looser, 
more  creative  and  artful.  Others  in  the  volume, 
however,  seem  to  be  searching  for  quite  precise 
correlations  between  text  and  contemporary  sit- 
uation, even  pushing  at  times  beyond  analogy 
to  allegory.  These  and  other  differences  are  not 
bad,  of  course,  indeed  they  are  potentially  en- 
riching. Consensus  on  this  is  neither  attainable 
nor  perhaps  desirable.  It’s  just  that  the  reader 
longs  for  the  issues  to  be  placed  on  top  of  the 


table,  for  the  several  voices  speaking  in  this  book 
to  become  aware  of  each  other  and  of  their 
harmonies  and  discords.  Otherwise  the  very 
concept  of  “biblical  preaching”  tends  to  lose  its 
definitive  power  as  it  is  stretched  out  of  rec- 
ognizable shape  and  draped  over  first  this  set 
of  methods,  then  that  set  of  methods,  in  an 
attempt  to  make  “one  size  fit  all.” 

One  of  the  stated  purposes  of  the  collection 
is  to  provide  provocative  sermon  ideas  and  sug- 
gestions, and  on  that  score  the  contributors  surely 
deliver.  Some  of  the  authors  go  so  far  as  to 
provide  sermon  outlines,  “starters,”  and  ideas 
for  sermon  series.  Far  more  helpful  and  credible 
are  those  contributors  who  work  imaginatively 
with  the  sample  texts,  building  bridges  toward 
sermons,  but  who  do  not  feel  compelled  to  do 
all  the  work  for  the  reader.  In  the  long  run  this 
work  “between”  text  and  sermon — more  than 
a commentary  but  less  than  a sermon — is  far 
more  stimulating  to  the  preacher  than  some  pre- 
fabricated sermon  requiring  only  touch-up  fin- 
ish. 

There  is  a little  uncertainty  in  this  anthology 
about  the  intended  readership.  Are  they  users 
of  the  lectionary?  Some  contributors  assume  so, 
some  do  not.  Where  do  they  stand  on  higher 
criticism?  Some  writers  exercise  the  kind  of  cau- 
tion due  a reader  just  minutes  out  of  funda- 
mentalism, while  others  toss  out  terms  like  “T rito- 
Isaiah”  and  “history  of  tradition”  without  qualm 
or  apology.  In  the  final  analysis,  this  blurred 
picture  image  of  the  “typical”  reader  is  probably 
a tribute  to  the  diversity  of  people  interested  in 
serious  biblical  preaching  and  to  the  editor’s 
laudable  goal  of  comprehensiveness.  In  short, 
however  elastic  the  scope  of  this  book  may  be, 
most  readers  will  find  enough  here  of  value  to 
give  the  book  some  durability. 

Thomas  G.  Long 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 

The  Light  Within  You , by  John  R.  Clay- 
pool.  Word  Books,  Waco,  TX,  1983.  Pp. 
216.  $9.95. 

The  title  of  one  chapter  in  this  book,  “What 
Jesus  Believes  about  You,”  could  almost  have 
served  as  the  title  of  the  whole.  In  this  book  of 
sermons,  revised  to  be  devotional  literature, 
Baptist  minister  John  Claypool  writes  power- 
fully of  God’s  love  for  humanity  and  of  the 
dignity  and  worth  of  each  person.  In  Claypool’s 
words,  “The  wonder  of  the  Christian  gospel  is 


82 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


summed  up  in  this  primal  fact — God’s  will  and 
our  joy  are  synonymous.  All  he  wants  for  us  is 
that  we  become  all  he  meant  for  us  to  be,  and 
to  enjoy  this  forever.” 

As  devotional  literature,  this  book  has  much 
to  commend  it.  Claypool’s  recurrent  themes, 
God’s  love  and  human  worth,  are  indeed  good 
news,  good  news  that  many  people  desperately 
need  to  hear.  In  the  first  chapter,  Claypool  re- 
flects on  the  story  of  the  fall  in  Genesis  3.  He 
interprets  this  account  as  a shift  in  the  basic 
assumptions  of  the  first  humans  regarding  the 
nature  of  God  and  God’s  creation.  He  correctly 
notes  that  many  folk  today  have  wrong  as- 
sumptions about  God  and  about  themselves,  as- 
sumptions not  shaped  by  the  loving  nature  of 
God  as  revealed  in  Christ.  His  purpose  in  this 
book  is  to  correct  those  wrong  assumptions. 

One  must  ask,  however,  if  Claypool’s  book 
accurately  reflects  “what  Jesus  believes  about 
you.”  The  Christ  of  scripture  preaches  repent- 
ance as  well  as  comfort,  and  does  not  speak  of 
human  potential  without  speaking  of  human 
sin.  Claypool  says  little  of  sin  and  repentance. 
He  writes  of  comfort  and  encouragement,  but 
says  little  of  challenge  and  justice.  There  is  a 
chapter/sermon  entitled,  “A  Ministry  of  Lib- 
eration.” The  text  is  the  parable  of  the  last  judg- 
ment from  Matthew  25,  specifically  the  sentence, 
“I  was  in  prison,  and  ye  came  unto  me.”  Lib- 
eration theologians  would  be  less  than  pleased 
with  this  chapter;  it  is  precisely  the  type  of  bib- 
lical exposition  they  abhor.  Claypool  writes,  “At 
its  deepest  level  . . . imprisonment  occurs  any 
time  an  individual  is  stifled  or  prevented  from 
actualizing  his  or  her  potential.”  As  Claypool 
tells  the  parable,  one  could  please  Jesus  without 
ever  setting  foot  outside  a country  club. 

As  devotional  literature,  then,  this  book  could 
be  very  helpful  for  people  who  have  trouble 
believing  that  God  loves  them.  It  will  do  noth- 
ing, however,  to  challenge  the  beliefs  of  those 
people  who  are  already  altogether  too  sure  that 
God  loves  them  just  the  way  they  are. 

Despite  that  flaw,  however,  preachers  who 
read  this  as  a book  of  sermons  can  learn  much 
from  Claypool.  A skilled  craftsman  is  at  work. 
His  approach  is  generally  topical,  rather  than 
expository.  He  seeks  to  probe  beneath  the  sur- 
face of  life,  and  beneath  the  surface  of  scripture, 
to  raise  up  and  discuss  “one  of  life’s  primary 
concerns”;  he  is  not  satisfied  with  preachers  who 
just  “moralize  around  the  edges.”  Often  he  is 
quite  insightful  and  provocative,  as  in  the  first 
sermon  when  he  uses  the  account  of  the  fall  in 


Genesis  3 to  raise  the  issue  of  our  basic  as- 
sumptions about  God  and  about  life. 

At  other  times,  his  interpretation  of  scripture 
is  open  to  question.  Is  it  valid  to  use  the  miracle 
story  about  feeding  the  five  thousand  to  present 
Jesus  as  an  example  of  how  to  cope  with  problem 
situations  in  three  easy  steps?  Here,  one  must 
ask  if  Claypool  is  probing  beneath  the  surface 
of  scripture  to  find  the  basic  issues  in  question, 
or  if  he  is  reading  into  scripture  what  is  not 
really  there. 

Hermeneutics  is  not  the  only  area  in  which 
Claypool  provides  both  positive  and  negative 
examples  for  the  preacher.  Many  a preacher, 
after  reading  a helpful  book,  tries  to  distill  the 
book  into  a sermon.  Such  distillations  are  sel- 
dom successful,  but  Claypool  shows  how  it  can 
be  done.  In  “Exiles  in  Time,”  the  preacher  en- 
ters into  a conversation  with  a book  he  has  read, 
trying  to  see  how  the  book  fits  with  his  own 
faith  and  with  scripture.  It  makes  for  a good 
sermon.  However,  Claypool  also  shows  how  not 
to  use  a book  in  a sermon.  In  “Walking  in  the 
Light,”  he  claims  I John  1:5-7  as  his  text,  but 
the  real  text  for  the  sermon  seems  to  be  Eric 
Berne’s  Games  People  Play.  (I  hardly  think  John’s 
injunction  to  walk  in  the  light  as  God  is  in  the 
light  means  simply  that  we  don’t  play  games  in 
our  personal  relationships,  but  that  is  what  Clay- 
pool claims.)  Claypool  doesn’t  converse  with  the 
book;  he  just  repeats  what  it  says.  The  latest 
book  the  preacher  has  read  can  be  a useful  tool 
for  the  preacher,  but  the  preacher  can  never  be 
merely  the  tool  of  the  book. 

Claypool  includes  several  biographical  ser- 
mons, sketches  of  characters  from  the  Bible.  His 
treatment  of  Saul  reveals  two  weaknesses  com- 
mon to  such  sermons:  it  lacks  unity,  and  some 
ot  the  interpretation  of  scripture  seems  forced. 
On  the  other  hand,  his  sermon  on  Thomas, 
“The  Presumption  of  Despair,”  shows  just  how 
perceptive  and  moving  biographical  sermons  can 
be. 

Nearly  every  introduction  is  of  superior  qual- 
ity. They  are  interesting,  and  quickly  let  the 
reader  or  hearer  know  what  the  sermon  is  about. 
The  illustrations  are  equally  good. 

In  some  ways,  this  is  a mixed  bag  of  sermons. 
I have  discussed  several  with  major  flaws.  On 
the  whole,  however,  most  of  the  sermons  in  the 
mix  are  good,  and  there  is  an  explanation  for 
the  others.  Good  preaching  is  always  imagina- 
tive. Imagination  involves  risks.  Claypool  is 
willing  to  take  the  risks,  and  sometimes  his  gam- 
bles tail.  In  a couple  of  sermons,  he  may  have 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


83 


taken  risks  which  were  irresponsible.  Far  more 
often,  however,  the  gamble  pays  off,  imagina- 
tion leads  the  reader/hearer  into  new  insights, 
and  good  preaching  occurs. 

William  D.  Howden 


Stained  Glass  from  Medieval  Times  to  the 
Present,  by  James  L.  Sturm  and  James  Cho- 
tas.  E.  P.  Dutton,  Inc.,  New  York,  1982. 
Pp.  152. 

This  is  a beautiful  and  scholarly  book,  com- 
piled and  edited  by  two  experienced  and  profes- 
sional persons  who  combine  artistry  and  au- 
thority in  an  exceptional  way.  A professor  of 
history  at  the  City  University  of  New  York, 
Sturm  became  conscious  of  the  neglect  of  glass 
art  in  America,  a discovery  he  made  interest- 
ingly enough  in  his  research  into  economic  and 
sociological  movements  of  the  nineteenth  cen- 
tury. He  gained  practical  experience  and  aes- 
thetic appreciation  of  the  craft  as  a glass  artist 
for  some  time  in  San  Francisco.  A free-lance 


writer,  editor,  and  photographer,  Chotas  served 
with  Bantam  Books,  New  American  Library, 
and  has  contributed  articles  to  fine  arts  journals 
and  other  publications.  He  has  become  recog- 
nized as  a specialist  in  the  color  photography  of 
stained  glass. 

The  focus  of  this  volume  is  upon  the  treasury 
of  stained  glass  in  the  City  of  New  York.  These 
authors  indicate  that  there  have  been  two  great 
ages  of  stained  glass:  the  Middle  Ages  and  the 
Nineteenth  Century.  The  latter  period  is  of  par- 
ticular interest  to  us  because  through  imports 
from  Europe  and  the  activity  of  American  im- 
itators, New  York  City  has  become  the  world 
center  of  stained  glass  art,  an  accomplishment 
which  owed  much  to  the  names  of  Tiffany  and 
La  Farge.  There  are  seven  main  chapters,  in- 
cluding such  themes  as  “New  York’s  Medieval 
and  Renaissance  Glass,”  “The  Gothic  Revival,” 
and  “The  Opalescent  Era:  Tiffany  and  La  Farge." 
The  appendices  include  an  annotated  bibliog- 
raphy, descriptive  and  identification  notes  for 
every  picture  and  diagram,  and  a complete  index 
for  handy  reference.  The  photography,  how- 
ever, is  extraordinary  and  makes  this  volume  a 
gift  to  be  treasured,  studied,  and  admired. 

Donald  Macleod 


THE  SUMMER  SCHOOL 
and 

BIBLICAL  LANGUAGE  PROGRAM 
1984 


JUNE  4— JULY  27 
Biblical  Hebrew 
New  Testament  Greek 

JUNE  4-22 

J.  J.  M.  Roberts,  The  Book  of  Job  * 
Charles  Ryerson,  Eastern  Paths  and 
Christian  Explorations  * Edward 
Dowey,  Four  Reformers:  Erasmus, 

Luther,  Miintzer,  Calvin  * Thomas 
Long,  Preaching  the  Gospel  of  Mark  * 
Manford  Saunders,  Sexuality  Ed.  and 
the  Faith  Community  * Peggy  Way, 
Theological  Contributions  of  the  Local 
Pastor. 

JUNE  25-JULY  13 

David  Dorsey,  Land  of  the  Bible  * 
Henry  Bowden,  Main  Themes  in  Amer- 
ican Church  History  * Mark  Taylor, 
Theology  of  Schleiermacher  * William 
Carl,  Preaching  Christian  Doctrine  * 
Martin  L.  Harkey,  Developing  Leader- 
ship in  the  Local  Church  * Donald 
Capps,  The  Bible  in  Pastoral  Care. 


JULY  16-AUGUST  3 
David  Balch,  The  Book  of  Acts  * 
Eduard  Wildbolz,  Reformed  Theology 
and  Its  Impact  on  Society  * Marvin  Mc- 
Mickle,  From  Decision,  To  Design, 
To  Delivery:  Approaches  to  Preaching 
* David  Weadon,  Hymnology:  Grego- 
rian Chant  to  20th  Century  * John 
Savage,  Lab  I — Encountering  the  In- 
active Church  Member  and  Lab  II  — 
Development  of  Trainers  for  Lab  I. 

JULY  16-27 

Freda  Gardner  and  Robert  Jacks, 

Drama  in  Worship  and  Education. 

JULY  30-AUGUST  3 

Charles  Willard,  Tools  for  Theolog- 
ical Study  * Maria  Harris,  Teaching 
and  Religious  Imagination. 


Each  summer  school  course  carries  credit  for  three  semester  hours  (each  language 
course,  six  semester  hours)  in  M.Div.,  M.A.,  and  Th.M.  programs.  Provision  is  also 
made  for  unclassified  students. 


For  full  information  write  to  Summer  School  Office,  Princeton  Theological  Sem- 
inary, CN821 , Princeton,  NJ  08542  or  phone  (609)  921-8252. 


Princeton  Theological  Seminary  admits  qualified  students  of  any  race,  color  and  national  or 
ethnic  origin  and  without  regard  to  handicap  or  sex. 


PRINCETON 

THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY 


Hieology  Today 


HAVE  YOU  MISSED  THESE  RECENT  ARTICLES? 

“Definition  of  Brain  Death,”  by 

John  J.  Paris  & Ronald  E.  Cranford 
(April  1983) 

“Responding  to  the  Christian  Right,”  by 
Jeffrey  K.  Hadden  & Charles  E.  Swann 
(January  1983) 

“The  Beginning”  (Creationism),  by 
Richard  W.  Berry 
(October  1982) 

“The  Psychology  of  Petitionary  Prayer,”  by 
Donald  Capps 
(July  1982) 

“A  Christian’s  View  of  the  Arms  Race,”  by 
George  Kennan 
(July  1982) 

SINGLE  BACK  ISSUES  OF  THEOLOGY  TODAY 
COST  $3.00  (In  U.S.A.) 


THEOLOGY  TODAY,  P.O.  Box  29,  Princeton,  N.J.  08540 

1 year  (4  issues,  $10  U.S.)  Bill  me 

2 years  (8  issues,  $18  U.S.)  Check  enc. 

Name 

Street 

City State Zip 


73 

z 

n 

m 

H 

O 

Z 

z 

pn 

5= 


n 

z 


m 

73 

C/3 

m 

►< 


o 

OD 

\J\ 

-b. 

NJ 


T3 

JO 

z 

n 

W 

H 

v-/ 

Z 

H 

1 
m 
0 
r 
0 
O 

o 

> 

r 

C/3 

pn 

2 

Z 

> 

jo 

«<